JP7239184B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image imitating the operation means;
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation means, and is an operation promotion image made up of characters representing an operation method without including the name of the operation means. and
a first effect in which the operation prompting image is displayed in a state where the operation means image is not displayed on the display means, and the size of the displayed operation prompting image is reduced ;
After the first effect , a second effect in which the operation means image is displayed while the operation prompting image displayed in the first effect continues to be displayed from the first effect. and
After the second effect, a third effect in which both the operation prompting image and the operation means image change in size,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4 and T10; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the third movable accessory 13; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a sub-display screen 64; FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining a pending icon switching effect A; FIG. 11 is a second diagram for explaining the pending icon switching effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon switching effect B; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a changing icon acquisition effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a changing icon acquisition effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a changing icon acquisition effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon movement change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon movement change effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon movement change effect C; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific icon stock effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific icon stock effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific icon stock effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation stock effect A (first half); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation stock effect A (second half); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation stock effect B (second half); It is a figure for demonstrating the icon number design production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon number design production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon number design production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold|hold icon production|presentation A at the time of a reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending|holding icon production|presentation B at the time of a reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending|holding icon production|presentation C at the time of reaching. It is a figure for demonstrating the special holding|holding production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a special holding effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a special holding effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon success/failure effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon success/failure effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon success/failure effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect A; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect C; FIG. It is the figure which showed the jackpot expectation degree table|surface classified by icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon special change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon special change effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect B; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the said variable icon jump production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means appearance effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means appearance effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means appearance effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a component assembly effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a component assembly effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a part assembly effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating decorative design production|presentation A at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative design production|presentation B at the time of reaching. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative design production|presentation C at the time of reaching. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a group promotion effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a group promotion effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a group promotion effect C; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop decorative design appearance production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop decorative design appearance production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop decorative design appearance production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern color change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern color change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern color change production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a color change ready-to-reach effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a color change ready-to-reach effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a color change ready-to-reach effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character attack effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character attack effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character attack effect C; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design color change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design color change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design color change production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special design production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special design production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special design production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design visibility change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design visibility change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design visibility change production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design rotation stop display effect|action A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design rotation stop display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design rotation stop display effect|action C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an expectation degree number display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an expectation degree number display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an expectation degree number display effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the specific production|presentation execution suggestion production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific production|presentation execution suggestion production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific production|presentation execution suggestion production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a special direction suggesting effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a special direction suggesting effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a special direction suggesting effect C; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a production sound effect production A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a production sound effect production B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a production sound effect presentation C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a lyric image effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a lyric image effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a lyric image effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific area variable effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific area variable effect B; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific area variable effect C; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining reliability in character appearance; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a reliability change effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a reliability change effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an item superimposition effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an item superimposition effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an item superimposition effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the game board by a transparent acrylic board. 147 is a continuation diagram for explaining the game board of FIG. 146; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable accessory decoration light emission production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining W-mode display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a W-mode display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a W-mode display effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the locking method to the upper plate of a sword member. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a moving part operation warning effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a moving part operation warning effect B;

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on the player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62, effect button 63, sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), sword member 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, It has An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. As shown in FIG. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a big winning opening opening start opening 17, and a general winning opening 27 ( It is equipped with a normal prize winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and display devices 40. - 特許庁

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game pegs for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a suspended digested image display area (the suspended display area) in which the suspended digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The pending icon 9C may also be simply called a pending icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect" or "variation display". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) that is currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and the display of the suspended digested image 9C allows the first special figure pending or the first 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("digestion of special figure suspension" described later).

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, first board movable bodies 14 (also referred to as first movable accessories 14), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semi-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( advance) and stop at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7 .

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, third board movable bodies 13 (also referred to as third movable accessories 13), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The third movable accessory 13 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left and right direction. Each of the two members is formed with a ring-shaped decorative portion, and a circular transmitting portion having transparency is provided inside the ring-shaped portion. The third movable accessory 13 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( advance) and stop at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. In the third movable accessory 13, when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, the two ring-shaped decorative parts are close to each other to form a spectacle shape, covering a part of the image display device 7. - 特許庁

A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which the game balls flow in and an exit part from which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers lottery of the second special symbol (small winning lottery and big winning lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a jackpot random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is used. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``special symbol lottery'' means that when a game ball wins in the second start port 21, a small winning random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired small winning random number is set in advance. By comparing with the value corresponding to "small hit", it means the process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of the special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display device 41b described later, and a lottery is drawn after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. A special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance patterns are variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols, and by this pattern matching game, the lottery result of the small win is more effectively notified to the player. .

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above and to the right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big winning hole 30 has an opening/closing member (first special winning hole opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small winning attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and is the second big winning port (second special A winning opening) 35 is provided. The second big prize winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or permits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. This second big winning device is a small winning attacker that is activated when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 and wins a small winning lottery.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (changes display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped manner, so that a lottery (jackpot lottery) based on the winning of the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is performed. Notify the results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 notifies the result of the lottery (small win lottery) based on the winning to the second starting port 21 by displaying the special symbol (identification information) variably (variable display) and then stopping the display. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (small winning pattern) of a predetermined small winning stop mode, a special game (small winning game) is performed to open the second big winning hole 35 in a predetermined opening pattern. In addition, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 in the small winning game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. When a small prize is won, a small prize pattern in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit is displayed, such as "○○●●●●●●" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). In the case of a failure, a failure pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not stopped (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even when a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the 2 major winning opening sensor 35a, V area sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are illustrated. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17 a is provided inside the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning hole sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning hole 29 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. do. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 based on the command received from the main control board 80. FIG. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining motion modes of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13, and generates the motion pattern data. According to the above, the operation of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 is controlled. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. A sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been detected is also connected to the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9, and a small win judgment table T10 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A small hit flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 generates a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)", and a "small hit random number". is acquired at a timing described later. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The “small hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery (small hit determination) as to whether or not a small hit is made, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. The “jackpot random number”, the “jackpot type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “fluctuation pattern random number” are obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 . A “small hit random number” is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 . The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8(E) , a diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/397), and the jackpot random value is "0 to 164 Numerical values other than (165 to 65535)” are determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it is determined as a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/101), and the jackpot random number is a number other than "0 to 649 (650 ~65535)” is determined to be “losing”. The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether It should be noted that this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the obtained jackpot random number value corresponds to "jackpot". In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (any one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

In the small hit determination table T10, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the small hit random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "small hit" or "losing". This table is referenced to determine whether to It should be noted that this small hit determination table T10 is not referred to when the obtained big hit random number value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8 (E), in all states (regardless of the game state), if the small hit random value is "0 to 63", it is determined as a "small hit" (probability 1/2), If the numerical value is "a numerical value (64 to 127) other than 0 to 63", it is determined to be "losing". It should be noted that the small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when a game ball wins in the second start hole 21 (not referred to when a game ball wins in the first start hole 20). Also, the small win determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when a "big win" is determined.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is ``41 to 82'', the jackpot type is determined to be ``16RV passage scheduled jackpot'', and the stop pattern of special figure 2 (special figure stop pattern) is determined to be ``jackpot pattern 2''. . When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. .
In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". Also, in the non-time-saving state, digest the hold of the second start-up port 21 (because it is difficult to win the second start-up port 21 in the non-time-saving state, the time-saving state (high probability high base state) ends and the normal state (non- When it becomes a time saving state, a low probability base state), the suspension of the second start port 21 is digested), it is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, and "16 RV passage schedule big hit" in the big hit determination table T5. , “big hit pattern 2 (21H)”, and when the variation pattern random number is “0 to 127”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P22”. Also, in the non-time saving state, the suspension of the second start port 21 is digested, and it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P34" is determined.

In FIG. 11, for example, the first start port 20 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined as "no reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of held balls is "3 to 4” and the fluctuation pattern random number is “0 to 127”, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P56”. Also, in the time saving state, the second start port 21 is won, and it is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, and is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" and "big hit pattern 2 (21H)" in the big hit type determination table T5. , when the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". In addition, when the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P74". is shown to be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. For example, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is digested in the non-time saving state and it is determined as a small hit, the variation pattern is determined as "P34" and the variation time is determined as 15000 msec. In addition, when winning the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and it is determined as a small hit, the variation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the variation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when entering the second start port 21 Since the fluctuation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits occur frequently in a short time. Then, during the small winning rush period, it is possible to aim for a big winning while increasing the number of game balls in hand. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams. In particular, SP5 is a variation pattern of dedicated reach in which a pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect is performed by winning the second start port 21 during a small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in a time-saving state (high-probability high-base state) described later ( "P62"). In addition, SP5 occurs during the pending digestion of the second start port 21 when the time saving state (high probability high base state) ends and becomes normal state (non-time saving state, low probability low base state) In this case as well, a pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect can be performed (fluctuation pattern “P22”).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the first big winning opening 30 and The opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H" and "22H", the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening The opening pattern of the mouth 35 is determined as "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first big winning mouth 30 and the second big winning mouth 35 is "opening pattern 23". is shown to be determined. In addition, in FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 25" as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game. , When the special figure stop symbol data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".
FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of opening pattern 21, opening pattern 22 and opening pattern 23 as the big winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second for 1 time at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.
FIG. 13(C) shows the contents of open pattern 25 and open pattern 26 as the large winning opening open pattern in the small winning game. In the opening pattern 25, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened once with an opening time of 1.0 second. In the opening pattern 26, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened 5 times for an opening time of 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small winning game, the first big winning hole 30 is not opened, and only the second big winning hole 35 is opened. It should be noted that the opening pattern 25 is, when the "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" is achieved by the jackpot pattern 1 (20H) of the special figure 2, during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game, and the second after the end of the small hit rush. Reservation of the starting port 21 is performed during digestion. The opening pattern 26 is the second start port during the small winning rush period after the end of the big winning game and after the end of the small winning rush when the "16RV passage scheduled big win" is made by the big winning pattern 2 (21H) of the special figure 2. Twenty-one retentions are made during digestion. That is, the release pattern 26 is a small winning game that is performed after the big winning game when the big winning is achieved via the variation pattern ("P62") of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo-big winning suggestive effect described later is performed. It has an open pattern. In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game is different between when the big win is achieved through the pseudo-big win suggestive performance and when the big win is achieved without the pseudo-big win suggestive performance.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "opening pattern 31", When the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure It is shown that when the stop symbol data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins", "small wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "small win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying the "small win symbol". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. When a small win is won, a "small winning game" is executed to open a large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of big winning that triggered a small winning rush to be described later. be.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot".
The "V passage scheduled jackpot (probable variable jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates 71. In addition, the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is a high-probability base state after the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot game is started, and during that period, the second start port 21 It will be a small hit rush period in which you will win frequently and small hits will occur. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H ~ 14H, 20H, 21H jackpots correspond to "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big win that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . In addition, the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" will be in a low-probability base state after the jackpot game ends, and during that period it will be difficult to win a prize to the second start port 21. A small win rush period does not occur after the end of the big win game. Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage scheduled jackpot" includes "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd prize-winning mouth 35 for 29.5 seconds at the maximum per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V passing schedule jackpot (jackpot with a small hit rush), V The non-passing schedule jackpot is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern (special drawing 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot (jackpot with a small hit rush), and V non-passing schedule The jackpot is 45/128 (about 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment is shown in which the probability variation control and the variation time shortening control are executed simultaneously.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed 10,000 times. That is, the high-probability-high base state is substantially ended by winning the next jackpot (next jackpot) and executing the jackpot game. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability State (low probability state) and non-time saving state and low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the low-probability-low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a game state of a normal probability state (non-high probability state, ie, low probability state), a short time state and a high base state (electrical support control state), and this game state is particularly referred to as "low Probability high base state”, “low probability time saving state” (the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and high base state is referred to as “specific game state”). In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning prizes to the second starting port 21) than when hitting left, and to generate small hits frequently. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. This is because in the low electric base state, the electric sapo control is not executed, so it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is difficult to win the second starting port 21. This is because it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than to win the second start opening 21 . For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to win the game ball to the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This makes it possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning to the first starting port 20) than hitting to the right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal pattern random number, small hit random number) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a reserved ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value), variation pattern random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-T1 value), small hit random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-K value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained according to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot) and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, small hit determination, variation pattern selection and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a big hit game or a small hit game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

In the special action process, the process related to the first special symbol display device 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display device 41b are made independent, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. may be configured to allow simultaneous variation of the In this case, the processing for the first special symbol display 41a and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each stage of the "special figure 1 operation status" Call them "1", "2", "3" and "4". In addition, the second special symbol display device 41b and the process related to the big winning device are divided into four stages, and each stage is "1", "2", "3", "4" of "special figure 2 operation status" respectively. call. The initial setting of "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not one of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", special electric accessary product processing is performed. In the special electric accessary product process, a big hit game or a small hit game is executed. Specifically, when the special figure 1 operation status is "4", the jackpot game by the special figure 1 jackpot is executed. When the special figure 2 operation status is "4", a big hit game or a small hit game by the special figure 2 big hit is executed. When neither the "special figure 1 operation status" nor the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". ” is determined. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", the special figure 1 standby process is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, hit determination of special figure 1, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", perform the special figure 1 changing process. In special figure 1 fluctuating process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has elapsed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 determination process is performed. In the special figure 1 determination process, the output of the opening command etc. is executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2" or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" or "2". A determination of "3" is made. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", the special figure 2 standby process is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the special figure 2 hit determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", perform the special figure 2 changing process. In special figure 2 fluctuating process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation time elapses. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 determination process is performed. In the special figure 2 determination process, the output of the opening command etc. is executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special action process of the present embodiment, standby process of special figure 1, process during fluctuation, confirmation process and standby process of special figure 2, fluctuation process, confirmation process are executed in parallel be. On the other hand, the jackpot game and the small hit game are executed with priority over the special figure 1 and special figure 2 standby processing, variation processing, and determination processing.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes small hit determination processing (step S1401). In the small hit determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the small hit determination with reference to the small hit determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first stores a small hit random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit by reading and using the read small hit random value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the small winning flag when the result of the small winning determination is "small winning", and sets the special figure stop design data corresponding to the small winning design in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , the process ends. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes big hit determination processing (step S1402) and variation pattern selection processing (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information about the special figure stop design data set in the small hit determination process (step S1401), and the big hit determination process (Step S1402) information on the special figure stop design data set in, information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information on variation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special Figure 2 big hit determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 big hit determination process (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big-hit determination is performed (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to make the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") among the big hit determination tables T1 determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing" (the result of the small hitting determination is also "losing"), the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is provided in the main RAM84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). If the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small hit flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state small hit among the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to select the variation pattern. (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state small hit, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. (Address is set). "P34" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604). It is done based on the special figure stop design data.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in special figure 2 the fluctuation pattern is “P21”, “P22” part) is set). From the read variation pattern random number, either "P1" ~ "P3" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P21" or "P22" in the special figure 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. "P4" ~ "P6" part, the part where the variation pattern is "P23" in the special figure 2) is set). From the read variation pattern random number, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

In step S1610, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number and the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4). Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, the part corresponding to reach-less loss (in special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P15" ~ The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is steps S1605, S1606, It differs from S1608, S1609 and S1611. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621 , the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" to "P43" part, and in special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P61" or "P62" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" or "P62" in the special figure 2 is selected. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (special figure In 1, the variation pattern is “P44” to “P46”, and in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is “P63”). From the read variation pattern random number, either "P44" ~ "P46" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit ("P74" portion) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referred to. "P74" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern. (Step S1630) This processing ends. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). If the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808) and terminates this process. As a result, the big winning game and the small winning game are not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the big winning determination, the small winning determination, etc. for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the big win with small hit rush (step S1811). . Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this process.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). In addition, when "10000" is set to the probability variation counter, the value of the probability variation counter does not actually become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, "10000" is set to the time-saving counter at the time of transition to the time-saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). In addition, when "10000" is set to a time saving counter, the value of a real time saving counter will not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for opening the big winning opening are established (step S2203). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the large winning opening opening start opening 17 as a condition for opening the large winning opening. If there is no entry into the special winning opening opening starting opening 17, it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied. When a ball enters the large winning opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the large winning opening. The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round specifying command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not established (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the special electric accessary product processing, in addition to the opening processing of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) in the big winning game as described above, the big winning opening (second big winning opening) in the small winning game The processing for opening the second prize winning port 35) is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 opens a large winning opening ( After opening the second large prize winning port 35), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large prize winning port (Fig. 13) is satisfied. Closes (closes) the big winning opening (finishes the small winning game). After that, the small winning flag is turned OFF, and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this processing.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 advances the process to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "10000" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "10000" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 10,000 times, or the next jackpot is won.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost reached before the 10000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high-probability base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the big hit in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the big hit scheduled to pass through V (special figure stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the big hit game If V passes in the middle, the game state after the big win will be in a high-probability high base state until the next big win, and it is almost guaranteed that it will be a small win rush.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of number of pending balls]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the game state information included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and when the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead rendering pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic production patterns for SP4 production, multiple types of basic production patterns for SP5 production (dedicated reach production pattern for pseudo-jackpot suggestion production described later), and multiple types of basic production for non-reach production. Patterns and multiple types of basic production patterns that perform small hit production are set. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P74", a basic effect pattern for performing a small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the part which decides the fluctuation production pattern of special figure 1 at the time of non time saving state among chance up production pattern decision table T53 is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56", "P61" to "P74". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combinations of stop-display effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, etc. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. When the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, even if the pre-variation ending command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the preview fade effect of fading the preview image is performed. Do. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation of Movable Board Body and Display Effect of Sub-Display Screen 64 Using FIGS. The operation and the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 to operate during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. Take control. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when power is turned on, or the like.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the third movable accessory 13. As shown in FIG. The third movable accessory 13 includes a left movable accessory 13L and a right movable accessory 13R. The left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and ring-shaped decorative portions (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) are attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have a ring shape. Each of the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion is provided with a circular transparent portion having transparency inside the annular shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the third movable accessory 13 is at a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 13L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 13R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can stand still (first aspect). At this time, the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R are partially visible. As for the third movable accessory 13, as shown in FIG. 46, the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R advance from the state shown in FIG. By moving, at the advanced position (deployed position), the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are brought close to form one decorative member (unified accessory) (second aspect). Here, the united character forms glasses. That is, the left decorative portion and transparent portion correspond to the left frame and lens, and the right decorative portion and transparent portion correspond to the right frame and lens. In this second mode, the combined accessory obtained by combining the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion covers a part of the display screen 7a near the center on the front surface of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a is visible through the transparent portion. Pause when possible. The third movable accessory 13 can move from the advanced position shown in FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still there.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) are attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have a half arc shape of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is at a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can stand still (first mode). At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are partially visible. As for the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 47, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance from the state shown in FIG. By moving, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united at the advanced position (deployed position) to form one decorative member (united accessory) (second mode). Here, the united character forms the outline of the face. In this second mode, the combined accessory obtained by combining the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion covers a part of the display screen 7a near the center on the front surface of the image display device 7, and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stops in a visible state. In other words, the united role is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed and the central part of the face is absent, and instead the display screen 7a can be visually recognized. Then, by displaying the image of the face on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united character, the human face is completed as a whole. In other words, by displaying the missing part (for example, the central part of the face) of the united role as an image on the display screen 7a, a combination performance of the character and the image that completes one object (for example, a person's face) is performed. can be executed. The first movable accessory 14 can move from the advanced position shown in FIG. 47 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still there.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stand still.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory view showing an example of the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display an image. Moreover, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect example.

The suspension icon switching effects A and B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. This suspended icon switching effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a hold icon switching effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a.

[Hold icon switching effect A]
50 and 51 are diagrams for explaining the pending icon switching effect A. FIG. The on-hold icon switching effect is an effect in which the mode of a plurality of on-hold icons is switched. Aspects of the pending icon include the shape, color, behavior, size, etc. of the pending icon. In the suspended icon switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 50(A), three suspended icons 9A and a variable icon (the suspended icon ) 9C is displayed. All of the three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). In this state, when the game ball wins the fixed winning device (navel) 19, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the fourth reserved icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed pending icon has a star shape (star shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), among the three circular pending icons 9A displayed before the addition of the fourth pending icon 9A, the leftmost pending icon (the third from the right) The shape of the second hold icon) 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the shape of the second hold icon 9A from the right changes from a round shape to a star shape, and as shown in FIG. The shape of the hold icon 9A on the right side) changes from a round shape to a star shape. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), when the fourth pending icon 9A is additionally displayed in a star shape, all the previously displayed pending icons 9A are changed to 4 The shape changes from a circle to a star in order from the side closer to the second hold icon. Here, the shapes of the previously displayed three pending icons are sequentially changed by prefetching at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the circular variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(G), the four star-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed in the variable icon display area (the pending display area, the pending digested image display area). ) to become the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change is started. Here, along with the variable display of decorative patterns, a mini-game video effect is executed in which a humanoid character catches a star-shaped icon falling from above. The shape (star shape) of the icon falling from above corresponds to the shape (star shape) of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. That is, at the time of variation corresponding to the star-shaped variation icon (when the star-shaped variation icon is suspended), a mini-game effect in which the star-shaped icon falls is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. When the humanoid character catches four star-shaped icons in the mini-game, the same number of points as the caught icons is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of points is represented by the number of black stars. Here, the winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (navel) 19 occurs during this variation, and the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed pending icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, it is newly displayed after the star-shaped pending icon (the star-shaped pending icon 9A in FIG. 50(B) and the third pending icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50(H)) that is the target of prefetching. A pending icon is represented by a circular shape.

As shown in FIG. 50(I), one round and three star-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (star) is a variable icon display area (the pending display). area) and becomes a variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change is started. When the variation starts, a mini-game image effect similar to that shown in FIG. 50(G) is executed. That is, since this time is also a variation corresponding to the star-shaped variation icon 9C, a mini-game effect is executed in which a star-shaped icon corresponding in shape to the variation icon falls.

As shown in FIG. 50(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. If the doll character fails to catch the star-shaped icon (0 catches) in the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a remain unchanged. That is, the number of black stars does not change. Here, the winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (navel) 19 occurs during this variation, and the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed pending icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, since the newly displayed pending icon after the star-shaped pending icon (the second pending icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50(J)) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a circular shape, It becomes the second round hold icon.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the two round and two star-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (star) changes to the variable icon display area ( ), and becomes a variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change is started. When the variation starts, a mini-game image effect similar to that shown in FIG. 50(G) is executed. That is, since this time is also a variation corresponding to the star-shaped variation icon 9C, a mini-game effect is executed in which a star-shaped icon corresponding in shape to the variation icon falls.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. When the doll character catches two icons in the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increase by two to become six. That is, the number of black stars accumulated is 6. Here, the winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (navel) 19 occurs during this variation, and the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed pending icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, since the pending icon newly displayed after the star-shaped pending icon (the first pending icon 9A in FIG. 51B) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a round shape, three It becomes a round eye-shaped hold icon.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the three round and one star-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (star) changes to the variable icon display area ( ), and becomes a variable icon 9C. That is, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching becomes the variable icon, and the corresponding variation is started. When the change is started, an icon image ICG imitating a round pending icon 9C larger than the pending icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, six black star-shaped images representing points move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in order according to the number of absorbed black star images. The order in which the colors change is from a color with a low expectation of a big win to a high color. For example, the order is blue→green→red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a big win as the number of absorbed black star images increases.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the change icon 9C is displayed when the absorption of the point (black star image) is completed. Here, winning of game balls occurs during this variation, and the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed pending icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, since the pending icon newly displayed after the star-shaped pending icon (variable icon 9C in FIG. 51(D)) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a round shape, the fourth round shape is a pending icon.

The icon image ICG moves while shrinking, contacts the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. 51(E). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the variation corresponding to this variation icon 9C ends.

In FIG. 51(G), the four round pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (round) moves to the variable icon display area (the pending display area) and changes. It becomes icon 9C. At the same time, while the next variation is started, the effect of the mini-game image is not executed. That is, since this time is a change corresponding to the round change icon 9C, the mini-game effect in which a star-shaped icon whose shape does not correspond to the change icon is falling is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(H), at a specific timing during variation, the shapes of the three pending icons 9A change all at once (simultaneously) from round to star. After that, when the game ball wins during this variation, as shown in FIG. 51(I), the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed pending icon has a round shape. That is, the suspension icons that are newly displayed after the shape of the suspension icons 9A are changed all at once from the round shape to the star shape are represented by circular shapes. After that, as shown in FIG. 81(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the circular variation icon 9C disappears.

[Holding icon switching effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining pending icon switching effect B. FIG. The on-hold icon switching effect is an effect in which the modes of a plurality of on-hold icons are switched. Aspects of the pending icon include the shape, color, behavior, size, etc. of the pending icon. In the suspended icon switching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), three suspended icons 9A and a variable icon (the suspended icon ) 9C is displayed. Each of the three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C has a round shape (spherical shape).

In this state, when the game ball wins the fixed winning device (navel) 19, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the fourth reserved icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed pending icon has a shape representing the Roman letter "G". Simultaneously with the new display of the fourth pending icon 9A, the shapes of all other pending icons 9A change from round to G-shaped. Here, the shapes of the previously displayed three pending icons change at the same time by the prefetching at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the circular variation icon 9C disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the four G-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed in the variable icon display area (the pending display area, the pending digested image display area). ) to become a variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change is started. Here, along with the variable display of the decoration pattern, the production of the battle image between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is executed. The name of the ally character CRA (here, "GORO") corresponds to the shape (G shape) of the pending icon 9A and variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. That is, at the time of change corresponding to the G-shaped change icon, an image related to this "G" (here, the name of the friend character CRA includes G) is displayed (including the friend character CRA battle effect) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA wins (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of victories (points) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of wins (points) is represented by the number of black stars. Here, the winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (navel) 19 occurs during this variation, and the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed pending icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the suspension icon newly displayed after the G-shaped suspension icon (the third suspension icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52(E)) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a circular shape.

As shown in FIG. 52(F), one round and three G-shaped pending icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (G-shaped) changes to the variable icon display area (the pending display area) and becomes a variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change is started. When the variation starts, the same battle image production as that shown in FIG. 52(D) is executed. That is, since this time is also a change corresponding to the G-shaped change icon 9C, an effect in which an image corresponding to the change icon appears is executed. That is, a battle effect is executed in which the friendly character CRA with the name "GORO" including the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon appears.

As shown in FIG. 52(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA loses (defeats) to the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a does not change. That is, the number of black stars does not change. Here, the winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (navel) 19 occurs during this variation, and the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed pending icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, since the newly displayed pending icon after the G-shaped pending icon (the second pending icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52(G)) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a circular shape, It becomes the second round hold icon.

Subsequently, the two round and two G-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the pending display area) and changes. It becomes icon 9C. At the same time, the next change is started. When the variation starts, the same battle image production as that shown in FIG. 52(D) is executed. That is, since this time is also the time of variation corresponding to the G-shaped variation icon 9C, an effect in which an image corresponding to the variation icon appears is executed. That is, a battle effect is executed in which the friendly character CRA with the name "GORO" including the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon appears.

As shown in FIG. 52(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA wins (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increases by one to become two. That is, the number of black stars accumulated is 6.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52(I), two round and one G-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (G-shaped) changes to the variable icon display area ( ), and becomes a variable icon 9C. That is, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching becomes the variable icon, and the corresponding variation is started. When the change starts, an icon image ICG imitating a round pending icon 9C larger than the pending icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, two black star-shaped images representing the number of wins move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in order according to the number of absorbed black star images. The order in which the colors change is from a color with a low expectation of a big win to a high color. For example, the order is blue→green→red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a big win as the number of absorbed black star images increases.

As shown in FIG. 52(J), the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the change icon 9C is displayed when the absorption of the point (black star image) is completed. The icon image ICG moves while shrinking, contacts the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon switching effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(C) to 50(E), a first effect in which the three round pending icons 9A are switched from a round shape to a star shape, and a first After the effect, as shown in FIG. 50(H), a second effect in which a new round pending icon is additionally displayed, and after the second effect, as shown in FIG. A third effect in which the displayed round pending icon and the three star-shaped pending icons shift and move can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 52 is also the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(B), in the first effect, the three round pending icons are changed from the round shape to G at the timing when a new pending icon is additionally displayed. switch to shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 51, in the first effect, the three round pending icons are changed from round to star-shaped by prefetching corresponding to a new pending icon. It will switch and a new pending icon will also appear in the shape of a star. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 52 is also the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(G) to (J) and FIGS. 51(A) to (B), after the third effect, the star-shaped pending icon corresponds to the pending digestion. During the change, a fourth effect using an image corresponding to the image represented by the star-shaped pending icon is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 52 is also the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(C) to 51(E), in the fourth effect, points are accumulated during a plurality of variations, and the last of the star-shaped pending icons is displayed. During the variation corresponding to the pending icon, the last pending icon is changed in a manner corresponding to the accumulated points. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 52 is also the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(H), (J), 51(B), and (D), when there is a new winning during the fourth effect, a new According to this configuration, in which the hold icon of the first mode is additionally displayed, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed in the past, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 52 is also the same.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon switching effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the pending icon switching effect A, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), when the fourth pending icon 9A is additionally displayed in a star shape, all the previously displayed pending icons are displayed. While the icon 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape, the variation icon 9C does not change. However, in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), the fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed in a star shape, and all the previously displayed pending icons 9A change from round shapes to star shapes. When doing so, the variation icon 9C may also change into a star shape. The same applies to the pending icon switching effect B (FIG. 52).

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon switching effect A, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to 50(E), when the fourth hold icon 9A is additionally displayed in a star shape, all the hold icons displayed before that are displayed. It is assumed that the icon 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape. However, in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), the fourth pending icon 9A is first newly displayed in a round shape, then changed to a star shape, and then all the previously displayed , may change from a round shape to a star shape. The same applies to the pending icon switching effect B (FIG. 52). In FIG. 52, the fourth pending icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a round shape, and thereafter, all the pending icons 9A including the newly added pending icon change all at once (simultaneously) from a round shape to a star shape. You may

[Modification 3]
Suspended icon switching effects A and B are assumed to be executed in the normal state. However, the pending icon switching effects A and B may be executed during the time saving state. In this case, the effects executed in the pending icon 9A of the pending icon switching effects A and B may be executed by the pending icon 9B.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
a first effect in which the plurality of pending icons are switched from a first mode to a second mode;
a second effect in which a new pending icon in the first mode is additionally displayed after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the additionally displayed hold icon of the first mode and the plurality of hold icons of the second mode shift and move,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first effect, the plurality of pending icons are switched from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when a new pending icon is additionally displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the first effect, the plurality of pending icons are switched from the first mode to the second mode by prefetching corresponding to the new pending icon, and the new pending icon is also the second mode. displayed with
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the third effect, during the plurality of changes corresponding to the pending digestion of the plurality of pending icons in the second mode, the second mode using the image corresponding to the image represented by the pending icon in the second mode 4 productions are executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
In the fourth effect, points are accumulated during the plurality of changes, and the last reserved icon is accumulated during the change corresponding to the last reserved icon among the plurality of reserved icons in the second aspect. change to a mode corresponding to the point
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4 or aspect A1-5,
If a new prize is won during the fourth production, a new pending icon of the first mode is additionally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

53 to 55, the changing icon acquisition effects A to C will be described below. 53 to 55, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. is therefore omitted.

This changing icon acquisition effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (variable displays) by decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-determining command). corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7 to display the image on the display screen 7a.

The background image (referred to as "specific background image") used in the change icon acquisition effect is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, such as a moon surface image, an outer space image, or an image inside a spacecraft. It has become. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an undersea image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, the changing icon acquisition effect A will be described first, and the changing icon acquisition effect B and then the changing icon acquisition effect C will be described in order.

[Change icon acquisition effect A]
The change icon acquisition effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the changing icon acquisition effect A. FIG. The changing icon acquisition effect A is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable displays) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 53A, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9A displayed at the suspended display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 53(A), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, and when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 and the change icon acquisition effect A is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 53(B) ), the area where the variable display position 9Cd, the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A are displayed, and the surrounding area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). In addition, since the game ball has entered the first starting port 20, two pending icons 9A are present.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after the change, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 53(B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of a square surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 53(C). It has become. Further, the shape of the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed is as shown in FIG. 53(B). 53(C) shows the shape of the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed. Furthermore, only the lower two corners of the four corners of the square surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines.

The shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is the shape of the specific display position used as the effect in the changing icon acquisition effect A, and the flash By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed and the shape of the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed, It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. It should be noted that the player can also be notified of the start of the changing icon acquisition effect A by the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

Further, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 53B, whereas after the flash FH is displayed The variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A in , are effect button images (turned off) imitating the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 53(C). This effect button image is an image that prompts the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63, does not indicate the degree of expectation for winning, and is a specific icon used as an effect in the changing icon acquisition effect A. That is, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect A.

In FIG. 53(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A, changes, a message MG1 saying "Press the button to get the change icon!" At this point, the effect button images of the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are all turned off, and even if the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, nothing is reflected in the effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". If the stop display results in a miss, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. In FIGS. 53A to 53D, a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. When the suspended icon 9A moved to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the effect button image which is the variable icon 9C becomes a blinking display mode, prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (pressing operation). is effective, and prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63.例文帳に追加At this time, in the center of the display screen 7a, a message MG1 saying "Press the button to acquire the change icon!" Also, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed at high speed ( fluctuating display). The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are difficult to see during the fluctuation.

After that, the message MG1 "Press the button to get the change icon!" It moves to the upper right corner of the screen 7a while being reduced, and is displayed in two lines in a size smaller than a large character and larger than a small character (approximately twice as large as a small character Oki). In this way, the message MG1 can be displayed in one line with small characters shown in FIG. 53(E), and then displayed in two lines in a size larger than the small characters (approximately twice as large as the large characters in the small characters). There are a total of three display modes, and the contents of the message MG1 are displayed in a game by an unprecedented expression method of displaying the same content in three display modes during the change icon acquisition effect A. It can be clearly and emphatically communicated to people.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53(F), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or the player does not operate (presses) the effect button 63 for a predetermined period (for example, left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, three seconds after the start of the variable effect (variable display), a message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to inform whether or not the variable icon has been acquired. be. Here, a message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the display screen 7a because the change icon cannot be obtained. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "3". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the effect button image that is the variable icon 9C becomes a blinking display mode, The player is informed that the operation (pressing operation) of the performance button 63 is effective, and prompts the player to operate the performance button 63 (pressing operation). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably produced (variably displayed) at high speed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or the player does not operate (presses) the effect button 63 for a predetermined period (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, when three seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable effect (variable display), the message MG2 is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a to inform whether or not the variable icon has been acquired. be done. Here, the change icon can be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Acquisition!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are still rapidly variably produced (variably displayed), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 53(H). After that, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the white spherical icon displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash. Then, by activating the stored change icon HI, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward the appearing white spherical icon, the size of the appearing white spherical icon increases, and is displayed as an icon at the maximum. It is about four times larger than the size of the white spherical icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a, changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and this star-shaped icon blinks. It moves while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd where the effect button image, which is the variable icon 9C, is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(K), the effect button image, which is the variable icon 9C, is switched to a star-shaped icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first to fourth retention display positions 9Ad to the four corners of the square shape in which the lower two corners are represented by white lines. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Although the star-shaped icon is reduced during movement, it is larger than the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53L, the moon image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 as the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 as the normal background image is switched again). THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image)), and the left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to the original variation area. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the changing icon acquisition effect A ends. Various effects may be further continued after the changing icon acquisition effect A, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a jackpot is produced and thereafter. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, the game is lost.

[Change icon acquisition effect B]
Next, change icon acquisition effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the changing icon acquisition effect B. FIG. The changing icon acquisition effect B is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable displays) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable performance (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9A displayed at the suspended display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 54(A), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, and when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 and the change icon acquisition effect B is started by the anticipation effect, FIG. 54(B) ), the area where the variable display position 9Cd, the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A are displayed, and the surrounding area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). In addition, since the game ball has entered the first starting port 20, two pending icons 9A are present.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after the change, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 54(B). 54(C), the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of a square surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines It has become. Further, the shape of the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed is as shown in FIG. 54(C) shows the shape of the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed. Furthermore, only the lower two corners of the four corners of the square surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines.

The shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is the shape of the specific display position used as the effect in the changing icon acquisition effect B, and the flash By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed and the shape of the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed, It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. It should be noted that the player can also be notified of the start of the changing icon acquisition effect B by the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

Further, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 54(B). 54(C), the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in FIG. That is, the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect B. FIG. Although the sword image imitates the sword member 65, even if the player pushes the sword member 65, the effect is not reflected in the change icon acquisition effect B at all.

In FIG. 54(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A, changes, a message MG1 saying "Repel and acquire the change icon!"

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". If the stop display results in a miss, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. In FIGS. 54A to 54D, a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. When the suspended icon 9A that was being held moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a large character (approximately four times the size of the small character) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Acquire a change icon!" is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably produced (variably displayed) at high speed. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are difficult to see during the fluctuation.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and after that, large characters (approximately four times the size of the small characters) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a are displayed. The message MG1 "Repel and acquire the change icon!" is now moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced, and is smaller than the large characters and larger than the small characters (compared to Oki of the small characters). is displayed in two lines. In this way, the message MG1 can be displayed in one line with small characters shown in FIG. 54(E), and then displayed in two lines in a size larger than the small characters (approximately twice as large as the large characters in the small characters). There are a total of three display modes, and the contents of the message MG1 are displayed in a game by an unprecedented expression method of displaying the same content in three display modes during the change icon acquisition effect B. It can be easily understood and emphasized.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(F), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start a variable effect (variable display)) passes, A message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to inform whether or not the change icon has been obtained. Here, since the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, the change icon cannot be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the display screen 7a to the left of the enemy character CRB. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "3". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at high speed. A variable production (variable display) is performed. As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(G), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start a variable effect (variable display)) passes, The message MG2 is again displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to inform whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, since the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, the change icon can be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Acquisition!" is displayed on the display screen 7a on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are still rapidly variably produced (variably displayed), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 54(H). After that, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the white spherical icon displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash. Then, by activating the stored change icon HI, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward the appearing white spherical icon, the size of the appearing white spherical icon increases, and is displayed as an icon at the maximum. It is about four times larger than the size of the white spherical icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a and is not switched from the white spherical icon to another icon, that is, the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. , and the white spherical icon moves while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd where the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(K), the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is switched to a white spherical icon reduced to the original size. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first to fourth retention display positions 9Ad to the four corners of the square shape in which the lower two corners are represented by white lines. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(L), the moon image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 as the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 as the normal background image is switched again). THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image)), and the left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to the original variation area. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the changing icon acquisition effect B ends. Various effects may be further continued after the changing icon acquisition effect B, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is made after that. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, the game is lost.

[Change icon acquisition effect C]
Next, the changing icon acquisition effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the changing icon acquisition effect B. FIG. The changing icon acquisition effect C is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable displays) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 55A, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9A displayed at the suspended display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three pending icons that are stocked without being digested.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 55(A), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, and when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 and the change icon acquisition effect C is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 55(B) ), the area where the variable display position 9Cd, the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A are displayed, and the surrounding area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). It should be noted that there are four pending icons 9A as a result of the game ball entering the first starting port 20. FIG.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after the change, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 55(B). 55(C), the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of a square surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines It has become. Further, the shape of the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed is as shown in FIG. 55(B). 55(C) shows the shape of the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed. Furthermore, only the lower two corners of the four corners of the square surrounding the pending icon 9A are represented by white lines.

The shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is the shape of the specific display position used as an effect in the change icon acquisition effect C, and the flash By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed and the shape of the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed, It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. It should be noted that the start of the change icon acquisition effect C can be notified to the player also by the shape change of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

Further, before the flash FH is displayed, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A are white spherical icons, as shown in FIG. 55B. 55(C), the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in FIG. That is, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect C. FIG. Although the sword image imitates the sword member 65, even if the player pushes the sword member 65, the effect is not reflected in the change icon acquisition effect C at all.

In FIG. 55(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth suspension display positions 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A, changes, a message MG1 saying "Repel and acquire the change icon!"

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". If the stop display results in a miss, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. In FIGS. 55A to 55D, a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. When the suspended icon 9A that was being held moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a large character (approximately four times the size of the small character) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Acquire a change icon!" is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably produced (variably displayed) at high speed. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are difficult to see during the fluctuation.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and after that, large characters (approximately four times the size of the small characters) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a are displayed. The message MG1 "Repel and acquire the change icon!" is now moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced, and is smaller than the large characters and larger than the small characters (compared to Oki of the small characters). is displayed in two lines. In this way, the message MG1 can be displayed in one line with small characters as shown in FIG. 55(E), and then displayed in two lines in a size larger than the small characters (approximately twice as large as the large characters in the small characters). There are a total of three display modes, and the contents of the message MG1 are displayed in a game by an unprecedented expression method of displaying the same content in three display modes during the changing icon acquisition effect C. It can be clearly and emphatically communicated to people.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(F), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start a variable effect (variable display)) passes, A message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to inform whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, since the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, the change icon cannot be acquired, and a message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the display screen 7a to the left of the enemy character CRB. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "3". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at high speed. A variable production (variable display) is performed. As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(G), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start a variable effect (variable display)) passes, A message MG2 is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a to tell whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, since the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, the change icon can be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Acquisition!" is displayed on the display screen 7a on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "2". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(H), the change icon HI is stock-displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and then displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are rapidly variably produced (variably displayed). As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(I), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start a variable effect (variable display)) passes, A message MG2 is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a to tell whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, since the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, the change icon cannot be acquired, and a message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the display screen 7a to the left of the enemy character CRB. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "3". Then, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at high speed. A variable production (variable display) is performed. As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(J), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start a variable effect (variable display)) elapses, A message MG2 is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a to tell whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, since the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, the change icon can be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Acquisition!" is displayed on the display screen 7a on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are still rapidly variably produced (variably displayed), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(K), another change icon HI is stocked above the change icon HI already stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. After that, the white spherical icon displayed as an icon becomes about 1.5 times larger in size with a flash of light. It appears in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, by activating the two change icons HI, HI that are arranged vertically and stocked, the two change icons HI, HI that are arranged vertically are directed toward this appearing white spherical icon, and then a lightning bolt is displayed. , and the size of the white spherical icon that has appeared is increased to about four times the size of the white spherical icon displayed as the icon at maximum.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(L), the two change icons HI, HI arranged vertically disappear from the display screen 7a, and the white spherical icon is switched to a red smiling spherical icon. Then, the smiling sphere icon moves while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd where the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(M), the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is switched to the smiling sphere icon. At this time, the change display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square are represented by white lines, and the first to fourth retention display positions 9Ad to the four corners of the square are represented by white lines in the lower two corners. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Although the smiling sphere icon is reduced in size during movement, it is larger than the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(N), the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 is used as the normal background image). THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image)), and the left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to the original variation area. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the changing icon acquisition effect C ends. Various effects may be further continued after the changing icon acquisition effect C, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is made after that. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, the game is lost.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the change icon acquisition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 20 (ball entrance), and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. With the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A as the same specific icon, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect in which the change icon acquisition effect A is switched to a effect button image imitating the effect button 63 and displayed, and the change icon acquisition effects B, C. , it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect in which a sword image simulating the sword member 65 is switched and displayed. 53 (F) and (G) in the change icon acquisition effect A, FIGS. 54 (F) and (G) in the change icon acquisition effect B, and FIG. 55 in the change icon acquisition effect C. (F), (G), (J)) can be executed. According to this configuration, by switching the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A to the same specific icon, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the digestion mode of the pending icon 9A, and increase the expectation of winning. A player can be given an opportunity to acquire a changeable (up-able) change icon HI. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. It's like According to this configuration, the first effect can be executed even if there is a single pending icon 9A or a plurality of pending icons 9A. If there is one or more pending icons 9A, the first effect can be executed. Therefore, even if there is only one pending icon 9A, the player's expectation of winning. It is possible to continue to give the player a sense of anticipation of an opportunity to acquire the changeable icon HI that can be raised, and to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to the number of pending icons 9A.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. It is possible to obtain an opportunity to obtain an icon HI. According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to acquire the changed icon HI as many times as the number of the specific icons. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation for an increase. It should be noted that the number of pending icons 9A (that is, the number of specific icons) does not need to match the number of changeable icons that can be obtained. When the changing icon acquisition effect A, the changing icon acquiring effect B, and the changing icon acquiring effect C are performed, sometimes the changing icon cannot be acquired, and sometimes one changing icon can be acquired. Sometimes two change icons can be obtained, and sometimes three change icons can be obtained.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. When the variable icon 9C that has switched to the specific icon is digested and disappears due to the end of the variable effect (variable display), the suspended icon 9A that has switched to the specific icon moves in a certain direction (the variable icon 9C that displays the variable icon 9C). It can be shifted towards position 9Cd). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually notify the player of the degree of decrease in the number of specific icons and inform the player of the number of remaining chances to acquire the changing icon.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. The change icon HI cannot be acquired during the change effect (during the change display) at the time when the look-ahead effect switches the change icon 9C and the pending icon 9A to the specific icon. Although the variable icon 9C may be used as a notice ("variable effect" that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during variable display), the variable icon 9C in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is It is not a notice for the variable production (during the variable display), but it is also used as a notice to inform the start of the first production (that is, in the next variable production (next variable display)). This is different from using the change icon 9C as an advance notice for (during change display).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. When the pending icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C and the variable effect (variable display) is started, the variable icon HI can be acquired during the variable effect (variable display), and the acquired variable icon HI can be stocked. It has become. According to this configuration, the acquired change icon HI is stocked instead of being immediately digested at the time of acquisition. Expectations for the effect of activating the icon HI, that is, expectations for an increase in the degree of expectation for a win are heightened.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effects in the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. A second effect of switching from the variation icon 9C, which is changed to a specific icon by emitting a lightning bolt from the changed icon HI stocked by , to an icon suggesting the degree of expectation of winning (in the change icon acquisition effect A, FIG. 53 (I), FIG. 54(I) can be executed in the change icon acquisition effect B, and FIG. 55(K) can be executed in the change icon acquisition effect C). According to this configuration, when the second effect is performed, the effect of activating the changed icon HI already stocked is exhibited, so that the player can increase the number of changed icons HI stocked and the degree of expectation for winning. You can discover the relationship (regularity) by yourself.

[Modification]
A modified example of the changing icon acquisition effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
53, the changing icon obtaining effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon obtaining effect C of FIG. . In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the changing icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. However, without using the look-ahead effect, the sub-control board 90 may determine whether or not to perform by a unique lottery. In this case, in order to execute any one of the changing icon acquisition effect A, the changing icon acquisition effect B, and the changing icon acquisition effect C over a plurality of variable effects (variable displays) by decorative symbols, the sub control board 90 must take into consideration the performance time indicated by the variable performance start command from the main control board 80 while adjusting the progress of the variable icon acquisition performance in real time.

[Modification 3]
53, the changing icon obtaining effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon obtaining effect C of FIG. However, it may be displayed on the display screen of another image display device provided separately from the image display device 7 . Other image display devices may be provided on the game board 2 together with the image display device 7 or may be provided on the front frame 53 . In this way, since there are a plurality of image display devices, it is possible to increase variations in the display modes of the plurality of image display devices.

[Modification 4]
53, the changing icon obtaining effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon obtaining effect C of FIG. However, the game board 2 or the front frame 53 is provided with a plurality of three-dimensionally shaped structures that imitate change icons, and the number of change icons obtained by the number of light emitted by these structures is communicated to the player. can be

[Modification 5]
53, the changing icon obtaining effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon obtaining effect C of FIG. was At this time, the stored change icon HI may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which it is exploded by the lightning bolt emitted by itself, or the stored change icon HI uses up its energy due to the lightning bolt emitted by itself, and the structure of itself is changed. It may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display form that peels off into pieces.

[Modification 6]
53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. It was supposed to be done when it was an icon. However, for example, it may be performed when the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are different icons. For example, when the variable icon 9C is a smiling sphere icon and the pending icon 9A is a white spherical icon, one of the changing icon acquisition effect A, the changing icon acquiring effect B, and the changing icon acquiring effect C is performed. may Although the variable icon 9C may be used as a notice ("change effect" that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during the variable display), it is used as a notice during the variable effect (during the variable display). Instead, it is used as an advance notice to tell the start of the changing icon acquisition effect A, the changing icon acquiring effect B, and the changing icon acquiring effect C to be started in the next variable display (next variable display).

[Modification 7]
53, the changing icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition effect C of FIG. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that switches and displays the variable icon and the holding icon to the same specific icon in relation to the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance,
When switching to the specific icon, it is possible to display a change icon capable of changing the expected degree of winning, and execute a first effect in which the change icon can be obtained.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
There is a single or a plurality of said pending icons,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the first effect, the number of opportunities to acquire the changing icons equal to the number of the specific icons can be obtained.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the first effect, when the variable icon that has switched to the specific icon is consumed and disappears due to the end of the variable effect, the reserved icon that has switched to the specific icon shifts in a certain direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the first effect, the variable icon cannot be acquired during the variable effect at the time when the look-ahead effect switches the variable icon and the pending icon to the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the first production, when the reserved icon switched to the specific icon becomes the variable icon and the variable production is started, the variable icon can be acquired during the variable production, and the acquired variable icon is stocked. do,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-6,
After the first production, a lightning bolt is emitted from the changing icon stocked by the first production, and the changing icon is switched to the specific icon. It is possible to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by:

The suspension icon movement change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. This pending icon movement change effect can be executed during a decorative symbol change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold icon movement change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon movement change effect A. FIG. The suspended icon movement change effect is an effect in which the image representing the suspended icon changes while moving. The aspect here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the suspended icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56A, three suspended icons 9A and the suspended icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (holding icon shape), they are collectively called simply "suspended icons 9A and 9C". The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), at a certain timing during the change, a character image of "Holding Change Pseudo Consecutive Start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (not displayed). After that, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The first position is to the left of the reserved display area. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 56(D), the suspension icon 9C moves from the first position toward the suspension display area in the right direction. In the ready-to-reach decorative pattern, the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color of the suspension icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of this "suspension change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous effect, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the form of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the pending icon 9C changes. The order in which the color of the pending icon 9C changes is from a color with a low expectation of a big win to a color with a high expectation. For example, the order is blue→green→red.

As shown in FIG. 56(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move rightward. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped at "567". This time, the middle decorative pattern 8C does not temporarily stop at the character image of "hold change", so the color of the hold icon 9C does not change. The pending icon 9C continues to move rightward.

As shown in FIG. 56(G), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move rightward. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the reach state of "3↓3", the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color and shape of the suspension icon 9C change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of this "suspension change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous effect, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped again instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the color and shape of the hold icon 9C change to a more expected aspect.

As shown in FIG. 56(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The suspension icon 9C continues to move to the right, reaches the suspension display area, and stops. That is, the hold icon 9C returns to its initial position. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a jackpot mode of "333".

[Holding icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining pending icon movement change effect B. FIG. The suspended icon movement change effect is an effect in which the image representing the suspended icon changes while moving. The aspect here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the suspended icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), three suspended icons 9A and the suspended icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (holding icon shape), they are collectively called simply "suspended icons 9A and 9C". The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), at a certain timing during the change, a character image of "Hold Change Pseudo Consecutive Start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (not displayed). After that, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, a new specific image BG is displayed below the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, the left end of which corresponds to the first position, and the right end of which corresponds to the reserved display area. A number image SG is newly displayed on the upper left of the hold icon 9C. The number image SG represents the number of remaining pseudo runs. Here, "4" is represented. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 57(D), the hold icon 9C moves from the left end to the right end on the specific image BG. That is, it moves from the first position toward the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the suspension icon 9C with respect to the specific image BG represents (notifies) the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The number image SG moves along with the movement of the pending icon 9C. That is, the number image SG moves while maintaining the same distance from the moving pending icon 9C. In the ready-to-reach decorative pattern, the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color of the suspension icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of this "suspension change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous effect, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the form of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the pending icon 9C changes. The order in which the color of the pending icon 9C changes is from a color with a low expectation of a big win to a color with a high expectation. For example, the order is blue→green→red. By temporarily stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the pseudo-runs is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 57(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move rightward on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped at "5" and "7", the game is temporarily stopped at the character image "G!" instead of the middle decorative design 8C. A black star-shaped point is displayed on the specific image BG in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "Get points!". This black star-shaped point increases (accumulates) by one each time the character image "get points!" Then, the performance using this point is executed at the time of the last variation of the pseudo-group. By temporarily stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the pseudo-runs is completed, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 57(G), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move rightward on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of "3↓3", the character image "hold change" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative design 8C. The color and shape of the suspension icon 9C change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of this "suspension change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous effect, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped again instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the color and shape of the hold icon 9C change to a more expected aspect. By temporarily stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the pseudo-runs is completed, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 57(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right, and when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG, it stops there. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. As a result, the suspension icon 9C stops in the suspension display area. That is, the hold icon 9C returns to its initial position. Due to the final variation of the pseudo-fellows, an effect using the accumulated black star-shaped points is executed. Here, a black star-shaped point moves while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a jackpot mode of "333".

[Holding icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining pending icon movement change effect C. FIG. The suspended icon movement change effect is an effect in which the image representing the suspended icon changes while moving. The aspect here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the suspended icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), three suspended icons 9A and the suspended icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (holding icon shape), they are collectively called simply "suspended icons 9A and 9C". The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), at a certain timing during the fluctuation, a character image of "Hold Change Pseudo Consecutive Start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C and the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (not displayed). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a hold icon image 9D representing the hold icons 9A and 9C is newly displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The pending icon image 9D may be the pending icons 9A and 9C, or may be an image imitating the pending icons 9A and 9C. A new specific image BG is displayed below the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, the left end of which corresponds to the first position, and the right end of which corresponds to the reserved display area. A number image SG is newly displayed on the upper left of the pending icon image 9D. The number image SG is displayed so that a portion thereof overlaps with the pending icon image 9D. The number image SG represents the number of remaining pseudo runs. Here, "4" is represented. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 58(D), the hold icon image 9D moves from the left end to the right end on the specific image BG. That is, it moves from the first position toward the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the pending icon image 9D with respect to the specific image BG represents (notifies) the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The number image SG moves along with the movement of the pending icon image 9D. That is, the number image SG moves while being superimposed on the upper left of the suspended icon image 9D that is being moved. In the ready-to-reach decorative pattern, the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color of the pending icon image 9D changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "holding change". That is, when the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous effect, the mode of the holding icon image 9D changes. Here, the color of the pending icon image 9D changes. The order in which the color of the pending icon image 9D changes is the order from the color with the lowest expectation for the big win to the color with the highest expectation. For example, the order is blue→green→red. By temporarily stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the pseudo-runs is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 58(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The pending icon image 9D continues to move rightward on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped at "5" and "7", the game is temporarily stopped at the character image "Get points!" instead of the middle decorative design 8C. A black star-shaped point is displayed on the specific image BG in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "Get points!". This black star-shaped point increases (accumulates) by one each time the character image "get points!" Then, the performance using this point is executed at the time of the last variation of the pseudo-group. By temporarily stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the pseudo-runs is completed, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 58(G), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The pending icon image 9D continues to move rightward on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of "3↓3", the character image "hold change" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative design 8C. The color and shape of the pending icon image 9D change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "holding change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous effect, if the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped again instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the color and shape of the hold icon image 9D will change to a more expected mode. By temporarily stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the pseudo-runs is completed, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 58(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon image 9D continues to move to the right, and when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG, it stops there. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. Then, the suspension icon 9C having the same form as the suspension icon image 9D is displayed in the suspension display area. That is, an effect is produced as if the hold icon 9C has returned to its original position. If the suspended icon image 9D is the suspended icon 9C itself, it has returned to the initial position. Due to the final variation of the pseudo-fellows, an effect using the accumulated black star-shaped points is executed. Here, a black star-shaped point moves while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a jackpot mode of "333".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, a first effect in which the pending icon 9C (an image representing the pending icon) changes color while moving, and after the first effect , a second effect in which the pending icon 9C of the changed color is displayed in the pending display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, a first effect in which the pending icon image 9D (image representing the pending icon) changes color while moving, and after the first effect, A second effect in which the suspended icon image 9D with a changed color is displayed in the suspended display area (variable icon display area, suspended digest image display area) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56(A), 57(A), and 58(A), before the first effect, the pending icon 9C (image representing the pending icon) is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area), and the first effect is executed after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the first effect, the pending icon 9C (image representing the pending icon) is moved from the first position to the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the suspended icon image 9D (image representing the suspended icon) is displayed in the suspended display area (variable icon display) from the first position. area, reserved digest image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the first effect, a pseudo-continuous effect of decorative symbols is executed, and when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, instead of the decorative symbol 8C, "hold change" is performed. is displayed, the color of the pending icon 9C (image representing the pending icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, a pseudo-continuous effect of the decorative symbols is executed, and when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, instead of the decorative symbol 8C, a "suspended change" is performed. is displayed, the color of the pending icon 9D (image representing the pending icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the number image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo-runs moves together with the pending icon 9C (image representing the pending icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the number image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo-runs moves together with the pending icon 9D (image representing the pending icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon) moves on the specific image BG, and the hold icon 9C with respect to the specific image BG is displayed. The remaining period during which the pseudo continuous effect is executed is notified by the display position of the icon 9C (image representing the pending icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon) moves over the specific image BG and The remaining period during which the pseudo continuous effect is executed is notified by the display position of the pending icon 9D (image representing the pending icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the suspended icon movement change effects A and B, the suspended icon 9C changes its color while moving as an image representing the suspended icon. However, in the pending icon movement change effects A and B, the pending icon whose color changes while moving may be an image (icon image) imitating the pending icon 9C instead of the pending icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the suspended icon movement change effects A and B, the suspended icon 9C changes its color while moving as an image representing the suspended icon. However, in the pending icon movement change effects A and B, the pending icons whose color changes while moving may be the pending icons 9A and 9B instead of the pending icon 9C. In this case, the suspended icons 9A and 9B may be configured to face the suspended image display area instead of heading from the first position to the suspended display area (variable icon display area, suspended digested image display area). .

[Modification 3]
In the pending icon movement change effects A and B, the pending icon 9C whose color changes while moving and the pending icon 9C displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) are the same. It doesn't have to be. That is, when the holding icon 9C moves from the holding display area or arrives at the holding display area, the holding icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a once, or may be displayed in the holding display area as being moved. The size, shape, and color may change, and the position may slightly shift before and after arrival.

[Modification 4]
Suspended icon movement change effects A to C are assumed to be executed in the normal state. However, the pending icon movement change effects A to C may be executed during the time saving state. In this case, the suspension icon C of the suspension icon movement change effects A to C may be moved to the right and then to the left.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an image representing a pending icon;
a first effect in which the image representing the hold icon changes color while moving;
A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which an image representing the suspended icon in a changed color is displayed in a suspended icon display area after the first effect.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
Before the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which an image representing the suspended icon is displayed in the suspended icon display area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is executed after the third effect.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
In the first effect, the image representing the suspended icon moves from a first position different from the suspended icon display area toward the suspended icon display area.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first effect, a pseudo continuous effect of decorative symbols is executed, and when a predetermined image is displayed in place of the decorative symbols when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the color of the image representing the pending icon changes. Characteristic game machine.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, an image representing the number of remaining pseudo-runs moves together with the image representing the hold icon.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4 or aspect A3-5,
In the first effect, the image representing the pending icon moves on a specific image, and the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is reported according to the display position of the image representing the pending icon with respect to the specific image. A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific icon stock effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. 59 to 61, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. is therefore omitted.

This specific icon stock effect is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable effect (variable display) by decorative symbols is continuously performed multiple times. It is what is done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command). The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

The background image used in the specific icon stock effect (referred to as the "specific background image") is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image. It has become. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an undersea image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, the specific icon stock effect A will be explained first, then the specific icon stock effect B, and then the specific icon stock effect C will be explained in order.

[Specific icon stock effect A]
Specific icon stock effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect A. FIG. The specific icon stock effect A is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbols is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is what is done.

First, as shown in FIG. 59A, a city image THG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") are displayed in a variable effect (variable display). be started. When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 59A, when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2". , and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59B, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image, which is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A moved to the variable display position 9Cd and became the white spherical variable icon 9C, a number image (here, number 4) 9Cz was placed in front of the variable icon 9C. A message MG1 "Stock icons!" is displayed in one line in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a.

The size of the variation icon 9C and the size of the numeric image 9Cz may be the same size, or one may be larger. Also, when the numeric image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the size of the numeric image 9Cz should be larger than the size of the variable icon 9C for visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this time, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. In other words, the player is informed that the variation performance (variation display) by the decorative symbols will be continuously performed for the remaining four times in the variation performance (variation display) at this point.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the start of the first (first) decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by pseudo-continuation, and the first (first) pseudo-continuation variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is displayed. ) is started, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern by the pseudo-continuation is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. becomes. As a result, the player is informed that the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative symbols will be continuously performed for the remaining three times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the variation effect (variation display) by the second decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the changing icon HI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the changing icon HI is activated in order to digest the changing icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C does not change to another icon due to this collision, and the change icon 9C fails to change.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), the change of the variable icon 9C fails, and the variable effect (variable display) by the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-continuation ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number. 2. As a result, the player is informed that the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative symbols is continuously performed for the remaining two times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the variable effect (variable display) by the third decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", the change icon HI appears again as a specific icon from the variation area of the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated in order to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C does not change to another icon due to this collision, and the change icon 9C fails again.

As shown in FIG. 59(I), the change of the variable icon 9C fails, and the variable effect (variable display) by the third decorative symbol by the pseudo-continuity ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number. 1. Thereby, the player is informed that only one remaining variation performance (variation display) by decorative symbols is performed in the variation performance (the variation display).

When the variation effect (variation display) by the fourth (last) decorative symbol by the pseudo-run is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" as shown in FIG. 59(J). , The middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the variation effect (variation display) by the fourth (last) decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is performed. 59(K), the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 as the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 as the normal background image is switched again). The image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image)), the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(L), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "7". It is stopped and displayed, and as a result, the white spherical variable icon 9C that could not be changed from the white spherical icon to another icon in the specific icon stock effect A disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific icon stock effect B]
Next, the specific icon stock effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect B. FIG. The specific icon stock effect B is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbols is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is what is done.

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a city image THG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") are displayed in a variable effect (variable display). be started. When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 60(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2". , and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 60B, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image, which is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A moved to the variable display position 9Cd and became the white spherical variable icon 9C, a number image (here, number 4) 9Cz was placed in front of the variable icon 9C. A message MG1 "Stock icons!" is displayed in one line in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variation icon 9C and the size of the numeric image 9Cz may be the same size, or one may be larger. Also, when the numeric image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the size of the numeric image 9Cz should be larger than the size of the variable icon 9C for visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this time, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. In other words, the player is informed that the variation performance (variation display) by the decorative symbols will be continuously performed for the remaining four times in the variation performance (variation display) at this point.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the start of the first (first) decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by pseudo-continuation, and the first (first) pseudo-continuation variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is displayed. ) is started, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern by the pseudo-continuation is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. becomes. As a result, the player is informed that the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative symbols will be continuously performed for the remaining three times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the variation effect (variation display) by the second decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the changing icon HI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the changing icon HI is activated in order to digest the changing icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical change icon to a yellow (gold) star icon. be successful.

The change of the variable icon 9C is successful, and the variable performance (variable display) by the second decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. As a result, the player is informed that the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative symbols is continuously performed for the remaining two times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the variable effect (variable display) by the third decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is started, as shown in FIG. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C. ), the battle effect icon AI draws a curve toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so that the battle effect icon AI passes between the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed and the variable icon 9C. to move. The battle effect icon AI suggests a battle effect that will be developed (started, developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect B. In this battle effect, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) It is a fighting production, and it is a production with high expectations for a big hit.

When the battle effect icon AI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 60(I), a character image AIa of "stock" having a predetermined color (for example, red) appears above the battle effect icon AI. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward sloping (sloping to the right) display mode, and the stock of the battle effect icon AI is successful.

The stock of the battle effect icon AI becomes successful, the variable effect (variable display) by the second decorative pattern by the pseudo-continuity ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. Thereby, the player is informed that only one remaining variation performance (variation display) by decorative symbols is performed in the variation performance (the variation display).

When the variation effect (variation display) with the fourth (last) decorative symbol by the pseudo-run is started, the character image AIa disappears from the display screen as shown in FIG. The number "5" is temporarily stopped, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped by the number "6", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "7", and the fourth (last) decoration by the pseudo-continuation. After the pattern-based variable effect (variable display) is completed, as shown in FIG. 60(K), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again from the moon surface image THG2 to the normal background image of the city image THG1. (At this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (for example, an underground image)), and the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(L), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are started again, and by activating the stock battle effect icon AI, FIG. , (N), the battle presentation is developed (started, developed), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C (in this embodiment, the pending icon 9A does not exist at this point, but the pending icon 9A exists). ) also disappears from the display screen 7a, and when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern. A stop display is made, a big win is achieved, and then a big win game (big win performance) is started. On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8C are displayed. The decorative pattern 8R is not stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and is lost. When the battle effect ends and a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. In the embodiment, although the pending icon 9A does not exist at this time, the pending icon 9A is also displayed again on the display screen 7a when the pending icon 9A exists.

[Specific icon stock effect C]
Next, the specific icon stock effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect C. FIG. The specific icon stock effect C is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable effect (variable display) by decorative symbols is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is what is done.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a city image THG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") are displayed in a variable effect (variable display). be started. When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 61(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2". , and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 61B, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image, which is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A moved to the variable display position 9Cd and became the white spherical variable icon 9C, a number image (here, number 4) 9Cz was placed in front of the variable icon 9C. A message MG1 "Stock icons!" is displayed in one line in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variation icon 9C and the size of the numeric image 9Cz may be the same size, or one may be larger. Also, when the numeric image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, the size of the numeric image 9Cz should be larger than the size of the variable icon 9C for visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this time, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. In other words, the player is informed that the variation performance (variation display) by the decorative symbols will be continuously performed for the remaining four times in the variation performance (variation display) at this point.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the start of the first (first) decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by pseudo-continuation, and the first (first) pseudo-continuation variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is displayed. ) is started, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern by the pseudo-continuation is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. becomes. As a result, the player is informed that the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative symbols will be continuously performed for the remaining three times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the variable effect (variable display) by the second decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the changing icon HI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the changing icon HI is activated in order to digest the changing icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical change icon to a yellow (gold) star icon. be successful.

The change of the variable icon 9C is successful, and the variable performance (variable display) by the second decorative symbol by pseudo-continuation is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. As a result, the player is informed that the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative symbols is continuously performed for the remaining two times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the variable performance (variable display) by the third decorative symbol by the pseudo-continuation is started, as shown in FIG. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the button effect icon BI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C. ), the button effect icon BI draws a curve toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so that the button effect icon BI passes between the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed and the variation icon 9C. to move. Note that the button effect icon BI suggests a button effect that will be developed (started, developed) after the specific icon stock effect C ends. It is an effect that can intervene in the effect that progresses by urging and can cause a change in the effect image. Since the effect image can be changed by the operation (pressing operation) of , the player can fully enjoy the sense of accomplishment for the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 by the change of the effect image. It has become.

When the button effect icon BI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 61(I), a character image BIa of "stock" having a predetermined color (for example, red) appears above the button effect icon BI. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward sloping (sloping to the right) display mode, and the stock of the button effect icon BI is successful.

The stock of the button effect icon BI becomes successful, and the variable effect (variable display) by the second decorative pattern by pseudo-continuation is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. Thereby, the player is informed that only one remaining variation performance (variation display) by decorative symbols is performed in the variation performance (the variation display).

When the variation effect (variation display) by the fourth (last) decorative symbol by pseudo-run is started, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen as shown in FIG. A temporary stop display is made with the number "5", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", a battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the battle effect icon AI is digested. In order to stock the battle effect icon AI, the battle effect icon AI is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and the variable icon 9C, It moves so as to draw a curve upward from the button effect icon BI already displayed in stock. The battle effect icon AI suggests a battle effect that will be developed (started, developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect C. In this battle effect, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) It is a fighting production, and it is a production with high expectations for a big hit.

When the battle effect icon AI moves above the button effect icon BI, as shown in FIG. 61(K), a character image AIa of "Stock" having a predetermined color (for example, red) moves above the battle effect icon AI to the left. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward sloping (sloping to the right) display mode, and the stock of the battle effect icon AI is successful.

After that, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "7". is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fourth (last) variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern by the pseudo-continuity is completed, and as shown in FIG. The lunar surface image THG2 is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image), and the change display position 9Cd is displayed. and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change again. By activating the BI, as shown in FIG. 61(N), the button effect is developed (started, developed), and a large button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the button image BG is displayed. A message MG2 saying "Press!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. This informs the player of the development (start, development) of the button presentation, and prompts the player to operate the presentation button 63 (pressing operation). At this time, the button effect icon BI disappears from the display screen 7a, and instead of the button effect icon BI, a character "corner" image CI indicating activation completion is displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the button effect is completed, a battle effect (not shown) is developed (started, developed) by activating the second stocked battle effect icon AI. At this time, the battle effect icon AI disappears from the display screen 7a, and instead of the battle effect icon AI, a character "corner" image CI indicating activation completion is displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, the "corner" images CI are displayed in a state of being arranged vertically in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the battle presentation is developed (started, developed), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and a big win is achieved, after which a big win game ( When the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stop-displayed in the same pattern. be out of line.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific icon stock effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 7 (display means), a specific icon capable of executing a predetermined effect and capable of changing (increasing) the expected degree of winning each time a pseudo-run is performed, displaying a change icon HI or the like to obtain a specific icon. Possible first effects (Figs. 59(D) to (I) for specific icon stock effect A, Figs. 60(D) to (J) for specific icon stock effect B, Fig. 61(D) for specific icon stock effect C (K)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to acquire a specific icon that can change (increase) the expected degree of winning each time a pseudo-reunion is performed, so it can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the production. In addition, the player can be awarded a change icon HI or the like as a specific icon that can change (increase) the expected degree of winning. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. A first specific icon (change icon HI) that is digested into a second specific icon (such as a battle effect icon AI) that is stocked without being digested when a specific icon is acquired. there is According to this configuration, the player does not know what kind of specific icon will be displayed, and even if the specific icon stock effect is started, it is possible to predict the specific icon that will appear. Since it is not possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the specific icon stock presentation to lose its freshness, and to increase variations in the specific icon presentation.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. When the icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode. According to this configuration, when the first specific icon (variable icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode to increase the degree of expectation. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the appearance of the first specific icon (change icon HI).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. When there is a plurality of patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) reach is not formed. According to this configuration, by performing a pseudo-run without forming a reach, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed in the progress of the specific icon stock effect, and suppress the player's frustration with the pseudo-run. can contribute to

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60 and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 60 (G) to (J) for the specific icon stock effect B, and FIG. 61 for the specific icon stock effect C (G) to (K)) can be executed. According to this configuration, in the pseudo-run, the period of the effect that the second specific icon is stocked by the first effect, and at the end of the pseudo-run, the period of the effect by activating the second specific icon stocked by the second effect and can be experienced continuously, and furthermore, after the specific icon stock effect, another effect is continuously developed (started, developed), so expectations for a big win for other effects are expected. The feeling can be enhanced in the previous performance of the specific icon stock performance.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. , a pending icon 9A may be displayed. According to this configuration, when the presence of the pending icon 9A does not become an obstacle in expressing, for example, the world view through the progress of the second effect, it can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the pending icon 9A can be displayed. If the presence of the icon 9A becomes an obstacle, it can be removed from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In other words, it is possible to prevent the suspended icon 9A from interfering with the second performance by displaying the suspended icon 9A on the display screen 7a or erasing it from the display screen 7a when the suspended ball exists. Note that the variable icon 9C can also be displayed on the display screen 7a or deleted from the display screen 7a to prevent the pending icon 9A from interfering with the second effect. Also, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad can be displayed on the display screen 7a or deleted from the display screen 7a to prevent the pending icon 9A from interfering with the second effect. .

[Modification]
A modification of the variable specific icon stock effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. . In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position). It was displayed without moving from to another position. However, in the first effect, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, the variable icon 9C moves closer to the variable display position 9Cd each time a pseudo run is performed. You may do so. In this way, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) each time a pseudo-run is performed, so that the variation icon 9C displays the remaining number of pseudo-runs. The sense of distance between the position and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) can be intuitively and easily conveyed to the player. The “other position” may be, for example, the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the change display position 9Cd (the change icon display position). may be near the upper left corner or near the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or may be near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

[Modification 3]
59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position). was displayed without moving from one position to another. However, in the first effect, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, the variable icon 9C moves closer to the variable display position 9Cd each time a pseudo run is performed. Furthermore, even if there is a pending ball, the pending icon 9A may not be displayed in the region where the variable icon 9C moves. In this way, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) each time a pseudo-run is performed, so that the variation icon 9C displays the remaining number of pseudo-runs. The sense of distance between the position and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) can be intuitively and easily conveyed to the player, and further, the presence of the held ball is indicated in the area where the variable icon 9C moves. When the suspended icon 9A is displayed, the suspended icon 9A obstructs the moving variable icon 9C by erasing the suspended icon 9A from the display screen 7a so as not to disturb the visual recognition of the variable icon 9C. can be prevented. The “other position” may be, for example, the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the change display position 9Cd (the change icon display position). may be closer to the upper left corner or closer to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the specific icon stock effect A shown in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B shown in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C shown in FIG. However, the number of pseudo-runs may be 5, 6, 7, or 8 times. By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of obtaining a specific icon (change icon HI, etc.).

[Modification 5]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. However, each time the specific icon stock effect is performed, the number of pseudo-runs may be changed to any number from 4 to 8 times. In this way, every time the specific icon stock effect is performed, the chance of obtaining the specific icon (change icon HI, etc.) can be changed, so that the variations of the specific icon stock effect can be increased.

[Modification 6]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. It was However, an indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (for example, a position above the variation icon 9C) to display the number of pseudo runs. By doing this, the level gauge of the indicator decreases each time a pseudo-run is performed, so that the remaining number of pseudo-runs can be communicated intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner. The indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with a display mode in which the numeric image 9Cz is arranged on the front side of the variable icon 9C, or may be displayed in a state where the numeric image 9Cz is removed from the variable icon 9C ( It may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the variation icon 9C alone.

[Modification 7]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. It was However, the variation icon 9C may move in the squares of "Sugoroku" each time a pseudo-run is performed. In this case, each time a pseudo-run is performed, the variable icon 9C may be advanced one by one for each square to reach the goal, or a die image may be displayed on the display screen 7a, You may make it advance to a goal by the number of squares.

[Modification 8]
In the specific icon stock effect A shown in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B shown in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C shown in FIG. However, character images are provided for odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9", respectively, and character images are provided for even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8". Further, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the character images provided at the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" may be deleted. In this way, it is possible to emphasize to the player in an easy-to-understand manner the state of switching to a special effect called a specific icon stock effect. Note that the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" all have the same bright green color and the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" , and all have the same bright blue color, even if the specific icon stock effect is started, the various colors of the number patterns are inherited and do not change to other colors. As a result, even if the character images provided for the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" are deleted by switching to the special effect of the specific icon stock effect, the number It is possible to make it difficult for the determination of the pattern to be affected.

[Modification 9]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. The reach by the right decorative pattern 8R) was not formed. However, a reach may be formed. In this way, when the pseudo-continuation is performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed with respect to the progress of the specific icon stock effect until the reach is formed, thereby suppressing the player's frustration with the pseudo-continuation. can contribute to In addition, when the reach is formed, the specific icon stock effect is stopped, the variable effect (variable display) is continued, and the second specific icon (battle effect) that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired When there is an icon AI, etc.), the second specific icon (battle effect icon AI, etc.) is activated and digested.

[Modification 10]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start hole 21 was arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, which makes it intuitive and easy to understand. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In this embodiment, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the display mode is such that the number image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C. Digit image 9Cz showed the remaining number of consecutive fluctuations by pseudo-ream. As a result, the player may misunderstand the number (the number of held balls) arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as the remaining number of continuous variations due to the pseudo-run. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number representing the above-mentioned number of held balls as a numerical value. This eliminates the possibility that the number of held balls displayed as a numerical value is misunderstood by the player as the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-run, and furthermore, the number of held balls is displayed as a numerical value. The numbers can be difficult to discern because they are mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 11]
The specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to display a specific icon that can change the expected degree of winning each time a pseudo-run is performed, and execute a first effect that can acquire the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The specific icons may include a first specific icon that is consumed when the specific icon is obtained, and a second specific icon that is stocked without being consumed when the specific icon is obtained.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or aspect A4-2,
In the first effect, when the first specific icon is obtained, the display mode of the (relevant) variable icon can be changed to another display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
In the first effect, reach may not be formed by a plurality of symbol images when the pseudo-run is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the first effect, when the (relevant) variable icon moves from the (relevant) variable icon display position to another position, the (relevant) variable icon is moved closer to the (relevant) variable icon display position each time the pseudo run is performed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-5,
In the first effect, even if there is a pending ball, the pending icon is not displayed in the area where the (relevant) variable icon moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-2 to A4-6,
When the pseudo-continuation is terminated and the first effect is completed, a second effect related to the second specific icon stocked by the first effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-7,
In the second production, a holding icon may be displayed when a holding ball exists.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation stock effect A (first half), operation stock effect A (second half), and operation stock effect B (second half) will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation stock effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation stock effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation stock effect A (first half)]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect A (first half).
First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B) or FIG. 62(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two modes of the temporary stop effect. As shown in FIG. 62(B), a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 62(D), the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(B), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special pattern is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect pattern 8C. I showed how it was done. The special pattern is a button image BG modeled after the effect button 63 . For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→special design.

When the special symbol temporarily stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 62(B), the stock effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62(C). That is, the stock effect is an effect that is executed when the special symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the stock effect, the button image BG as a special symbol is reduced and moved as indicated by an arrow Y from the central portion of the display screen 7a to the lower right portion. Then, a reduced button image BGS is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(D), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". showed the situation. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→middle performance design 8C.

After the stock effect shown in FIG. 62(C) or after the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. becomes. In this embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is executed in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the button image BG as a special symbol stops instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). The following description is continued assuming that the stock effect is executed four times in the repeated pseudo-continuous effect.

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 62(E), the reach forming effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5". At this time, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the stock reduced button images BGS are displayed so as to be piled up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the uppermost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed above the button image BG. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the player has pressed the effect button 63 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect that informs of the development from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also at this time, the reduced button images BGS are displayed so as to be piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that even if the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect of FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a battle effect (start) is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Then, if the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, it will be a big win. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation stock effect A (second half)]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect A (second half).
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the uppermost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the side of the ally character CRA, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduced button images BGS are displayed so as to be piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(A), a message image MSG of "Chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 63A, the message image MSG of "chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the uppermost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA moves toward the enemy character CRB, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduced button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 63(C), a message image MSG of "great chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 63(C), the message image MSG of "great chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the button image BG with the letters "PUSH" is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. In the battle production (final stage), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center. It should be noted that when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(E), a message image MSG of "Super heat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(E), the message image MSG of "Super heat" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed. Incidentally, in the case of losing, for example, an enemy character is displayed and a message image of "defeated" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the middle left and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "5". In addition, in the case of losing, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "6".

[Operation stock effect B (second half)]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect B (second half). The operation stock effect B (first half) is assumed to be the same as the operation stock effect A (first half), and a description thereof will be omitted.
In the operation stock effect B (second half), first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the uppermost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the side of the ally character CRA, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduced button images BGS are displayed so as to be piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64(A), a message image MSG of "chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64A, the message image MSG of "Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the uppermost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA moves toward the enemy character CRB, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduced button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Also, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64(C), a message image MSG of "great chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 64(C), the message image MSG of "great chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the button image BG with the letters "PUSH" is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit determination effect is a effect that definitely notifies that a win has occurred. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG saying "It's a win" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the middle left and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation stock effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the temporary stop effect (FIGS. 62B and 62D), the variable start effect (FIG. 62A) is executed to repeat the pseudo continuous effect. to run. Then, in this repetitive pseudo continuous effect, the button image BG as a special symbol stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise and anticipate the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation promoting effect is executed for the number of reduced button images BGS stocked in the stock effect (FIG. 62(B)), and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes valid (FIG. 62B). 62(F), FIGS. 63(A)(C)(E), FIGS. 64(A)(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the more reduced button images BGS are stocked, the more expectation the player has and the more interesting the game can be.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image BG as a special symbol stops instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (Fig. 62 (B) ), the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). According to this configuration, expectations for the pseudo-continuous performance of the predetermined number of times can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BG as a special symbol stops instead of the middle effect symbol 8C in the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 62(B)), thereby executing the stock effect (FIG. 62 ( C)). In the stock effect, the button image BG as the special symbol is reduced, moved as indicated by the arrow Y from the center portion of the display screen 7a to the lower right portion, and held. According to this configuration, the number of stocks is easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the button image BG displaying the characters "PUSH" is displayed. are displayed (FIGS. 62(F), 63(A)(C)(E), 64(A)(C)(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to effectively promote the operation of the effect button 63 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation promotion effects (Fig. 62 (F), Figs. 63 (A) (C) (E), Figs. 64 (A) (C) (E)) are 62(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for reach formation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
Modifications of the operation stock effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above example, the button image BG as a special symbol temporarily stops instead of the middle effect symbol 8C. good.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the repeated pseudo-continuous effect is composed of seven pseudo-continuous effects, but it may be composed of less than seven times or more than seven times. Furthermore, the number of pseudo-continuous effects may be dynamically changed. For example, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects, the higher the degree of expectation for winning.

[Modification 3]
Although the case where the stock effect is performed four times has been described above as an example, the number of times of the stock effect is not particularly limited. For example, the greater the number of stock presentations, the higher the degree of expectation for winning.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 is taken as an example, but the operation is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 as long as it is an operation unit that can be operated by the player.

[Modification 5]
In the above, the production for the first special figure reservation is taken as an example, but it may be the production for the second special figure reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A game machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
In the repeated pseudo-continuous effect, in which the effect pattern that has started to change temporarily stops and then repeats the pseudo-continuous effect that starts to change again, the operating part image that imitates the operating part is displayed and the operating part image is held in the screen. is executable to
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
After the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, an operation part effect in which the operation of the operation part becomes effective according to the number of the operation part images held in the screen in the stock effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2,
The repeated pseudo-continuous performance is composed of a predetermined number of pseudo-continuous performances,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the stock effect, the operation part image is displayed as a special symbol when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous effect, and then the operation part image is reduced and held.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-4,
In the operation unit presentation, the operation unit image held in the screen is enlarged to promote operation of the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-5,
The operation section effect is executed through a reach formation effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined manner after the repeated pseudo-continuous effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
When the operation unit is operated during a period in which the operation of the operation unit is valid in the operation unit effect, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect that definitely notifies that a win has been won.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon number design effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. This icon number design effect can be executed during a special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it is a predetermined variation pattern, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a performance realized by

[Icon number pattern production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern effect A. FIG. In this icon number pattern effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation production, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are varied. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X having the same aspect (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, one reserved icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. . This number pattern 8X is a pattern in the same manner as one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. A pattern of the same aspect as the pattern is displayed. Also, this number pattern 8X moves or stops at random on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, one suspended icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one suspended icon among the suspended icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. A) corresponds to the pending icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A is arranged inside the tubular shape. Then, the pending icon 9A moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon is displayed and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number pattern 8X moves right and left at random and stops. In the icon movement effect 2, the pending icon 9A moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, while the number pattern 8X moves randomly, the pending icon 9A moves along the guide rail image XA1, reaches the variable icon display area, and stops. In this case, the pending icon 9A will function as the variable icon 9C thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating to form a stop pattern array. In the example of FIG. 65(E), the stop symbol array is "6 7 6", which is a losing symbol array. In addition, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the suspended icon 9A that was moved in the icon move effect becomes the variable icon 9C.

In addition, in this icon number symbol effect A, the greater the number of times the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the expectation of a big win.

[Icon number design effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern effect B. FIG. In this icon number pattern production B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation production, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are varied. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X having the same aspect (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, one reserved icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. . This number pattern 8X is a pattern in the same manner as one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. A pattern of the same aspect as the pattern is displayed. Also, this number pattern 8X and one pending icon 9A are arranged in association with each other. One suspended icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one suspended icon among the suspended icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), FIG. , corresponds to the pending icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A (number pattern 8X) is arranged inside the tubular shape. The pending icon 9A (number pattern 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area displaying the variable icon and stops. Note that this pending icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number pattern 8X and the pending icon 9A are continuously arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, the number pattern 8X is changed from the "6" pattern to the "5" pattern. Also, the hold icon 9A changes from white to blue (indicated by normal hatching in FIG. 66(C)). In the icon movement effect 2, the pending icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the pending icon 9A associated with the number pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1, reaches the variable icon display area, and stops. In this case, the pending icon 9A will function as the variable icon 9C thereafter. The pending icon 9A changes from blue to green (indicated by cross hatching in FIG. 66(D)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating to form a stop pattern array. In the example of FIG. 66(E), the stop symbol array is "6 7 6", which is a losing symbol array. In addition, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the suspended icon 9A (green) that was moved in the icon move effect becomes the variable icon 9C.

In addition, in this icon number symbol effect B, the greater the number of times the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the expectation of a big win. Also, the more the number of times the pending icon 9A moves and stops, the more chances the pending icon 9A changes.

[Icon number design effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern effect C. FIG. In this icon number pattern production B, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation production, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are varied. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X having the same aspect (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, one reserved icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. . This number pattern 8X is a pattern in the same manner as one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. A pattern of the same aspect as the pattern is displayed. Also, this number pattern 8X is arranged in one pending icon 9A. In this case, it can be said that the number pattern 8X is associated with this pending icon 9A. One suspended icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one of the suspended icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), FIG. , corresponds to the pending icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A (number pattern 8X) is arranged inside the tubular shape. The pending icon 9A (number pattern 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area displaying the variable icon and stops. Note that this pending icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number pattern 8X is continuously arranged within the reserved icon 9A. In this case, the number pattern 8X is changed from the "6" pattern to the "5" pattern. Also, the pending icon 9A changes from white to blue (indicated by normal hatching in FIG. 67(C)). In the icon movement effect 2, the pending icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the pending icon 9A including the number pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1, reaches the variable icon display area, and stops. In this case, the pending icon 9A will function as the variable icon 9C thereafter. Note that this pending icon 9A has changed from blue to green (indicated by cross hatching in FIG. 67(D)). Further, the pending icon 9A includes the number pattern 8X even when it reaches the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the fluctuating decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating to form a stop pattern array. In the example of FIG. 67(E), the stop symbol array is "6 7 6", which is a losing symbol array. In addition, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the suspended icon 9A (green) that was moved in the icon move effect becomes the variable icon 9C. Even in this case, the pending icon 9C includes the number pattern 8X even when it reaches the variable icon display area.

In addition, in this icon number symbol effect C, the greater the number of times the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the expectation of a big win. Also, the more the number of times the pending icon 9A moves and stops, the more chances the pending icon 9A changes.
Further, the above-mentioned icon number symbol effects are effects performed with the same variation.

[Modification]
In the icon number pattern presentation of the above embodiment, the number pattern 8X has the same aspect as the decorative pattern, but this is not the only option. It is good also as a different aspect.
In the icon number pattern effects B and C of the above embodiment, when the icon movement effect 1 to the icon movement effect 2 are performed, the pending icon 9A changes, and the number pattern 8X associated with the pending icon 9A also changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that even when the pending icon 9A changes, the number pattern 8X does not change.

[Effect example]
In the icon number design effect of the above embodiment, the pending icon 9A and the number design 8X are moved. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an interesting presentation by the movement of the pending icon 9A and the number pattern 8X, and to improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the icon number pattern performances B and C, the pending icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are associated and move together, so that the movement of the holding icon 9A and the number pattern 8X can be emphasized to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, since the number pattern 8X has the same aspect (shape and color) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, it is possible to display a new effect in which the reserved icon and the decorative pattern are collaborated, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.
Further, in the icon number pattern effects B and C, after the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are moved in association with each other, the form (color, shape) of the reserved icon 9A changes. The more the moves, the more the player's expectation for the pending change is amplified, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Further, in the icon number pattern effects B and C, even if the state (color, shape) of the reserved icon 9A changes after the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are moved in association with each other, the state of the number pattern 8X remains unchanged. Since there is no change, the change of the pending icon 9A can impress the player more, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
Further, in the icon number pattern effects B and C, when the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X move in association with each other, the reserved icon 9A may also change when the number pattern 8X changes. According to this configuration, when the number pattern changes, the pending icon 9A can be expected to change, so that the player can pay attention to both the numeric pattern and the pending icon, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. can.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of varying the decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined icon, which is an icon representing suspension or the change, and a number pattern including a number,
The third display effect is a effect in which the predetermined icon moves,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which the number pattern moves,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect and the fourth display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed, and the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number in the fourth display effect Move in association with the design,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The numerical pattern is in the same manner as the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number pattern in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, the predetermined icon changes after being moved.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number pattern in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, and the predetermined icon changes after the movement, The numerical pattern does not change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number pattern in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, the number pattern may change. When the pattern changes, the predetermined icon also changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Reach hold icon effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. FIG. This ready-to-reach pending icon effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold-at-reach icon effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Reach hold icon effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the on-reach pending icon effect A. FIG. The ready-to-reach pending icon effect is a ready-to-win effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state. This is the effect displayed in the . First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"), the hold icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is displayed. be done. The pending icons 9A and 9B are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is rectangular and displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are still in the reach state, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (not displayed) from the display screen 7a. That is, all the pending icons (the pending icons 9A, 9B and the pending icon 9C) are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the ready-to-win state. That is, of the pending icons, only the pending icon 9C is displayed, and the pending icons 9A and 9B are not displayed. The suspended icon (variable icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same form as before disappearing. The aspect here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the state of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a character image representing the state of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C after the change is displayed. Here, "representing a mode" refers to the shape, color, action, and size of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C, as well as the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. ), nicknames, etc. are also included. The order in which the mode of the pending icon 9C changes is the order from the mode with the low expectation of the big win to the mode with the high expectation. Here, the color of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a "square red" character image representing the shape and color of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(E), in a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-win state, an effect is executed in which the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . During rotation, as shown in FIGS. 68(F), (G), and (H), an effect is performed in which the suspension icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, a new star-shaped pending icon (variable icon) 9C appears from the split, and a new pending icon (variable icon) 9C appears. A character image representing the mode of icon) 9C is displayed. Here, a "star" character image representing the shape of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. The two square fragments after the crack and the character image of "square red" are framed out. The new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digested image display area).

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(I), in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the ready-to-win state, an effect is executed in which the holding icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . During rotation, as shown in FIG. 68(J), an effect is performed in which the suspension icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image are enlarged and displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Reach hold icon effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the on-reach pending icon effect B. FIG. The ready-to-reach pending icon effect is a ready-to-win effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state. This is the effect displayed in the . First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), four pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (holding icon shape), they are collectively called simply "suspended icons 9A and 9C". The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the hold display area are displayed on the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for indicating the position of disappears, and only the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 69(C), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the ready-to-win state, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C disappears from the display screen 7a (is no longer displayed). That is, all the pending icons (the pending icons 9A, 9B and the pending icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG imitating the shape of a bomb is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves leftward while drawing a parabola. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are still in the reach state. That is, of the pending icons, only the pending icon 9C is displayed, and the horizontally long rectangular images for indicating the positions of the pending icons 9A and 9B and the pending display area are not displayed. The suspended icon (variable icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same form as before disappearing. The aspect here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 69(E) to (G), an effect is executed in which the pending icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69E, the specific image TG imitating the shape of a bomb explodes, and as shown in FIG. Cracked (divided). Then, as shown in FIG. 69G, the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C of the new doll appears, and a character image representing the mode of the new relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing a mode" refers to the shape, color, action, and size of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C, as well as the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. ), nicknames, etc. are also included. Here, a character image of "character pending" representing the content of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(H), in a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are still in the ready-to-win state, an effect is executed in which the pending icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . After that, as shown in FIG. 69(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-reach state, and the character image "character pending" is displayed while the pending icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate. disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Reach hold icon effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the on-reach pending icon effect C. FIG. The ready-to-reach pending icon effect is a ready-to-win effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state. This is the effect displayed in the . First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), four pending icons 9A and the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (holding icon shape), they are collectively called simply "suspended icons 9A and 9C". The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the hold display area are displayed from the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for indicating the position of disappears, and only the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70(C), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the ready-to-win state, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C disappears from the display screen 7a (not displayed). That is, all the pending icons (the pending icons 9A, 9B and the pending icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG simulating a person holding a sword is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and runs leftward. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the reach state. That is, of the pending icons, only the pending icon 9C is displayed, and the horizontally long rectangular images for indicating the positions of the pending icons 9A and 9B and the pending display area are not displayed. The suspended icon (variable icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same form as before disappearing. The aspect here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 70(E) to (G), an effect is executed in which the pending icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a specific image TG imitating a person holding a sword passes through the pending icon (variable icon) 9C, and then as shown in FIG. 70(F). , the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is divided into two. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a new face-shaped pending icon (variable icon) 9C appears, and a character image representing the mode of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing a mode" refers to the shape, color, action, and size of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C, as well as the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. ), nicknames, etc. are also included. Here, a character image of "face pending" representing the content of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(H), in a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue the ready-to-win state, an effect is executed in which the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . After that, as shown in FIG. 70(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach the ready state, and the character image "face pending" is displayed while the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C continues to rotate. disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(J), an effect is executed in which a background image corresponding to the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Specifically, a background image of the same face as the face represented by the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the hold icon production during reach is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68B, 68C, 69C, 69D, 70C, and 70D, the display screen 7a is displayed during the ready-to-win effect. From the state in which no suspended icon is displayed in the state, a first effect can be executed in which only the suspended icon (variable icon) 9C corresponding to the variation is newly displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(E) to (H), FIGS. 69(E) to (G), and FIGS. 70(E) to (G), after the first effect, A second effect in which the pending icon (variable icon) 9C changes can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(E) to (H), FIGS. 69(E) to (G), and FIGS. The suspended icon (variable icon) 9C changes to the second mode after the suspended icon 9C of the first mode is divided into a plurality of pieces. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69(C) to (G) and FIGS. 70(E) to (G), in the second effect, the specific image TG moves, and the holding icon 9C , the hold icon 9C of the first mode is divided into a plurality of pieces. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(H), 69(G), and 70(G), in the second effect, the hold icon 9C in the second mode is displayed. At the same time, a character image representing the second mode is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(I), 69(H), and 70(H), the hold icon 9C in the second mode is rotated, and the character image is also rotated. rotate together. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the pending|holding icon production|presentation at the time of reach is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pending icon performances A to C at the time of reach, the first performance in which only the pending icon 9C is newly displayed is executed from a state in which none of the pending icons 9A, 9B and 9C are displayed. However, in reach-time pending icon effects A to C, a first effect is executed in which only the pending icon 9A or the pending icon 9B is newly displayed from a state in which none of the pending icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are displayed. may

[Modification 2]
68 (F) and (G) of the ready-to-reach pending icon effect A, in which the pending icon (variable icon) 9C changes, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is divided into two (divided). , a new star-shaped pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C appears from the split. However, it may be considered that the rectangular portion of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, and an effect is being executed in which a new star-shaped figure appears from the split.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
A game characterized by being able to execute a first effect in which only the hold icon corresponding to the change is newly displayed from a state in which none of the hold icons are displayed on the display means during a ready-to-win show. machine.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a second effect in which the said pending icon changes after the first effect.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second effect, the suspension icon changes to the second mode after the suspension icon in the first mode is divided into a plurality of parts.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image;
In the second effect, after the specific image moves and passes through the holding icon, the holding icon of the first mode is divided into a plurality of pieces.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-3 or aspect A7-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second effect, the pending icon of the second mode is displayed, and a character image representing the second mode is displayed.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-5,
The game machine according to the second aspect, wherein the holding icon is rotated, and the character image is also rotated.

The special holding effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. This special holding effect can be executed during the variable effect of special symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. The special holding effect is a effect performed with the same variation of special symbols.

[Special hold effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special holding effect A. FIG. In this special holding effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Also, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super reach effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of FIG. 71(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the special holding effect B. FIG. In this special holding effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Also, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super reach effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. In addition, in this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (retreat position) to the deployment position (deployment position) on the display screen 7a, thereby hiding a part of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of FIG. 72(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are stop-displayed in the jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special Hold Effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the special holding effect C. FIG. In this special holding effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used for the decorative pattern fluctuation production (variation display). is executed. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. At this time, the number of pending icons 9A is four, that is, the number of pending is four.
Further, in the special suspension effect C, the variation icon XB1 and the suspension icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. This variation icon XB1 is an icon that represents the effect situation in the variation and corresponds to the pending icon 9C. A pending icon XB2 is an icon representing a pending state and an icon corresponding to the pending icon 9A. Like the pending icon 9A, the pending icon XB2 indicates the pending number by the number of icons, and has the same number of icons as the pending icon 9A. That is, when the pending number is 3, the number of pending icons 9A is 3, and similarly, the number of pending icons XB2 is also 3. This pending icon XB2 does not undergo a pending change. It should be noted that the pending icon XB2 may undergo a pending change corresponding to the pending icon 9A, or may undergo a pending change different from the pending icon 9A. For example, the pending icon XB2 may undergo the pending change after a while from the pending change of the pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, an ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.
In this ready-to-win effect, the variable icon XB1 and the pending icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super reach effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. In addition, in this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (retreat position) to the deployment position (deployment position) on the display screen 7a, thereby hiding a part of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. is.
In this ready-to-win effect, the variable icon XB1 and the pending icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of FIG. 73(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.
In this ready-to-win effect, the variable icon XB1 and the pending icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

[Modification]
In the above special suspension effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the suspension icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, but are not limited to this, and are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L and the main display screen 7a. good too.
Also, the pending icon XB2 may be displayed in a manner that allows the number of pending states to be known. For example, when there are three pending icons XB2, the number "3" may be displayed.
In the above special hold effect, the variable icon 9C is displayed without displaying the hold icon 9A during the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable icon 9C is in a state different from the normal (circular and white in the embodiment) (for example, square and red), the pending icon 9A may not be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the special suspension effect of the above embodiment, in the same variation, there are an icon display effect in which the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed, and a ready-to-win effect in which the variable icon 9C is displayed without displaying the pending icon 9A. It is carried out. Then, after the icon display effect, the ready-to-win effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player recognizes the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C during the icon display effect, and the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the suspended icon 9A during the ready-to-win effect, so that the ready-to-win effect itself is enhanced. The player can be made to recognize the importance, and the expectation of the ready-to-win performance can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, in the same change, an icon display effect that displays the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, a ready-to-win effect that displays the change icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A, A super ready-to-win effect is performed in which the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. In this case, the ready-to-win effect is performed after the icon display effect, and then the super ready-to-win effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player recognizes the suspended icon 9A and the variable icon 9C during the icon display effect, and the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the suspended icon 9A during the ready-to-win effect, and further, the super ready-to-win effect. Since the super ready-to-win effect can be emphasized at times, the player can be made aware of the importance of the super ready-to-win effect itself, and the expectation of the super ready-to-win effect can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
Further, in the special holding effect, in the super ready-to-win effect in which the holding icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, an effect is performed in which the third movable accessory 13 moves in front of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, since the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the effect of the third movable accessory 13 can be emphasized to the player, and as a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect includes an effect of displaying a variation icon representing the variation and a suspension icon representing suspension;
The second display effect includes an effect of displaying the variable icon without displaying the pending icon;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the third display effect is a effect in which the variable icon and the pending icon are not displayed;
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is being performed, a movable accessory effect is performed in which the movable accessory moves in front of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Icon success/failure effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. This icon success/failure effect can be executed during the variable effect of special symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon success/failure effect A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect A. FIG. In this icon success/failure effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are in the form of a circular white color. In addition, variation of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), an effect of enlarging the icon is performed. In this icon gigantic effect, the variable icon 9C (also called a friendly character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed and is further enlarged. It is a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure effect, the enemy character XC1 appears and a battle effect is developed with the ally character 9C to compete for victory, in other words, it is an effect to determine whether the battle will succeed or not. In addition, success/failure effects broadly include effects that determine success or failure, such as effects that determine whether a given game is won or lost, in addition to battle effects. In addition, at the time of this success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but the pending icon 9A is continuously displayed in the pending icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a success effect is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, but the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters and speed lines indicating victory are displayed, and a scene celebrating victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to the premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C is an increased chance and represents that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased. This premium icon 9C may represent that the big win is confirmed. In addition, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white form before changing in the icon change effect, and a different form from the friendly character after changing in the icon change effect, and is a combination of a circular image and a triangular image. consists of images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining icon success/failure effect B. FIG. In this icon success/failure effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are in the form of a circular white color. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), an effect of enlarging the icon is performed. In this icon gigantic effect, the variable icon 9C (also called a friendly character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed and is further enlarged. It is a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure effect, the enemy character XC1 appears and a battle effect is developed with the ally character 9C to compete for victory, in other words, it is an effect to determine whether the battle will succeed or not. In addition, success/failure effects broadly include effects that determine success or failure, such as effects that determine whether a given game is won or lost, in addition to battle effects. In addition, at the time of this success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the pending icon 9A is not displayed in the pending icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a success effect is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, but the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters and speed lines indicating victory are displayed, and a scene celebrating victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to the premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C is an increased chance and represents that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased. This premium icon 9C may represent that the big win is confirmed. In addition, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white form before being changed by the icon change effect, and a different form from the friend character after being changed by the icon change effect. It is composed of an image combined with a sword image that is a part. The premium icon 9C is not limited to this, and may include the entire enemy character XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect C. FIG. In this icon success/failure effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are in the form of a circular white color. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), an effect of enlarging the icon is performed. In this icon gigantic effect, the variable icon 9C (also called a friendly character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed and is further enlarged. It is a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure effect, the enemy character XC1 appears and a battle effect is developed with the ally character 9C to compete for victory, in other words, it is an effect to determine whether the battle will succeed or not. In addition, success/failure effects broadly include effects that determine success or failure, such as effects that determine whether a given game is won or lost, in addition to battle effects. In addition, at the time of this success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the pending icon 9A is not displayed in the pending icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), a success effect is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, but the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters and speed lines indicating victory are displayed, and a scene celebrating victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to the premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C is an increased chance and represents that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased. This premium icon 9C may represent that the big win is confirmed. In addition, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white form before being changed by the icon change effect, and a different form from the friend character after being changed by the icon change effect. It is composed of an image in which a part of the sword image and a part of the star emblem image of the ally character 9C are combined. The premium icon 9C is not limited to this, and may include all of the teammate characters 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Modification]
In the icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C undergoes the first change in the icon change effect, and if it succeeds (wins) in the success/failure effect, the success effect is performed, and in the icon promotion effect 1, the second change is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and one of the pending icons 9A is changed for the first time in the icon change effect, and when the success effect is successful (when the player wins), the success effect is performed. In the icon promotion effect 1, the second change may be performed. In this case, in the icon promotion effect 2, the changed icon may return to the position where it was originally displayed, or may be moved to a different icon position and replaced with the icon displayed at that place. can be
In the above icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C moves to the variable icon display area in the icon promotion effect 2, but is not limited to this, and one suspended icon 9A out of the other suspended icons 9A It may be moved and changed with the pending icon 9A.
In the above icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C is changed for the first time in the icon change effect, but this is not the only option. , icon enlargement effect, success/failure effect, success effect, icon promotion effect 1, and icon promotion effect 2 may be performed after becoming the variable icon 9C.

[Effect example]
In the icon success/failure effect of the above embodiment, the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed, then one of these icons changes, and then the success/failure effect is performed. Then, when the success/failure effect is successful (when the player wins the battle), the above one icon further changes. According to this configuration, the success/failure effect is performed by changing one icon, and when the success/failure effect is successful, the icon is further changed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed and then one of these icons changes, the changed icon changes to an icon representing a friend character, and the friend character and the enemy character are displayed. The success or failure effect is performed using According to this configuration, the success/failure effect is performed by using the icon representing the character whose one icon has changed and the enemy character, so that the success/failure effect can be linked to the change of the one icon. , the player can feel that he/she will support the teammate character, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect in which a predetermined icon out of an icon group consisting of the change icon representing the change or the hold icon representing the hold is displayed in a first form,
the second display effect is a effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form is changed and displayed in a second form;
The third display effect is a effect in which a success/failure effect that determines success or failure is performed using the predetermined icon displayed in the second form,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is a effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the second mode changes and is displayed in a third mode when the success/failure effect is successful;
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
the predetermined icon of the second form is a first character;
A gaming machine characterized by [Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of displaying a second character different from the first character,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the fifth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the success/failure effect is performed using the first character and the second character,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon selection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. This icon selection effect can be executed, for example, during the special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect A. FIG. In this icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in shape. Of the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon is called the variable icon 9A. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the third pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth pending icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 77(A), a first pending icon 9A to a third pending icon 9A are displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD1 including the character A and the star image. A character A included in the selected image XD1 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and this character A has a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively low. In the selection image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD2 including the character B and the star image. A character B included in the selected image XD2 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and the degree of expectation for a big win for this character B is medium. Also, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD3 including the character C and the star image. A character C included in the selected image XD3 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and this character C has a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. Also, the star image included in the selected image XD3 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. In the selection image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third pending icon 9A is displayed so as to change from the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3 at high speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third pending icon 9A is determined to be one of the icon selection effects 1 to 3, and is stopped. In this case, hereinafter, it is assumed that the third pending icon 9A is determined as the selected image XD2 as shown in FIG. 77(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), an icon movement effect is performed. In this icon movement effect, the third pending icon 9A determined as the selected image XD2 in the above-described icon determination effect shifts to the second pending icon 9A, further shifts to the first pending icon 9A, and Finally, it shifts to the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 that has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and expands to the selected image. It is displayed as XD22. In this selection image XD22, star images representing two giant stars are displayed together with the gigantic character B and the characters "expectation degree". In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. In the battle effect, a smiling image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is performed between the smiling image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If this battle is won, a big win is achieved, and a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. .

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect B. FIG. In this icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in shape. Of the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon is called the variable icon 9A. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the third pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth pending icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 78(A), a first pending icon 9A to a third pending icon 9A are displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD1 including the character A and the star image. A character A included in the selected image XD1 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and this character A has a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively low. In the selection image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD2 including the character B and the star image. A character B included in the selected image XD2 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and the degree of expectation for a big win for this character B is medium. Also, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD3 including the character C and the star image. A character C included in the selected image XD3 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and this character C has a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. Also, the star image included in the selected image XD3 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. In the selection image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third pending icon 9A is displayed so as to change from the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3 at high speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 78(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third pending icon 9A is determined to be one of the icon selection effects 1 to 3, and is stopped. In this case, hereinafter, it is assumed that the third pending icon 9A is determined as the selected image XD1 as shown in FIG. 78(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, the third reserved icon 9A determined as the selected image XD1 in the above-described icon determination effect is changed (promoted) to the selected image XD2 when shifting to the second reserved icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the second suspended icon 9A changed to the selected image XD2 in the above-described icon movement effect 1 shifts to the first suspended icon 9A in that state, and finally the variable icon display area is displayed. shift.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 that has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and expands to the selected image. It is displayed as XD22. In this selection image XD22, star images representing two giant stars are displayed together with the gigantic character B and the characters "expectation degree". In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. In the battle effect, a smiling image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is performed between the smiling image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If this battle is won, a big win is achieved, and a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. .

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect C. FIG. In this icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in shape. Of the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon is called the variable icon 9A. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the third pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth pending icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 79(A), a first pending icon 9A to a third pending icon 9A are displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the variable icon 9C changes to the selected image XD1 including the character A and the star image. A character A included in the selected image XD1 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and this character A has a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively low. In the selection image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the variable icon 9C changes to the selected image XD2 including the character B and the star image. A character B included in the selected image XD2 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and the degree of expectation for a big win for this character B is medium. Also, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD3 including the character C and the star image. A character C included in the selected image XD3 represents a degree of expectation for a big win, and this character C has a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. Also, the star image included in the selected image XD3 represents the degree of expectation for the big win by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. In the selection image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the variable icon 9C is displayed so as to change rapidly from the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3. Then, next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the variable icon 9C is determined to be one of the icon selection effects 1 to 3, and is stopped. In this case, hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 79(E), it is assumed that the variation icon 9C is determined as the selected image XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as the selected image XD22. In this selection image XD22, star images representing two giant stars are displayed together with the gigantic character B and the characters "expectation degree". In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the degree of expectation for the big win is medium. In the battle effect, a smiling image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is performed between the smiling image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If this battle is won, a big win is achieved, and a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. .

[Modification]
In the icon selection effect A, during the battle effect, the star image (expectation level display) is at a position different from that of the variable icon 9C (during the icon movement effect). It may be at the same position as at 9C (at the time of icon movement effect). Also, during the battle effect, the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but may be displayed. In this case, the same icon as the selected image XD2 during the icon movement effect is displayed.
In the above icon selection effects, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are respectively different characters A to C or star images with different numbers of stars, but are not limited to these, and may be the same characters or stars. There may be star images with the same number.
In the icon selection effect, after the icon movement effect, the character B of the selected image XD22 is used to perform the battle effect. good too.
In the icon selection effect, the selected images XD1 to XD3 are displayed in association with the character and the star image representing the degree of expectation by the number of stars. The display of the number of rounds at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability variation expectation, etc. may be displayed in association with each other.

[Effect example]
In the icon selection effect, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed to display the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and a predetermined icon, which is one of these icon groups, has a relatively low degree of expectation. Icon selection effect 1 displayed by changing to one star and character A representing and an icon selection effect 3 in which a predetermined pending icon 9A is changed into three stars and a character C representing that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Then, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeated, and one icon is determined from the predetermined icons displayed in the icon selection effects 1 to 3 in the icon determination effect. According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to what degree of expectation the icon will be determined as or which character icon will be determined, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the icon selection effect A, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are performed, and one reserved icon 9A is determined in the icon determination effect, and then in the icon movement effect, the determined reserved icon 9A is moved (hold shift). According to this configuration, the player can foresee that the pending icon 9A will become the variable icon 9C, and the player can continue to be interested in the subsequent transition. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying an icon group consisting of a plurality of icons,
the second display effect is a effect in which a predetermined icon in the group of icons changes in a plurality of modes;
the third display effect is a effect in which the predetermined icon that changes in the plurality of modes is determined to be one of the plurality of modes;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the second display effect, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, each of the plurality of modes includes an expectation degree indication that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the second display effect, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, each of the plurality of modes includes the degree of expectation display and a character display representing a character,
The expectation display and the character display are associated with each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
The predetermined icon is a pending icon representing pending,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon determined in one of the plurality of modes moves in the determined mode;
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon special change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. This icon special change effect can be executed during the special symbol change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Expectation of jackpot by icon]
FIG. 80 is an icon-by-icon jackpot expectation table XE1. Specifically, the icon-by-icon jackpot expectation level table XE1 shown in FIG. 80 represents a plurality of patterns in which the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes, and the corresponding jackpot expectation levels. For example, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be circular or rectangular. , green, red, and gold. In addition, when the holding icon 9A or the change icon 9C is circular and changes to blue, the jackpot expectation is 10%, and when it changes to circular and green, the jackpot expectation is 30%. Yes, when the circle changes to red, the expected jackpot is 50%, when the square changes to green, the jackpot expectation is 40%, and when the square changes to red, The degree of expectation for a big win is 60%, and when the rectangle changes to gold, the degree of expectation for a big win is 80%. Based on the variation pattern command sent from the image control microcomputer 101, the sub-control board 90 distinguishes in advance whether it is a big win or a loss, and displays the pending icon 9A or , the variation icon 9C changes. In addition, the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is normally circular and white, but can be changed to any aspect of the icon-by-icon jackpot expectation table XE1. The expectation level table XE1 can be changed to other aspects. In this case, at the time of change, the degree of expectation for the big win is changed so as not to fall below the previous degree of expectation for the big win. For example, when the icon changes from circular white to circular green (jackpot expectation 30%), then the icon changes to circular red (jackpot expectation 50%), which has a higher jackpot expectation than circular green. , square green (jackpot expectation 40%), square red (jackpot expectation 60%), square gold (jackpot expectation 80%).

The following can be said about the icon-by-icon jackpot expectation table XE1. That is, among the multiple patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning, is the pattern with the lowest probability of winning, among the multiple patterns of square icons. It has a higher expectation for a big hit than the square icon.
In addition, among the plurality of patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning the jackpot, is the pattern with the second highest probability of winning the jackpot among the plurality of patterns of square icons. Compared to the red square icon, it has a lower expectation for a big hit.
Furthermore, among the multiple patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning, is the gold icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning, among the multiple patterns of square icons. Compared to the square icon, it has a lower expectation for a big hit.
Also, the square icon is configured to be larger than the circular icon.

[Icon special change effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the icon special change effect A. FIG. In this icon special change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. These pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in the normal state. Of the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon is called the variable icon 9A. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the third pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth pending icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 81(A), a first pending icon 9A to a third pending icon 9A are displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third pending icon 9A changes to blue while continuing its circular shape. The jackpot expectation at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third pending icon 9A shifts to become the second pending icon 9A, and changes to green while continuing the circular shape. The jackpot expectation at this point is 30%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second pending icon 9A shifts to the first pending icon 9A, and the green color changes from circular to square while continuing. The jackpot expectation at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), the variation effect is performed. In this variable effect, the first pending icon 9A is shifted to become the variable icon 9C, and various effects using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a big hit, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form a big winning pattern array, and in the case of a loss, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form a winning pattern array.

[Icon Special Change Effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining special icon change effect B. FIG. In this icon special change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. These pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in the normal state. Of the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon is called the variable icon 9A. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the third pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth pending icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 82(A), a first pending icon 9A to a third pending icon 9A are displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third pending icon 9A changes to blue while continuing its circular shape. The jackpot expectation at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third pending icon 9A shifts to become the second pending icon 9A, and changes from circular to square to green. The jackpot expectation at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second pending icon 9A shifts to become the first pending icon 9A, and changes to red while maintaining a square shape. The jackpot expectation at this point is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), the variable effect is performed. In this variable effect, the first pending icon 9A shifts to become the variable icon 9C, and changes to gold while continuing to be square. The jackpot expectation at this point is 80%. Also, in the variable production, various productions using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a big hit, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form a big winning pattern array, and in the case of a loss, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form a winning pattern array.

[Modification]
In the special icon change effect, the icon with a low degree of expectation for a big win may be changed to an icon with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and then the icon with a low degree of expectation for a big win may be changed. In that case, after the icon with a low degree of expectation for big wins is changed to an icon with a high degree of expectation for big wins, the degree of expectation for big wins may be higher than when the icon is changed to an icon with a high degree of expectation for big wins.
In the above-mentioned icon special change effect, when the icon changes, it is a configuration in which the expectation level of the jackpot does not decrease from the expectation level of the previous jackpot. You may change to the aspect which falls. In this case, as a special case, a big win may be determined as a violation of the rule.
In the icon special change effect, the icon may be changed to a different shape (for example, triangle) in addition to circular and square icons. In that case, if the colors are the same, a quadrangle may have a higher chance of winning a big win than a circle, and a triangle may have a higher chance of winning a big win than a quadrilateral.

[Effect example]
In the icon special change effect, one of the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C can be displayed in a circular or rectangular form, or in a different color form. Also, one of the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be displayed in a plurality of patterns of blue, green, and red in the case of a circular shape. Furthermore, one of the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be displayed in a plurality of patterns of green, red, and gold in the case of a square. According to this configuration, the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C can be changed in various patterns, and various icon change modes can be provided to the player. As a result, the player's interest in the icons can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect out of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined icon in an icon group consisting of a change icon representing the change or a hold icon representing a hold is selected in the first mode and the first display effect. Performing an effect to display in either one of the second form different from the form,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
the predetermined icon of the first form has a plurality of patterns,
the plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form have the same shape and have different aspect portions,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
the predetermined icon of the second form has a plurality of patterns,
the plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form have the same shape and have different aspect portions,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
the plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form have the same shape and different colors;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
the plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form have the same shape and different colors;
A gaming machine characterized by:
In addition, the above aspect may be the following aspects.
A given icon of the first form may change to an icon of the second form.
Among the plurality of patterns of icons of the first form, the pattern with the highest degree of expectation for a big win is higher than the pattern with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win among the plurality of patterns of the icon of the second form. It is good also as a structure with high expectations.
Among the plurality of patterns of the icon of the first form, the pattern with the highest probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the pattern with the second highest probability of winning the jackpot among the plurality of patterns of the icon of the second form. , It is good also as a structure with a low jackpot expectation.
Among the plurality of patterns of the icon of the first form, the pattern with the highest degree of expectation for the big win is higher than the pattern with the highest degree of expectation for the jackpot among the plurality of patterns of the icon of the second type. It is good also as a structure with low expectations.
The second form, the icon, is larger than the first form, the icon.

The variable icon jump effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. In FIGS. 83 to 85, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. Some have been omitted.

This variable icon jump effect can be executed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and if the instruction to execute the variable icon jump effect is included, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, the variable icon jump effect A will be described first, and the variable icon jump effect B and the variable icon jump effect C will be described in order.

[Relevant change icon jump effect A]
The variable icon jump effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect A. FIG. The variable icon jump effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Also, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-variation area is provided for variable production (variable display). The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-fluctuation area, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, A variable effect (variable display) by the small right decorative pattern 8Rz is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small medium The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern Even if 8Lz and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all small right decorative patterns 8Rz) are in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz are displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns.

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win big, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz is selected. , a small middle decorative pattern 8Cz and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 83(A), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, and when the variable icon jump effect A is started, as shown in FIG. 1" is stop-displayed, the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed at number "3", the variable performance (variable display) by the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued, and a flash FH1 is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the holding display position 9Ad do not become difficult to see due to the flash light FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become invisible due to the flash FH1 and disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz do not become difficult to see due to the flash FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a. While (while starting to move), the size of the variable icon 9C increases.

When the variable icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the size of the variable icon 9C is about 2 times larger than the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd. .5 times larger.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a flash FH2 is emitted from the central portion of the variable icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(E), the flash FH2 makes the variable icon 9C invisible and disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the holding display position 9Ad also become invisible due to the flash light FH2 and temporarily disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz also do not become difficult to see due to the flash FH2 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the flash FH2 disappears, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the left decorative pattern 8L stop-displayed with the number "1" and the right decorative pattern 8R stop-displayed with the number "3" are displayed. It is displayed on the display screen 7a again, and further changes from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C. That is, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variation icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side passes through the near side and moves to the right side. In FIG. 83(F), the white spherical variation icon 9C changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C, and the icon change of the variation icon 9C was successful. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and remains the white spherical variation icon 9C, the icon change of the variation icon 9C has failed.

Subsequently, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8 are cracked and pulverized, the variable icon 9C starts to descend while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd while rotating (starts to move). do. By pulverizing the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8, the variation performance (variation display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R is started again.

Subsequently, when the movement of the variable icon 9C to the variable display position 9Cd is completed, as shown in FIG. It returns to the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C at the variation display position 9Cd shown, and rotates.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "7" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C. is variable production (variable display) and reach is formed. At this time, neither the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L nor the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small right decorative pattern 8Lz are not temporarily displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue the variable effect (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. advances (moves) toward a position near the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then is shown in FIG. 83 (J). returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a big win is assumed. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, whereas the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it's out of place. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8L, the small middle decorative pattern 8C and the small right decorative pattern 8R are also stopped and displayed. When a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) at a position near the bottom side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) on the front (front) of the display screen 7a, By arranging the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad, the player can see the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. When the suspended icon 9A exists, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad. , the variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad become difficult to see.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at a position (lower advance position (lower effect position)) on the front (front) side of the display screen 7a and closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), There is a case where the variation icon 9C changes to another icon to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win, and the second movable accessory 15 changes the variation icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad. , the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad become difficult for the player to see, and the player can expect an increase in the expectation of a big win. It is possible. At this time, the color of the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad may be changed or the shape may be changed without changing the variable icon 9C. Even in this case, the player can expect an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Relevant change icon jump effect B]
Next, the variable icon jump effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect B. FIG. The variable icon jump effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Also, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-variation area is provided for variable production (variable display). The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-fluctuation area, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, A variable effect (variable display) by the small right decorative pattern 8Rz is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small medium The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern Even if 8Lz and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all small right decorative patterns 8Rz) are in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz are displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns.

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win big, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz is selected. , a small middle decorative pattern 8Cz and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 84(A), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, and when the variable icon jump effect B is started, as shown in FIG. The image EG is displayed and appears, and the disk image EG moves at high speed toward the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd and collides with it. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) all disappear from the display screen 7a before the disc image EG appears.

When the disk image EG collides with the variable icon 9C, the variable icon 9C jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a (while starting to move), and moves from the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. A flash FH is emitted over the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the flash FH makes the variable icon 9C difficult to see. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd becomes temporarily invisible due to the flash FH and may disappear from the display screen 7a, whereas the suspended display position 9Ad does not become difficult to see due to the flash FH and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no Also, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz do not become difficult to see due to the flash FH and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 begins to disappear, gradually the presence of the variable icon 9C becomes visible in the center of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. icon changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and a message MG1 that conveys an increase in the expectation of a big win, "UP!" be. That is, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variation icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side passes through the near side and moves to the right side. In FIG. 84(D), the white spherical variation icon 9C changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C, and the icon change of the variation icon 9C was successful. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and remains the white spherical variation icon 9C, the icon change of the variation icon 9C has failed.

When the variation icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the size of the star-shaped variation icon 9C changes to the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C at the variation display position 9Cd. about 2.5 times larger than the

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 84(E), the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a when the variable icon 9C starts to descend (start to move) toward the variable display position 9Cd while rotating. Then, when the movement of the variable icon 9C to the variable display position 9Cd is completed, the variable icon 9C is kept rotating as shown in FIG. 84(F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 84(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) are again displayed and appear on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "7" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C. is variable production (variable display) and reach is formed. At this time, neither the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L nor the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small right decorative pattern 8Lz are not temporarily displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue the variable effect (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. advances (moves) toward a position near the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then is shown in FIG. 84 (J). returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a big win is assumed. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, whereas the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it's out of place. When a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) at a position near the bottom side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) on the front (front) of the display screen 7a, By arranging the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad, the player can see the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. When the suspended icon 9A exists, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad. , the variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad become difficult to see.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at a position (lower advance position (lower effect position)) on the front (front) side of the display screen 7a and closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), There is a case where the variation icon 9C changes to another icon to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win, and the second movable accessory 15 changes the variation icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad. , the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad become difficult for the player to see, and the player can expect an increase in the expectation of a big win. It is possible. At this time, the color of the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad may be changed or the shape may be changed without changing the variable icon 9C. Even in this case, the player can expect an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Relevant change icon jump effect C]
Next, the variable icon jump effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect C. FIG. The variable icon jump effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

Also, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-variation area is provided for variable production (variable display). The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, and does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-fluctuation area, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, A variable effect (variable display) by the small right decorative pattern 8Rz is started, and at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small medium The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern Even if 8Lz and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, all small right decorative patterns 8Rz) are in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz are displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns.

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win big, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz is selected. , a small middle decorative pattern 8Cz and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz are arranged in the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 85(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started and the variable icon jump effect C is started, as shown in FIG. 85(B), the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variation icon 9C displayed at the variation display position 9Cd jumps up (starts to move) toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the variable icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 85(C), the variable icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C is about 2.5 times larger than the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd. In addition, in FIG. 85(C), there is a case where the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and the variable icon 9C does not explode, but a crack runs through the variable icon 9C and is pulverized. .

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) are before the variable icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes. Alternatively, before the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and cracks run through the variable icon 9C and the variable icon 9C is pulverized, it all disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz during the variable production (during variable display) do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes, or the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) ) When the variation icon 9C is cracked and pulverized, it changes from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 85(D). That is, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variation icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side passes through the near side and moves to the right side. In FIG. 85(D), the white spherical variation icon 9C changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C to successfully change the icon of the variation icon 9C. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and remains the white spherical variation icon 9C, the icon change of the variation icon 9C has failed. Also, in FIG. 85(C), if the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) without exploding and shrinks again to return to its original size, the white spherical icon The variable icon 9C remains as it is, and the icon change of the variable icon 9C fails.

Then, while the variable icon 9C is rotating, it starts to descend (starts to move) while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd. The size of 9C returns to the size before jumping up (that is, the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C at the variation display position 9Cd shown in FIG. 85(B)), and the rotating state is maintained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85(E), the variable display position 9Cd and the suspension display position 9Ad appear again on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 85(F), from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) and advances (moves) toward the position near the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then moves to FIG. 85 (G). As shown, it returns to the retracted position (home position) again, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R during the variable production (variable display) are displayed again on the display screen 7a and appear.

In a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) at a position near the bottom side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) on the front (front) of the display screen 7a, By arranging the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad, the player can see the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. When the suspended icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad. , the variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad become difficult to see.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at a position near the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), There is a case where the variation icon 9C changes to another icon to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win, and the second movable accessory 15 changes the variation icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad. , the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad become difficult for the player to see, and the player can expect an increase in the expectation of a big win. It is possible. At this time, the color of the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad may be changed or the shape may be changed without changing the variable icon 9C. Even in this case, the player can expect an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "7" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C. is variable production (variable display) and reach is formed. At this time, neither the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L nor the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not temporarily displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a big win is assumed. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, whereas the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it's out of place. When a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable icon jump effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, a plurality of types of images can be displayed. An image display device 7 (display means) is provided, and after the variation icon 9C moves from the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Then, when the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode), it returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position). 83 (B) to (G) for the variable icon jump effect A, FIGS. 84 (B) to (F) for the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 for the variable icon jump effect C (B) to (E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode changes to Since it changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, by giving dynamic movement to the variable icon 9C, the effect variation to the variable icon 9C can be obtained. In addition, the change of the variable icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. , the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and are not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at the center (second display position). Further, for example, in the first effect in FIGS. 83(B) to 83(G) of the variable icon jump effect A, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed, and the variable icon In the first effect in FIGS. 84(B) to 84(F) of the jump effect B, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed. Therefore, in the first effect, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C is present in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the change of the variable icon 9C can be noticed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. The variable icon 9C changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode) at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of 7 is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (second display position). 1 display position), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not displayed. there is Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at the center (second display position). Further, for example, in the first effect in FIGS. 83(B) to 83(G) of the variable icon jump effect A, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 84(B) to (F) of the variable icon jump effect B, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 84(F), and the variable icon jump effect C is displayed. 85(B) to (E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 85(E). According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C returns to the variable display position 9Cd, completion of the change of the variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), and furthermore, the image display device By not displaying any image indicating the central position in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of 7 on the display screen 7a, the existing image, that is, the variable display position 9Cd ( first display position).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. ), and in the first effect, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed. display position) is not displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed. Specifically, in the first effect in FIGS. 83(B) to 83(G) of the variable icon jump effect A, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the holding display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, whereas in FIG. 83(E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed. . 85(B) to (E) of the variable icon jump effect C, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the holding display position 9Ad (first 3 display position) is displayed, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the suspension display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in FIG. 85(D). Therefore, in the first effect, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed. position) is not displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, the variable icon It can contribute to the improvement of the performance effect in combination with the movement and change of 9C.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. It has a second movable accessory 15 (movable body) that can appear on the front side, and after the first effect, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the holding display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is operated to display the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the holding display position 9Ad (third display position). 83 (I) for the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84 (I) for the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 (F) for the variable icon jump effect C) can be executed. According to this configuration, the movement of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) changes the color of the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the holding display position 9Ad (third display position). Since it is possible to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win by changing the shape, etc., it is possible to make the player expect an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. The character object 15 (movable body) is operated to cover the variable icon 9C to make it difficult to see. Specifically, in FIG. 83 (I) for the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84 (I) for the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 (F) for the variable icon jump effect C, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the variable icon 9C to make it difficult to see. According to this configuration, by the action of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body), it is possible to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win by changing the variable icon 9C to another icon. You can expect an improvement.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. When 9C is moved again from the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), at the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) It can be rotated in a given direction. Specifically, in FIG. 83(G) for the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84(F) for the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85(E) for the variable icon jump effect C, the variable icon 9C is , the left side passes through the near side and then the right side is repeatedly rotated (rotated in a predetermined direction). According to this configuration, attention can be drawn to the variation icon 9C after the change.

[Modification]
A modification of the variable icon jump effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
The variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
The second effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. In FIG. 84 (I) for the icon jump effect B, and in FIG. 85 (F) for the variable icon jump effect C), when the pending icon 9A exists, the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) is operated to display the pending display. The hold icon 9A at the position 9Ad (third display position) may be covered to make it difficult to see. In this way, it is possible to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win by changing the pending icon 9A to another icon, so that the second movable accessory 15 changes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the By being placed in front of the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad become difficult for the player to see, and the player is expected to increase the degree of expectation for a big win. can be expected.

[Modification 3]
In the second effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. from the home position) to the front (front) of the display screen 7a and near the bottom side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad are difficult to see. When the suspended icon 9A exists, of course, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad. The variable icon 9C, the suspended icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to visually recognize. However, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) does not reach from the retracted position (home position) to the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a and near the bottom side (lower advance position (lower production position)) ( For example, it may move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position (lower effect position), which is the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and then return to the retracted position (home position). In this case, even if the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves, it does not cover the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, and even if the reserved icon 9A exists, Since the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad are not covered, the expectation of the big win that the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A change to other icons is increased. or to change the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad to increase the expectation of a big hit, but the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) simply moves. Even in such a case, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested.

[Modification 4]
The first effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. ), in FIGS. 84(B) to (F) in the variable icon jump effect B, and in FIGS. 85(B) to (E) in the variable icon jump effect C), the white spherical variable icon 9C jumped up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as another icon, successfully changing the icon of the variable icon 9C. However, the pending icon 9A has already changed from a white spherical icon to a blue smiley sphere icon, and when this blue smiley sphere pending icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable icon jump effect is performed. Then, the blue smile sphere variation icon 9C jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another icon, for example, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C. icon change may be successful or unsuccessful. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation by the variation of the variation icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variation icon 9C. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 5]
In the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, when the variable icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes. Alternatively, the variation icon 9C is cracked and shattered without being exploded. However, when the white spherical variation icon 9C swells and explodes, the shell of the white spherical variation icon 9C is peeled off by the explosion, and another icon such as a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C appears. Alternatively, the white spherical variation icon 9C may swell and be torn apart and explode, and another icon such as a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C may appear. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the change of the variable icon 9C, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the presentation effect of the change of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 6]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. ~ when the pending icon 9A exists at each of the third pending display positions 9Ad, that is, when three pending icons 9A exist, or when the pending icons 9A are respectively present at the first pending display positions 9Ad to the fourth pending display positions 9Ad. When there are four pending icons 9A, that is, when four pending icons 9A are present, the pending icon is dissipated by the progress of the game as a suggestion (announcement) of the variable icon jump performance by the pre-reading effect, and each time the pending icon 9A is shifted. The size of 9A may be made larger. In this way, the start time of the variable icon jump effect can be suggested to the player, which can contribute to heightening expectations for the change of the variable icon 9C by the variable icon jump effect.

[Modification 7]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. After that, it changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C as another icon, and successfully changed the icon of the variation icon 9C. Before and after this change, the size of the variation icon 9C may be increased or decreased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the change of the variable icon 9C, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the presentation effect of the change of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Immediately before, the variable icon 9C may jump up (start moving) from the variable display position 9Cd toward the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display position 9Cd changes from another icon (for example, the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow icon) in the center of the display screen 7a. It may change to the (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C) and return to the variable display position 9Cd again. In this way, after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode is changed to another. In order to change to the display mode and return to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, dynamic movement is given to the variable icon 9C to increase the variation of effects to the variable icon 9C, Furthermore, the change of the variable icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 9]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83(I), the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84(I), and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 7 advances from a resting position (home position) above the display screen 7 to a position (lower advanced position (lower effect position)) near the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 ( move), stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. However, another movable accessory provided on the game board 2 may be used instead of the second movable accessory 15 . For example, a lower movable accessory is provided below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the front surface ( Forward), advance (move) so as to cover all of the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A (there may be up to four reserved balls), It may be stopped for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) and then returned to the retracted position (home position). In this way, it is possible to suggest an increase in the expectation of a big win by changing the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad by the action of the lower movable accessory. It is possible to make the player expect an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win, and to suggest an increase in the degree of expectation for a big win by changing the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A to another icon, so that the player can expect a big win. Expectations can be raised.

[Modification 10]
The variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. may have been added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A12-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
After the variable icon moves from the first display position to the second display position, when the display mode of the variable icon is changed to another display mode, the icon moves to the first display position again. 1 production can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-1,
In the first effect, the first display position and the second display position may not be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A12-1 or aspect A12-2,
In the first effect, when the variable icon changed to the other display mode at the second display position moves to the first display position again, the first display position is displayed and the second display position is displayed. do not display the display position of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-3,
there is a third display position representing the display position of the hold icon;
In the first effect, the third display position is displayed when the first display position is displayed, and the third display position is not displayed when the first display position is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-4,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
After the first effect, when the first display position and the third display position are displayed, the movable body is operated to display the first display position and the third display position. It is possible to execute a second effect that covers and makes it difficult to see,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-5,
In the second effect, the movable body may be operated to cover the variable icon and make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect A12-5 or aspect A12-6,
In the second effect, the movable body may be operated to cover the hold icon at the third display position and make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A12-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-7,
In the first effect, when the variable icon is moved again from the second display position to the first display position, it is rotated in a predetermined direction at the first display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operating means appearance effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. This operation means appearance effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation means appearance effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Operation Means Appearance Effect A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect A. FIG. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when an operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating the operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65 and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, on the display screen 7a). In this case, the reach is “2 ↓ 2”). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 86(B), an operation prompting image SG for prompting the player to operate the operating means is displayed. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image of "Push!!", and is enlarged and displayed across three screens, ie, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, the operation prompting image SG is displayed protruding from the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation prompting image SG is momentarily confused as to what should be operated. As a result, interest in the operation target can be heightened, and interest can be improved. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. fit. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation prompting image SG is further reduced and moved, and displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. Also, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation prompting image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63 . The display of the operation means image BTN allows the player to notice that the operation of the effect button 63 has been prompted, and the player's attention is focused on the effect button 63 . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(F), both the operation tool image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are displayed in reduced size. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation prompting image SG are not displayed in reduced size after being displayed together, so that they can attract the player's attention again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), the specific image TG is displayed behind the operation tool image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. In the specific image TG, as shown in FIGS. 86(G) and (H), the scale panel is displayed in order from the left side, and an effect of gradually completing is executed. When all the scale panels (here, six panels) are completed and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. The mode changes accordingly. Here, when the player presses the production button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side to notify that the remaining period required to operate the production button 63 is shortened. there is Unless the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG does not change in order from the left side.

After that, when the period required to operate the effect button 63 expires, the display of the operation means image BTN, the operation prompting image SG, and the specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of failure.

[Operation Means Appearance Effect B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the operating means appearance effect B. FIG. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when an operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating the operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65 and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, on the display screen 7a). In this case, the reach is “2 ↓ 2”). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an operation prompting image SG for prompting the player to operate the operating means is displayed. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a character image of "Press repeatedly!", "Press!" Here, the order is switched in the order of "Continuous hit!!"→"Press!"→"Long press!"→"Consecutive hit!!". The operation prompting image SG is enlarged and displayed across three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, the operation prompting image SG is displayed protruding from the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation prompting image SG is momentarily confused as to what should be operated. Furthermore, since the contents of the operation prompting image SG are changed periodically, it is confusing how to operate. As a result, interest in the operation target and the operation method can be heightened, and interest can be improved. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. fit. The character contents of the operation prompting image SG are continuously switched. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. The character contents of the operation prompting image SG are continuously switched. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation prompting image SG is further reduced and moved to be displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. Also, the operation tool image BTN is newly displayed below the operation prompting image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63 . The display of the operation means image BTN allows the player to notice that the operation of the effect button 63 has been prompted, and the player's attention is focused on the effect button 63 . After that, as shown in FIG. 87(F), both the operation tool image BTN and the operation prompting image SG are displayed in reduced size. Normally, after the operation means image BTN and the operation prompting image SG are displayed together, they are not displayed in reduced size, so they can attract the player's attention again. At this time as well, the character content of the operation prompting image SG continues to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), the specific image TG is displayed behind the operation tool image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. As shown in FIGS. 87(G) and (H), the specific image TG is displayed in order from the left side by the player operating the production button 63 in accordance with the contents of the operation prompting image SG which is changed in sequence. Then, a production that gradually completes is executed. That is, when the operation prompting image SG is "Press repeatedly!", the effect button 63 is pressed repeatedly, when "Press! By pressing and holding 63, the scale panels are displayed in order from the left. If the player does not operate according to the display contents of the operation prompting image SG, the number of scale panels does not increase. The specific image TG is completed when all the scale panels (here, six) are completed within a predetermined period of time. If all the scale panels are not completed within a predetermined period of time, the operation means image BTN, operation prompting image SG, and specific image TG disappear at that time.

As shown in FIG. 87(I), the specific image TG changes its mode in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation means (here, the effect button 63). Here, the specific image TG stops switching in a state in which "Consecutive hits!!" is displayed. In this state, by repeatedly hitting the effect button 63 by the player, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side, and when the color of all the scale panels changes, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image are displayed. The display of SG and specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of failure.

[Operation Means Appearance Effect C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect C. FIG. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when the operation means image ASI, which is an image imitating the operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, the select button 98, etc., appears. First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, on the display screen 7a). In this case, the reach is “2 ↓ 2”). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 88(B), an operation prompting image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image of "Push it in!", and is enlarged and displayed across the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, the operation prompting image SG is displayed protruding from the three screens. At this time, the operating means image ASI is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image ASI. Therefore, the player who sees the operation prompting image SG is momentarily confused as to what should be operated. As a result, interest in the operation target can be heightened, and interest can be improved. A portion of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. fit. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operating means image ASI is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation prompting image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits within the display screen 7a. At this time, the operating means image ASI is not yet displayed. The operation prompting image SG is displayed at a position that does not overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R by reduced display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(E), the operation means image ASI is newly displayed below the operation prompting image SG. The operation means image ASI is displayed overlapping the operation prompting image SG. At this time, the operation means image ASI is displayed on the front side. Thereby, the impact of the operation means image ASI can be given. Here, the operating means image ASI is an image imitating the sword member 65 . The display of the operation means image ASI makes the player aware that the operation of the sword member 65 has been prompted, and the player's attention is focused on the sword member 65 . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(F), both the operation means image ASI and the operation prompting image SG are reduced and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Normally, the operation means image ASI and the operation prompting image SG are not displayed in reduced size after being displayed together, so that they can attract the player's attention again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), the specific image TG is displayed behind the operation means image ASI and the operation prompting image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. In the specific image TG, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) and (H), this scale panel is displayed in order from the left side, and an effect of gradually completing is executed. When all the scale panels (here, six panels) are completed and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. The mode changes accordingly. Here, when the player pushes the sword member 65 downward, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side, indicating that the remaining period required to operate the sword member 65 is shortened. are doing.

After that, when the period required to operate the sword member 65 expires, the display of the operation means image ASI, the operation prompting image SG, and the specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of failure.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), FIGS. 87(B) to (D), and FIGS. 88(B) to (D), an operation means image is displayed on the display screen 7a. A first effect of displaying an operation prompting image SG in a state where BTN and ASI are not displayed, and a second effect of displaying the operation means images BTN and ASI after the first effect are executed. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), FIGS. 87(B) to (D), and FIGS. The promotion image SG is displayed across at least one of the sub-display screens 64R and 64L and the display screen 7a, and then reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), FIGS. 87(B) to (D), and FIGS. The promotion image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and after being displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (E), FIGS. 87(B) to (E), and FIGS. After the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the temporarily stopped decorative pattern in the state, it is reduced and displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(E) to (F), FIGS. 87(E) to (F), and FIGS. 88(E) to (F), after the second effect, Both the operation means images BTN and ASI and the operation prompting image SG are displayed in reduced size. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(F)-(I), FIGS. 87(F)-(I), and FIGS. 88(F)-(I), A specific image TG whose mode changes in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation means is displayed behind the operation means images BTN and ASI. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the operation means appearance effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means appearance effects A to C, the operation prompting image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. After that, it is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the operation prompting image SG may be displayed across one of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a, and may not be displayed on the other sub-display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means appearance effect A, as shown in FIG. 86(I), the specific image TG changes its mode in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (effect button 63) by the player. That is, when the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side, shortening the remaining period during which the effect button 63 needs to be operated. However, even if the player does not press the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG may change sequentially from the left side over time.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image imitating the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation means;
a first effect in which the operation promotion image is displayed in a state where the operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which the operation means image is displayed after the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 further comprises
Equipped with sub-display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the first effect, the operation prompting image is displayed across the sub-display means and the display means, and then reduced and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
The sub-display means are provided on both sides of the display means,
In the first effect, the operation prompting image is displayed across both the sub-display means and the display means, and then reduced and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In the first effect, after the operation prompting image is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the ready-to-reach state, it is reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap with the decorative pattern. game machine.
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After the second effect, both the operation means image and the operation prompting image are displayed in reduced size.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
After the second effect, a specific image is displayed on the back side of the operation means image, the mode of which changes in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The component assembly effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. FIG. 89 to 91, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front (front) side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. Some have been omitted.

This parts assembly effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and when an instruction to execute a specific area variable effect is included, the corresponding image is displayed from the ROM 103. The data is read out and images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

Here, the parts assembly presentation A will be explained first, and the parts assembly presentation B and then the parts assembly presentation C will be explained in order.

[Parts assembly performance A]
The parts assembly rendering A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect A. FIG. The parts assembly effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . At this time, the decorative design is not displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 89(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started, as shown in FIG. A right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed in a display mode in which five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the sword member 65 is a sword-shaped operation unit that can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that the player can push downward as a whole. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword. This sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The part image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the part image PT3 becomes , the part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center. The part image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

After that, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are displayed as shown in FIG. 89(C). , and is placed near the bottom of the center of each display screen. The part image PT2 straddles the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, and is placed near the upper center of each display screen. The part image PT3 is arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is eventually displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without going through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The part image PT4 is arranged near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is eventually displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without going through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The part image PT5 is arranged in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and eventually, it does not protrude from the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. 64L directly. It should be noted that the part image PT1 is laid out across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R while being three-dimensionally rotated, and arranged near the bottom center of each display screen. becomes. In addition, the part image PT2 is arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. becomes. The part images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG in a state of lying down as shown in FIG. 89(D) is displayed. is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver because the five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the handle has a smooth surface. there is When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 89(B) and (C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. is smaller than the size of the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in .

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 89(E) and 89(F), the end of the hilt of the sword image KG lying down is rotated clockwise so that the end of the hilt of the sword image KG is turned upward. The sword image KG is moved downward so that the end of the hilt of the sword in the image display device 7 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the end of the hilt of the sword in the sword image KG (the sword button KBG is portion) emits light.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 89G, the sword image KG is enlarged, and the end of the hilt of the sword in the sword image KG is displayed largely in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. At this time, the operation (press) of the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, the sword button provided at the end of the handle of the sword (sword button KBG provided at the end of the handle of the sword in the sword image KG) is prompted. A message MG saying "press here" is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. The message MG is divided into three characters "here" and two characters "press". 3 characters are arranged, and two characters ``press'' are arranged on the right side of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this way, it is possible to emphasize the content of prompting the operation (pressing) of the sword button of the sword member 65 to "press here" in an easy-to-understand manner for the player without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Further, the position of the sword button KBG in the sword image KG modeled after the sword button of the sword member 65 to be operated can be emphasized in the message MG in an easy-to-understand manner for the player without obstructing the visibility. can.

An indicator image IG indicating a period for accepting an operation (pressing) of the sword button of the sword member 65 (hereinafter referred to as an "operation accepting period") is a portion of the sword image KG (specifically, a portion of the hilt of the sword). It is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover it. By arranging in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation accepting period can be emphasized and conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the player operates (presses) the sword button of the sword member 65, or when the operation reception period elapses without the player operating (pressing) the sword button of the sword member 65, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed. is stop-displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "7", and is lost. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

[Parts assembly performance B]
Next, the parts assembly rendering B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the parts assembly presentation B. FIG. The parts assembly effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decoration pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . At this time, the decorative design is not displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 90(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started, as shown in FIG. A right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed in a display mode in which five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon. disappear. Accordingly, by displaying only the variation icon 9C in the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the variation icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner. Here, the variable icon 9C is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that visibility is not hindered by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is a sword-shaped operating portion that can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that the player can push downward as a whole. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword. The sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The part image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the part image PT3 becomes , the part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center. The part image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

After that, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. , and is placed near the bottom of the center of each display screen. The part image PT2 straddles the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, and is placed near the upper center of each display screen. The part image PT3 is arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is eventually displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without going through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The part image PT4 is arranged near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is eventually displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without going through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The part image PT5 is arranged in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and eventually, it does not protrude from the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. 64L directly. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

It should be noted that the part image PT1 is laid out across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R while being three-dimensionally rotated, and arranged near the bottom center of each display screen. becomes. In addition, the part image PT2 is arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. becomes. The part images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG in a state of lying down as shown in FIG. 90(D) is displayed. is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver because the five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the handle has a smooth surface. there is When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 90(B) and (C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. is smaller than the size of the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in . At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 90(E) and (F), the end of the handle of the sword in the image of the sword KG lying sideways is rotated clockwise so that the end of the hilt faces upward. The entire image KG is further reduced and displayed in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90(G), the sword image KG is now enlarged, and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . At this time, a message MG saying "push" is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to prompt an operation (push) to push the entire sword member 65 downward. The message MG is divided into two characters "push" and two characters "kome", and the two characters "push" are arranged to the left of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , two characters "kome" are arranged on the right side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this way, it is possible to emphasize the contents of prompting the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, which is called "pushing", in an easy-to-understand manner for the player without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Furthermore, the sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65 to be operated can be emphasized in a way that the player can easily understand without hindering the visibility of the message MG.

An indicator image IG indicating a period for accepting an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter referred to as an "operation accepting period") is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the hilt of the sword). is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover the . By arranging in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation accepting period can be emphasized and conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Also in FIG. 90(G), the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

When the player performs an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, or when the operation reception period elapses without the player performing an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, the As shown in (H), the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90(I), a battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. In the battle effect, the state in which the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same pattern, resulting in a big win, and then a big win game (big win performance). On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stop-displayed as the same pattern and are lost. When the battle effect ends and the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. . Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate effect. (variation display) is started.

[Parts assembly performance C]
Next, the parts assembly rendering C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect C. FIG. The parts assembly presentation C is performed during the variation presentation (during the variation display) by the decoration pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . At this time, no decorative design is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started in FIG. 91(A), after that, as shown in FIG. A right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed in a display mode in which five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon. disappear. Accordingly, by displaying only the variation icon 9C in the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the variation icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner. Here, the variable icon 9C is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that visibility is not hindered by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is a sword-shaped operating portion that can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that the player can push downward as a whole. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword. The sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The part image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the part image PT3 becomes , the part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center. The part image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

After that, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R as shown in FIG. , and is placed near the bottom center of each display screen. The part image PT2 straddles the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, and is placed near the upper center of each display screen. The part image PT3 is arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is eventually displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without going through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The part image PT4 is arranged near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is eventually displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without going through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The part image PT5 is arranged in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and eventually, it does not protrude from the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. 64L directly. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

It should be noted that the part image PT1 is laid out across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R while being three-dimensionally rotated, and arranged near the bottom center of each display screen. becomes. In addition, the part image PT2 is arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. becomes. The part images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG in a state of lying down is displayed as shown in FIG. 91(D). is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver because the five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the handle has a smooth surface. there is When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 91(B) and (C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. is smaller than the size of the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in . At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 91(E) and 91(F), the end of the hilt of the sword image KG lying sideways is rotated clockwise so that the end of the hilt faces upward. The entire image KG is further reduced and displayed in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(G), the sword image KG is now enlarged, and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . 91(F)→FIG. 91(E)→FIG. 91(D)→FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91). (H)) (FIG. 91(H) is the same view as FIG. 91(C)), and the part images PT1 to PT5 appear. Even in such a mode that the procedure returns one by one, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Then, again, in order to assemble the sword image KG from the part images PT1 to PT5, the procedure up to this point is performed one by one, as shown in FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91(H))→FIG. Proceeding from (E) to FIG. 91(F), the sword image KG is enlarged again as shown in FIG. displayed large. Even in such a mode that the procedure proceeds one by one, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained. The color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are silver because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. The handle has a smooth surface. On the other hand, the color and the shape of the hilt of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. It changes to a shape with unevenness. That is, the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are different from the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(I). This clearly and emphatically suggests that the expectations for the jackpot have increased.

In FIG. 91(I), a message MG "Push" is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to prompt an operation (push) to push the entire sword member 65 downward. The message MG is divided into two characters "push" and two characters "kome", and the two characters "push" are arranged to the left of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , two characters "kome" are arranged on the right side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this way, it is possible to emphasize the contents of prompting the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, which is called "pushing", in an easy-to-understand manner for the player without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Furthermore, the sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65 to be operated can be emphasized in a way that the player can easily understand without hindering the visibility of the message MG.

An indicator image IG indicating a period for accepting an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter referred to as an "operation accepting period") is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the hilt of the sword). is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover the . By arranging in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation accepting period can be emphasized and conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the player performs an operation (pushing) of pushing the whole sword member 65 downward, or when the player does not perform an operation (pushing) of pushing the whole sword member 65 downward and the operation reception period elapses, FIG. As shown in (J), the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(K), a battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. In the battle effect, the state in which the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same pattern, resulting in a big win, and then a big win game (big win performance). On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stop-displayed as the same pattern and are lost. When the battle effect ends and the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. . Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate effect. (variation display) is started.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the component assembly presentation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. The sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (having a plurality of display means), the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (a plurality of display means) are provided with the image display device 7 (main display). means), and one or more right sub-display screens 64R and left sub-display screens 64L (sub-display means) excluding the image display device 7 (main display means), and a sword member 65 ( The part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of the sword image KG (operation means image) imitating the operation means) are displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). 89 (B) and (C) in the parts assembly effect A, FIGS. 90 (B) and (C) in the parts assembly effect B, and FIG. 91 (B) in the parts assembly effect C , (C)) and, after the first effect, a second effect in which the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) are assembled on the image display device 7 (main display means) to complete the sword image KG (operation means image). (Fig. 89 (D) in the parts assembly presentation A, Fig. 90 (D) in the parts assembly presentation B, and Figure 91 (D) in the parts assembly presentation C can be executed. According to this method, part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of a sword image KG (operation means image) simulating the sword member 65 (operation means) are displayed on the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (a plurality of It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel effect of assembling the sword image KG (operating means image) using the display means of (2).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. A portion of the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) displayed in 1 is displayed so as to protrude from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). According to this configuration, the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) can be displayed in a large size using the image display device 7 (main display means) and the right sub-display screen 64R and left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to clearly and emphatically convey to the player what kind of parts the sword member 65 is actually composed of.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. There are part images PT4 and PT5 (parts) directly displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the screen 64L (sub display means). According to this configuration, the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) are displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) via the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). and an image directly displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). ∼ PT5 (component) can be diversified in the direction in which it enters the image display device 7 (main display means). In other words, various effects by the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) are supported by using the image display device 7 (main display means), the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). can be emphasized to

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. When the sword image KG (operation means image) is completed, the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a large size, and a message MG (operation promotion image) prompting the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed. It is now displayed. According to this configuration, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed large. Since a message MG (operation prompting image) prompting an operation is displayed, the timing of starting the operation timing of the sword member 65 (operation means) is clearly communicated to the player, and the action to be performed by the player from now on is explained to the player. You can emphasize and tell people.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second presentation in the parts assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly presentation C of FIG. Then, the sword image KG (operation means image) disappears. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means) has been accepted.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second presentation in the parts assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly presentation C of FIG. An indicator image IG (acceptance period image) indicating the acceptance period is displayed. According to this configuration, since the player can grasp the remaining time of the period for accepting the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means), the player can calmly operate the sword member 65 (operating means) at his/her own timing. can be done.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. A display mode in which a part) (a part) emits light can be made. According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to making it easier for the player to recognize which part of the sword member 65 (operation means) modeled by the sword image KG (operation means image) is desired to be operated. .

[Modification]
A modification of the specific area variable effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
89, the parts assembly performance B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly performance C of FIG. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the parts assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly presentation C of FIG. However, instead of the sword member 65, a decorative design may be assembled from a plurality of images. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a variable effect (during variable display), a reach is formed. , In order to assemble the middle decorative pattern 8C, using the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (plurality of display means), from all directions toward the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, A plurality of fragment images are collected, and finally, a big win or a loss may be displayed by the assembled middle decorative pattern 8C. In this case, while the middle decorative pattern 8C is being assembled, the player changes the color of the middle decorative pattern 8C (for example, by changing it to red or changing it to rainbow). may be suggested to

[Modification 3]
In the parts assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly presentation C of FIG. However, in place of the sword member 65, other members arranged on the game board 2 or the front frame 53 may be used. For example, images simulating the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged on the game board 2 may be assembled from the component images, or may be arranged on the front frame 53. An image simulating the handle 60 to be assembled may be assembled from the part images. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production. Also, a plurality of assembled members such as the sword member 65, the handle 60, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15 and other movable accessories are prepared, and the degree of expectation for the big win is set in advance. You may do so. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the player's own discovery of the relationship between the components to be assembled and the degree of expectation for the big win.

[Modification 4]
89, the parts assembly performance B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly performance C of FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a to inform the player of the result of the hit/lose determination (big win or loss). However, in the case where a parts assembly effect is performed in which a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using the parts images PT1 to PT5, the result of the hit/lose judgment (a big win or a The image display device displays a suggestive image suggesting a loss) to the player (for example, when suggesting a big win, a winged friend character is displayed, and when a loss is suggested, an enemy character is displayed). 7. It may be displayed on either the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. When the parts assembly performance is performed, the development of the subsequent performance is an important concern for the player, so that the player can predict how the performance will be developed by the appearance of the suggestive image. Furthermore, it is possible to contribute to the player's own discovery of the relevance and rule between the component assembly presentation and the subsequent presentation.

[Modification 5]
In the parts assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly presentation C of FIG. However, instead of the sword member 65, it is also possible to assemble a production button image simulating the production button 63 from the parts image, or to assemble a lever image simulating the lever provided on the front frame 53 from the parts image. You can also By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production. The lever provided on the front frame 53 may be a joystick or a rotating lever, which can be operated by the player at the time of performances executed as the game progresses.

[Modification 6]
In the parts assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly presentation C of FIG. However, an operation unit other than the sword member 65 may be displayed on one of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. For example, a select button image simulating the select button 68 as an operation unit separate from the sword member 65 may be displayed on one of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. can be Unlike the sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65, the select button image is not assembled from the part images in the part assembly presentation, and is used to change the presentation mode (for example, spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode). It informs the player that the change to one of the modes can be performed (accepted) at the player's timing. In other words, when the select button image is displayed, it is possible to change (accept) the effect mode at the player's timing. A sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 and a select button image imitating the select button 68 are simultaneously displayed separately on one of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. may be displayed on the same display screen. In this way, among the sword members 65 and the select buttons 68 that can be operated by the player, the sword members 65 that are assembled using the component images in the component assembly presentation and the select buttons 68 that are not assembled using the component images in the component assembly presentation. However, even if the sword image KG is displayed, the operation of the sword member 65 is as shown in FIG. (I) The operation of the select button 68 is accepted only when the indicator image IG is displayed, whereas the operation of the select button 68 is accepted when the select button image is displayed. Even if the sword member 65 and the select button 68 are displayed at the same time by chance, the sword member 65 and the select button 68 as the operation unit can be used properly in the presentation.

[Modification 7]
90(B) to (G), and in the parts assembly effect C of FIGS. 9C, and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. At this time, for example, the moving image display mode may be such that the star-shaped variable icon 9C shrinks and expands in a bouncing motion, or may rotate. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the presentation effect by the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
90(B) to (G) and the parts assembly effect C of FIGS. It changed to 9C and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be increased by a predetermined factor (for example, about 5 to 8 times) as compared to the size of the white spherical icon. In this way, the change of the variation icon 9C can be emphasized in a way that the player can easily understand.

[Modification 9]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the game ball was arranged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, which makes it intuitive and easy to understand. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the component assembly presentation is started, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are then moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to assemble the sword image KG. As a result, the player may misunderstand the number (the number of held balls) arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as the total number of component images forming the sword image KG. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number representing the above-mentioned number of held balls as a numerical value. This eliminates the possibility that the number displayed as the number of held balls is misunderstood by the player as the total number of component images that make up the sword image KG, and furthermore, the number of held balls is displayed as the number. The numbers displayed on the display screen 7a can be mixed with various background images and various decorative images to make it difficult to distinguish them, and they can be made intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 10]
The parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
the display means includes main display means and one or more sub-display means excluding the main display means;
a first effect in which a component of an operation means image imitating an operation means operable by a player moves from the sub-display means toward the main display means;
After the first effect, a second effect of assembling the parts on the main display means to complete the operation means image can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
In the second effect, part of the part displayed on the main display means is displayed so as to protrude from the sub display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
In the first effect, there is the component that is directly displayed on the main display means without going through the sub-display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second effect, when the operation means image is completed, the size of the operation means image is displayed in a large size, and an operation prompting image prompting the operation of the operation means is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the second effect, when the operation means is operated, the operation means image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or aspect B2-5,
In the second effect, an acceptance period image indicating a period for accepting an operation of the operation means is displayed.
A game machine characterized by

◇ [Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-4 to B2-6,
In the second effect, a display mode in which a part of the operation means image emits light,
A gaming machine characterized by:

92 to 94, decorative pattern effects A to C at the time of reach will be described below. This reach-time decorative design effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol effect at reach time, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Decorative pattern production A when reaching]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining decorative symbol effect A at reach time. The ready-to-win decorative pattern effect is a ready-to-win effect executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state. , and then the reach pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 92(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, on the display screen 7a). In this case, the reach is “2 ↓ 2”). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the pattern 8M enters the frame from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, "6") different from the ready-to-win symbols (here, "2") of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R. As shown in FIGS. 92(C) to (D), the pattern 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a after frame-in.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the pattern 8M moves to the left and stops while straddling the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. At this time, the left side of the pattern 8M is displayed protruding from the left sub-display screen 64L. Thereafter, the pattern 8M moves rightward, returns to the inside of the display screen 7a, and then moves further rightward, straddling the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 92(F). stop in a slanted position. At this time, the right side of the pattern 8M is displayed protruding from the right sub-display screen 64R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the pattern 8M disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the ready-to-win pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(I), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are switched (changed) to the design of the same number as the design 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are in the reach state with the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in a winning or losing mode.

[Reach time decoration pattern production B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining decorative symbol effect B at reach time. The ready-to-win decorative pattern effect is a ready-to-win effect executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state. , and then the reach pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, on the display screen 7a). In this case, the reach is “2 ↓ 2”). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a plurality of patterns 8M frame in from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move leftward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, "6") different from the ready-to-win symbols (here, "2") of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of patterns 8M includes patterns 8M that move leftward, leftward, and leftward, and move radially from the right sub-display screen 64R toward the display screen 7a. When moving from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a, the pattern 8M is temporarily displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. The pattern 8M moves while diffusing in the left direction, the upper left direction, and the lower left direction on the display screen 7a as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the pattern 8M further moves while diffusing from the display screen 7a toward the left sub-display screen 64L. When moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, the pattern 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Also, some of the patterns 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R during movement. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side. The size of the pattern 8M gradually increases during movement (the display is enlarged while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(D), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are framed out of the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a by movement, and are displayed on the three screens. disappear (not visible). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a plurality of patterns 8M enter the frame from below the display screen 7a and move upward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, "6") different from the ready-to-win symbols (here, "2") of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of patterns 8M includes patterns 8M that move not only upward, but also in the upper right direction and the upper left direction. to move radially.

As shown in FIG. 93(F), when moving from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the pattern 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. When moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, the pattern 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Also, some of the patterns 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R during movement. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side. The size of the pattern 8M gradually increases during movement (the display is enlarged while moving).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are moved out of the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the ready-to-win pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a while rotating laterally in three dimensions. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at the center of the display screen 7a while being left-right reversed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(J), the pattern is switched (changed) to a pattern with the same number as the pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92(J) of the ready-to-win decorative design effect A, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, which are in the ready-to-reach state with the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. and stop there. After that, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in a winning or losing mode.

[Decorative pattern production C at reach time]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the reach-time decorative symbol effect C. FIG. The ready-to-win decorative pattern effect is a ready-to-win effect executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state. , and then the reach pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 92(A) of the ready-to-win decorative pattern effect A, when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L and 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a. , 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 94A, the pattern 8M enters the frame from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, "6") different from the ready-to-win symbols (here, "2") of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 94(B) to (C), the pattern 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a after frame-in. Due to this enlarged display, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the left side of the pattern 8M straddles the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right side of the pattern 8M becomes the right sub-display screen 64R. It will be in a state where it straddles the display screen 7a. Also, the design 8M overlaps the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R by enlarged display. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the pattern 8M is enlarged and displayed to some extent, and then disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a plurality of patterns 8M are framed from above the display screen 7a and moved downward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, "6") different from the ready-to-win symbols (here, "2") of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of patterns 8M include patterns 8M that move not only in the downward direction but also in the lower right direction and the lower left direction. move radially.

As shown in FIG. 94(F), when moving from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the pattern 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. Also, when the pattern 8M is moved from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. The size of the pattern 8M gradually increases during movement (the display is enlarged while moving).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are moved out of the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the ready-to-win pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are switched (changed) to the design of the same number as the design 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 94(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are in the reach state with the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in a winning or losing mode.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative design effect at the time of reach is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the first symbols (for example, "2") on the display screen 7a and are in the ready-to-win state, the second A first effect in which a second pattern different from the first pattern (e.g., a pattern 8M representing "6") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the second pattern appears on the right sub-display screen. A second effect displayed at 64R, and a third effect in which after the second effect, the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach state is changed from the first pattern to the second pattern, can be executed. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the first effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) gradually becomes larger after being displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the first effect, a plurality of second symbols (symbol 8M) are displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, some of the plurality of second symbols (symbol 8M) are displayed overlapping the ready-to-win decorative symbols. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the reach-time decorative design effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The effects of the reach-time decorative pattern effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the ready-to-win decorative design effect C, the effects of FIGS. 92(B) to (G) of the ready-to-win decorative design effect A may be executed instead of the effects of FIGS. 94(A) to (D). Further, in the ready-to-win decorative pattern effect A, the effects shown in FIGS. 93(H) to (J) of the ready-to-win decorative pattern effect B may be executed instead of the effects shown in FIGS. 92(H) to (J).

[Modification 2]
The mode of the pattern 8M may be the same as or different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The aspect here means shape, font, color, size, and the like.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which, in the first display means, a second pattern different from the first pattern is displayed on the first display means when the decorative pattern is the first pattern and is in a ready-to-win state;
a second effect in which the second pattern is displayed on the second display means after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win state is changed from the first pattern to the second pattern is executable.
◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second effect, the second pattern is also displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
A game machine, wherein in the first effect, the second pattern gradually increases in size after being displayed on the first display means.
◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, a plurality of the second symbols are displayed on the first display means.
◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
A gaming machine, wherein some of the plurality of second symbols are displayed overlapping the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state.
◇[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5, further comprising:
A third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second effect, the second pattern is also displayed on the third display means.

Group promotion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. FIG. This group promotion effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command to start the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the group promotion effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Group promotion production A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the group promotion effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the group effect (early stage) is executed. In the group effect (previous term), a button image BGS imitating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by the reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), the group effect (mid-term) is executed. In the group effect (mid-term), the button image BGS moves in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time as well, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), a group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the button image BGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears out of the screen. At this time as well, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the design production, the design may be promoted. Here, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7". These production patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In addition, when the "7" pattern is hit, the transition to the high-probability-high base state is confirmed through the big-hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "8".

[Group promotion performance B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the group effect (early stage) is executed. In the group effect (previous term), a button image BGS imitating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by the reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a group effect (mid-term) is executed. In the group effect (mid-term), the button image BGS moves in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time as well, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the button image BGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears out of the screen. At this time as well, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the design production, the design may be promoted. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are still "4" and have not been promoted. These production patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in the mode of loss. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "4", and the medium performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "3". In the case of winning, for example, all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "4".

[Group promotion production C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the group promotion effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the group effect (early stage) is executed. In the group effect (previous term), a 7-symbol image ZGS imitating the "7" symbol appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The 7-pattern image ZGS forms a group and moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a group effect (mid-term) is executed. In the group effect (mid-term), the 7-pattern image ZGS moves in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, the 7-symbol image ZGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time as well, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the 7-pattern image ZGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the 7-symbol image ZGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears out of the screen. At this time as well, the effect symbols 8L and 8R formed by the reach formation are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the design production, the design may be promoted. Here, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7". These production patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In addition, when the "7" pattern is hit, the transition to the high-probability-high base state is confirmed through the big-hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the group promotion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a group performance (first term), a group performance (middle term), and a group performance (late term) (FIGS. 95(C), (D), (E), FIG. 96(C) ) (D) (E), FIG. 97 (C) (D) (E)). Then, with this as an opportunity, a symbol performance capable of promoting the symbol is executed (FIGS. 95(F), 96(F), and 97(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect a promotion of the symbols triggered by the group effect, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pattern effects are promoted by the ready-to-win formation effects (FIGS. 95(B) and 97(B)) to promote the effect patterns 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach state (FIG. 95(F) , FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect the performance pattern to be promoted after the ready-to-win, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the 7-symbol image ZGS simulating the "7" symbol crosses the display screen 7a from right to left (FIGS. 97(C), 97(D) and 97(E)). , 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, there is a relationship between the group effect and the promotion of the symbols, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (FIGS. 95(F) and 97(F)). Then, when the "7" symbol wins, the transition to the high-probability-high base state is confirmed through the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the expectation for the promotion of the production pattern increases, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the group performance (FIGS. 95 (C) (D) (E), FIGS. 96 (C) (D) (E), FIGS. 97 (C) (D) (E)) , In the pattern production, when the production patterns 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (Fig. 95 (F), Fig. 97 (F)), the production patterns 8L and 8R are promoted as "4" There are cases where it is not (FIG. 96(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the group promotion effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the production patterns 8L and 8R in the ready-to-win mode are promoted by the ready-to-win formation production (FIGS. 95(B), 96(B), and 97(B)). On the other hand, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped in the win mode may be promoted with the group performance as a trigger.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the group effects (Figs. 95 (C) (D) (E), Figs. 96 (C) (D) (E), Figs. 97 (C) (D) (E)), the effects patterns 8L and 8R are It was displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the group effect, the effect patterns 8L and 8R may be temporarily hidden. Also, in the group effect, the button image BGS and the 7 pattern image ZGS may cover the effect patterns 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the production for the first special figure reservation is taken as an example, but it may be the production for the second special figure reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
is a game machine,
It is possible to execute a group movement effect in which the specific images move in a gathered state, and with the group movement effect as a trigger, it is possible to execute a promotion effect in which a pattern is promoted to an advantageous pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The promotion effect is a effect that promotes the effect pattern temporarily stopped in the reach form effect in the reach formation effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
The promotion effect is a effect that promotes the temporarily stopped production pattern in the winning mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
The specific image is an image related to the advantageous symbol after being promoted in the promotion effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The advantageous pattern after being promoted in the promotion effect is a pattern that suggests transition to a specific game state through a special game in which game balls can be acquired,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
There are cases where the promotion performance is executed when the group performance is executed, and there are cases where the promotion performance is not executed even if the group performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

98 to 100, the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C will be described below. This stop decorative pattern appearance effect can be executed during a decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Stop decorative pattern appearance effect A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative symbol appearance effect A. FIG. In the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed in a win mode without displaying the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols. It is a production that First, after the start of the fluctuation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. , 8R are not displayed. That is, even after the special symbol (identification information) variable display (variable display) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 98(B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the win mode "here, '777'" on the display screen 7a. fades in. That is, an effect is executed in which the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become gradually darker and gradually become visible. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. Thus, in the main effect, after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode are displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. .

After the fade-in effects of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are completed and the images are displayed with normal density, as shown in FIG. is executed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. displayed. After that, the special figure fluctuation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

98(F) to (J) show another example of the stop decorative pattern appearance effect A. FIG. 98 (A) ~ (E) after the start of fluctuation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 98(G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a in the win mode "here, '777'". fades in order. Here, the image is gradually darkened in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and an effect is executed in which the images become gradually visible from left to right. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stationary. Thus, in the main effect, after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode are displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. .

After the fade-in effects of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are completed and the images are displayed with normal density, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. displayed across. After that, the special figure fluctuation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

[Stop decorative pattern appearance effect B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining stop decorative symbol appearance effect B. FIG. In the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed in a win mode without displaying the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols. It is a production that First, after the start of the fluctuation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. , 8R are not displayed. That is, even after the special symbol (identification information) variable display (variable display) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the variation, as shown in FIGS. 99(B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode "here, '777'" on the display screen 7a. is displayed, the display range gradually increases, and finally the whole is displayed. Here, a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, so that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. An effect is executed in which the visible area expands. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in the main effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode are displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols. .

After completing the effect of gradually expanding the range of the visible portions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and displaying the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed over the right sub-display. It is displayed across the screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

99(F) to (J) show another example of the stop decorative pattern appearance effect B. FIG. 99 (A) ~ (E) after the start of variation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 99(G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop-displayed in the win mode "here, '777'" on the display screen 7a. Among them, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed, the display range is gradually enlarged, and finally the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed. Here, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually widens in the horizontal direction, thereby making the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R visible. An effect is executed in which the area expands. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In FIG. 99(H), the visible portion of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative pattern 8R are different from each other. That is, in FIG. 99(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which different parts of the decorative patterns are displayed. In this effect, after the start of the variation of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode are displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R.

After completing the effect of gradually expanding the visible range of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and displaying all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. An enlarged display effect is executed in which 8C and 8R protrude from the frame image WG. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

[Stop decorative pattern appearance effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative symbol appearance effect C. FIG. In the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed in a win mode without displaying the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols. It is a production that First, after the start of the fluctuation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. , 8R are not displayed. That is, even after the special symbol (identification information) variable display (variable display) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the variation, as shown in FIGS. 100(B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the winning mode "here, '777'" on the display screen 7a. While fading in, a part of the image is displayed first, and then the display range gradually increases until the entire image is displayed. Here, a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, so that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Along with the effect that the visible area expands, the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become gradually darker, and the effect that the visible area gradually becomes visible is executed in combination. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in the main effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode are displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols. .

After completion of the rendering in which the range of the visible portion gradually expands while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fade in, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in their normal density, the figure 100 is displayed. As shown in (E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

100(F) to (J) show another example of the stop decorative symbol appearance effect C. FIG. 100 (A) ~ (E) after the start of variation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the display screen 7a, right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 100(G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the winning mode "here, '777'" on the display screen 7a. Among them, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed while fading in, the display range is gradually enlarged, and finally the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed. Here, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually widens in the horizontal direction, thereby making the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R visible. Along with the effect that the area expands, the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become gradually darker and gradually become visible. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In FIG. 100(H), the visible portion of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative pattern 8R are different from each other. That is, in FIG. 100(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are in a state in which different parts of the decorative design are displayed. In this effect, after the start of the variation of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode are displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R.

After completing the effect of gradually expanding the visible range of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and displaying the entirety of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. An enlarged display effect is executed in which 8C and 8R protrude from the frame image WG. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the stop decorative pattern appearance effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a win mode without displaying the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation. , 8C, and 8R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop-displayed in the winning mode are faded-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the win mode are partially displayed, and then the whole is displayed. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99(H) and 100(H), in the first effect, when a part of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the win mode is displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed. The portion displayed in one of the plurality of symbols included in the pattern and the portion displayed in the other one pattern are different from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first effect, after the start of variation, until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode are displayed, , decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the win mode are enlarged and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed across the sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the stop decorative pattern appearance effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed after the special pattern starts to fluctuate (after the special drawing lottery starts). assumed not to be displayed. However, in the stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C, after the start of the fluctuation of the special drawing (after the start of the special drawing lottery), until the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed, the mode other than the variable display Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed. For example, only the stop-displayed decorative pattern 8L may be displayed until the stop-displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed after the special-figure fluctuation is started (after the special-figure lottery is started).

[Modification 2]
In the stop decorative pattern appearance performances A to C, it is assumed that there is a certain period of time between the start of the special pattern fluctuation (after the start of the special drawing lottery) and the display of the stop-displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. . However, in the stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols may be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A gaming machine capable of executing a first effect in which the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a win mode are displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative symbols after the start of variation.
◇[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a win mode are displayed in a fade-in.
◇[Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the winning mode are partially displayed and then displayed in their entirety.
◇ [Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
In the first effect, when a portion of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in a win mode is displayed, the portion displayed in one of the plurality of patterns included in the decorative pattern and the other portion are displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that parts displayed in one pattern are different from each other.
◇ [Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the decorative symbols are not displayed until the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a win mode are displayed after the start of variation.
◇ [Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5, further comprising:
Equipped with sub-display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the win mode are enlarged and displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The pattern color change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. FIG. This symbol color change effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pattern color change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7 a of the device 7 .

[Design color change effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production for notifying the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, a message image MSG reading "Final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect of changing the display color of the effect symbol in the ready-to-win mode. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display colors of the production patterns 8L and 8R are changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Also here, the effect symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The hit/lose notification effect is an effect for notifying the win/lose result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4" and the display color is "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4". In this case, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red". As a result, the transition to the high-probability-high base state is confirmed through the jackpot game.

[Design color change effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production for notifying the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, a message image MSG reading "Final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect of changing the display color of the effect symbol in the ready-to-win mode. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display colors of the production patterns 8L and 8R are changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Also here, the effect symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has been defeated. At this time, an enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG reading "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The hit/lose notification effect is an effect for notifying the win/lose result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle production pattern 8C is "5". Further, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in "red" color, and the middle production pattern 8C is displayed in "blue" color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in the mode of loss. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "4", and the medium performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "5". At this time, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R return from "red" to "blue" immediately before the final stop.

[Design color change effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production for notifying the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, a message image MSG reading "Final battle start" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Also here, the performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed. Also here, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the display color of the effect pattern following the win/loss notification effect. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display colors of the production patterns 8L and 8R are changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The hit/lose notification effect is an effect for notifying the win/lose result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4" and the display color is "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4". In this case, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red". As a result, the transition to the high-probability-high base state is confirmed through the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pattern color change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the performance symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state are changed (Fig. 101(C)(D), Fig. 102(C)(D ), FIGS. 103(E)(F)). According to this configuration, expectations for winning can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode are changed with the reach development effect as a trigger (FIGS. 101(C)(D), 102(C)(D) )). According to this configuration, since the display color of the production pattern is changed along with the development of super ready-to-win, it is possible to further increase expectations for winning and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display colors of the number images forming the effect symbols are changed (Figs. 101(C) and (D), Figs. 102(C)(D), Figs. 103(E) and (F)). . According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the change of the display color of the production pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the color change effect (Fig. 101 (D), Fig. 102 (D), Fig. 103 (F)), when it becomes a hit, it goes to a high accuracy high base state through a jackpot game. is determined (FIGS. 101(H) and 103(H)). According to this configuration, the change of the display color of the effect pattern is expected more, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display colors of the production symbols 8L and 8R are changed to "red" in the final stop production after the winning/losing notification production (FIG. 102(G)). is returned to "blue" (FIG. 102(H)). According to this configuration, the determination and stop display of the effect symbols becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display colors of the production symbols 8L and 8R, which have been changed to the "red" display color in the fixed stop production, are returned to "blue" immediately before the fixed stop (Fig. 102 (H )). According to this configuration, the determination and stop display of the effect symbols becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the pattern color change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display color of the production pattern is changed (Fig. 101 ( D), FIG. 102(D), FIG. 103(F)). However, the change timing of the display color of the production pattern is not limited to this. For example, the display color of the production pattern may be changed with the reach formation production as a trigger.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the display color of the number image is changed. However, if the effect pattern has components other than the number image, the display color of the portion other than the number image may be changed. Also, the display colors of both the numeric image and the portion other than the numeric image may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the production for the first special figure reservation is taken as an example, but it may be the production for the second special figure reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine,
After executing the ready-to-win formation effect in which the production pattern is temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode, a display color change effect to change the display color of the production pattern temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode can be executed with a predetermined effect as a trigger.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The predetermined effect is a development effect from a normal reach effect to a super reach effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2,
The display color of the production pattern is the display color of the number image that constitutes the production pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
After the display color change effect is executed, when the winning notification effect indicating that the winning result is a win is executed, a transition to a specific game state is confirmed through a special game in which game balls can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
When a failure notification effect indicating that the winning result is lost is executed after the display color change effect is executed, a color return effect for returning the display color of the effect pattern to the original display color is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
The color return effect is executed prior to the fixed stop effect of the effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Color change ready-to-win effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. FIG. This color change ready-to-win effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the color change reach effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7 a of the device 7 .

[Color change reach effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the color change ready-to-win effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, the state that the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. Moreover, the change of the right production pattern 8R slows down, and the movement as indicated by the arrow Y is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right pattern reversal performance is a performance in which the right performance pattern 8R moving toward the lower part of the display screen 7a reverses its moving direction and moves toward the upper part of the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y.例文帳に追加
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect in which the right effect pattern 8R moving toward the upper part of the display screen 7a changes the display color of the number image. For example, normally, the right production pattern 8R of "blue" becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the symbol "4" whose display color has been changed is moved (for example, moved in a vibrating manner) so as to arouse whether or not it will become a ready-to-win game, temporarily stopped, and the display color is changed. For example, the display color of the symbol "4" changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a middle symbol fan effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is a effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The hit/lose notification effect is an effect for notifying the win/lose result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the middle effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as compared with the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Color change reach effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the color change ready-to-win effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, the state that the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. Moreover, the change of the right production pattern 8R slows down, and the movement as indicated by the arrow Y is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right pattern reversal performance is a performance in which the right performance pattern 8R moving toward the lower part of the display screen 7a reverses its moving direction and moves toward the upper part of the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y.例文帳に追加
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect in which the right effect pattern 8R moving toward the upper part of the display screen 7a changes the display color of the number image. For example, normally, the right production pattern 8R of "4" of "blue" becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the symbol "4" whose display color has been changed is moved (for example, moved in a vibrating manner) so as to arouse whether or not it will become a ready-to-win game, temporarily stopped, and the display color is changed. For example, the display color of the symbol "4" changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a middle symbol fan effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is a effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in normal reach. At this time, the display color of the "4" pattern is changed. For example, normally, the "4" pattern of "blue" becomes "red".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The hit/lose notification effect is an effect for notifying the win/lose result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the middle effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as compared with the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4". At this time, the display color of the medium effect pattern 8C is the original display color. For example, the display color of the symbol "4" changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Color change reach effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the color change ready-to-win effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, the state that the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. Moreover, the change of the right production pattern 8R slows down, and the movement as indicated by the arrow Y is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right pattern reversal performance is a performance in which the right performance pattern 8R moving toward the lower part of the display screen 7a reverses its moving direction and moves toward the upper part of the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y.例文帳に追加At this time, the left production pattern 8L is enlarged. The enlargement timing may be before, during or after the reversal of the right effect pattern 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect in which the right effect pattern 8R moving toward the upper part of the display screen 7a changes the display color of the number image. For example, normally, the "4" pattern of "blue" becomes "red". At this time, the right performance symbol 8R is enlarged in the same manner as the left performance symbol 8L. The size of the right performance symbol 8R after enlargement may be larger, smaller, or the same as that of the left performance symbol 8L after enlargement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the display color is changed, and the enlarged "4" pattern moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) so as to incite whether or not it becomes a ready-to-win, temporarily stops, and changes the display color. . For example, the display color of the symbol "4" changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), a middle symbol fan effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is a effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The hit/lose notification effect is an effect for notifying the win/lose result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the middle effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a as compared with the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the color change reach effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when stopping the right performance symbol 8R, the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after changing the display color of the right performance symbol 8R (Fig. 104 (D) (E), Fig. 105 ( D)(E), FIG. 106(D)(E)). In addition, when stopping the middle effect pattern 8C, the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped after changing the display color of the middle effect pattern 8C (FIGS. 105(F) and (G)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the production pattern stands out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display color of the performance symbols is changed, and when the performance symbols are temporarily stopped, the original display color is restored (FIGS. 104(E), 105(E), (G), and 106). (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the production pattern is further conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right performance symbol 8R is moved in the direction opposite to the variation direction, the display color of the right performance symbol 8R is changed, and it is moved in the same direction as the variation direction and temporarily stopped (Fig. 104) (C)(D)(E), FIGS. 105(C)(D)(E), FIGS. 106(C)(D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the performance symbols move in the direction opposite to the changing direction, the temporary stop of the performance symbols is further conspicuous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the ready-to-win formation effect, the "4" symbol whose display color is changed moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) so as to incite whether or not it will become a ready-to-win, and is temporarily stopped. 104(D)(E), 105(D)(E), 106(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the reach formation effect stands out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game is temporarily stopped after the right effect symbol 8R is enlarged (FIGS. 106(D) and (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the production pattern is further conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the ready-to-win formation effect, the enlarged right effect symbol 8R of "4" moves (for example, moves so as to vibrate) so as to incite whether or not it will become a ready-to-win, and is temporarily stopped. (Fig. 106(E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the production pattern is further conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the color change ready-to-win production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the reach formation effect is performed following the color change effect (Figs. 104(D)(E), Figs. 105(D)(E), Figs. 106(D)(E)), but not necessarily the reach formation effect. is not necessarily performed. For example, when the ready-to-win formation is not performed, it is conceivable that the right performance symbol 8R stops at other than "4", and then the medium performance symbol 8C stops, resulting in a mismatch.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, the display color of the right effect pattern 8R and the middle effect pattern 8C is changed, but the display color of the left effect pattern 8L may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the production for the first special figure reservation is taken as an example, but it may be the production for the second special figure reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine,
In stopping the fluctuating production design, after changing the display color of the production design, it is possible to execute a color change stop production to temporarily stop the production design,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
In the color change stop effect, the display color of the effect pattern is temporarily changed, and when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, the display color of the effect pattern is returned to the original display color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-2,
In the color change stop effect, the production pattern is moved in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction, and the display color of the production pattern is temporarily changed, moved in the same direction as the fluctuation direction, and temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
The color change stop effect constitutes a part of the ready-to-win effect that temporarily stops the effect pattern in a predetermined manner,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
In stopping the fluctuating production design, after changing the size of the production design, it is possible to execute a size change stop production to temporarily stop the production design.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
The size change stop effect constitutes a part of the ready-to-win effect that temporarily stops the effect pattern in a predetermined manner,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character attack effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. This character attack effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character attack effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character attack production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B) or FIG. 107(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two modes of the temporary stop effect. 107(B), the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 107(D), the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 107(B), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special pattern is temporarily displayed instead of the middle effect pattern 8C. It shows that it has stopped. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG imitating an enemy character. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→special design.

As shown in FIG. 107(B), when the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, as shown in FIG. 107(C), attack effect (before reach) is executed. That is, the attack effect (before reach) is a effect that is executed when the special symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character pattern CRBG. Also, a message image MSG of "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop performance B shown in FIG. 107(D), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed how it was done. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→middle performance design 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 107(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 107(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. 107(A) is executed. So, it becomes a pseudo-continuous performance. In this embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is executed in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (Fig. 107(B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (Fig. 107(C)).

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 107(E), the ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is a effect of further attacking the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are displayed in order, and the enemy character CRB is damaged by overlapping the attack images AG with the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the middle left and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

[Character attack production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B) or FIG. 108(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two modes of the temporary stop effect. 108(B), the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 108(D), the medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 108(B), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special pattern is temporarily used instead of the middle effect pattern 8C. It shows that it has stopped. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG imitating an enemy character. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→special design.

As shown in FIG. 108(B), when the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C, as shown in FIG. 108(C), the attack effect (before reach) is executed. That is, the attack effect (before reach) is a effect that is executed when the special symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character pattern CRBG. Also, a message image MSG of "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop performance B shown in FIG. 108(D), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed how it was done. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→middle performance design 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 108(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. 108(A) is executed. So, it becomes a pseudo-continuous performance. In this embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is executed in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (FIG. 108(B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (FIG. 108(C)).

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 108(E), the ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is a effect of further attacking the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG reading "Continuous hits" is displayed above the button image BG. Each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are displayed in order, and the enemy character CRB is damaged by overlapping the attack images AG with the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the middle left and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

[Character attack production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B) or FIG. 109(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two modes of the temporary stop effect. 109(B), the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 109(D), the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 109(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special symbol is temporarily replaced by the middle effect symbol 8C. It shows that it has stopped. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG imitating an enemy character. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→special design.

As shown in FIG. 109(B), when the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C, as shown in FIG. 109(C), the attack effect (before reach) is executed. That is, the attack effect (before reach) is a effect that is executed when the special symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), a message image MSG1 of "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG2 reading "press" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, when the player presses the effect button 63, the attack line AL indicating the attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character pattern CRBG.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109(D), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed how it was done. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance design 8L→right performance design 8R→middle performance design 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 109(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. 109(A) is executed. So, it becomes a pseudo-continuous performance. In this embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is executed in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (Fig. 109(B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (Fig. 109(C)).

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 109(E), the reach forming effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is a effect of further attacking the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image of "Continuous hits" is displayed above the button image BG. Each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are displayed in order, and the enemy character CRB is damaged by overlapping the attack images AG with the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification effect is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has been defeated. At this time, an enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG reading "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in the mode of loss. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the medium performance symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character attack presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a series of effects can be executed before and after the reach formation effects (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)). 107(C)(F), FIG. 108(C)(F), FIG. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, since a unified performance can be performed in one variation, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the same enemy character CRB appears before and after the reach forming effects (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)). (Figs. 107(C)(F), Figs. 108(C)(F), Figs. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a more unified effect in one variation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the same enemy character CRB is attacked before and after the reach forming effect (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)). (Figs. 107(C)(F), Figs. 108(C)(F), Figs. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a more unified effect in one variation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, before the reach formation effects (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)), the pseudo continuous effects (FIGS. 107(A), (B), (C) (D), FIGS. 108(A)(B)(C)(D), FIGS. 108(A)(B)(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the attraction of the game can be improved by the effect including the pseudo-continuation.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect in which the enemy character pattern CRBG imitating the enemy character is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect pattern 8C (FIGS. 107(B), 108(B), and 109). (B)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the pseudo-continuous effect will be interesting, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the attack effect (before reach) is the effect using the effect button 63 (Fig. 109(C)). Also, the attack effect (after reach) is a effect using the effect button 63 (FIGS. 108(F) and 109(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
Modifications of the operation stock effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, in the attack effect (after reach), the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and the message image MSG of "Consecutive Hits" is displayed to prompt the player to perform repeated hits. On the other hand, a message image "press and hold" may be displayed to prompt the player to press and hold.

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, when attacking the enemy character CRB (attack effect (before reach), attack effect (after reach)), a display indicating the physical strength of the enemy character CRB may be performed. For example, a horizontally long bar may be used to display physical fitness.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 is taken as an example, but the operation is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 as long as it is an operation unit that can be operated by the player.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the production for the first special figure reservation is taken as an example, but it may be the production for the second special figure reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine,
In a variable period including a first period from the start of fluctuation of the production pattern to formation of ready-to-win where the production pattern stops in a predetermined manner, and a second period from formation of ready-to-win to notification of winning, the first period and A series of productions spanning the second period can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
The series of productions are productions in which a specific character appears,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or aspect C6-2,
The series of productions is an attack production for attacking a specific character,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
The series of effects includes a pseudo-continuous effect in which the production pattern repeats temporary stop and re-fluctuation during the first period,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-4,
In the pseudo continuous effect, a character pattern stop effect can be executed in which a pattern simulating a specific character temporarily stops when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5,
The series of effects includes an operation unit effect using an operation unit that can be operated by the player in at least one of the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

110 to 112, the decorative pattern color change effects A to C will be described below. 110 to 112, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. is therefore omitted.

In this decorative design color change effect, the occurrence thereof is first predicted by a look-ahead effect, and furthermore, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a command to start a variation effect, a pre-determining command), and includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern color change effect, The corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

The background image (referred to as a "specific background image") used in the decorative pattern color change effect is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image. , the image inside the spacecraft, etc. are specific images. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an undersea image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, the decorative symbol color change effect A will be explained first, and the decorative symbol color change effect B and the decorative symbol color change effect C will be explained in order.

[Decorative pattern color change effect A]
The decorative pattern color change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect A. FIG. In the decorative design color change effect A, the occurrence thereof is first predicted by a look-ahead effect, and furthermore, the color of the decorative design can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a city image THG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") are displayed in a variable effect (variable display). be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Incidentally, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative pattern color change effect A is being performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special-design reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is indicated by a blue number (bright blue, dark blue, or blue between bright blue and dark blue). On the left side, the number of second special reservation pending based on the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is indicated by a red number (bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red). Good.) are always displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black sphere icon, smiling sphere icon, red sphere icon, blue sphere icon, white sphere icon, yellow (gold) star icon icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, becomes a dark blue display mode when the light is off, and a bright blue display mode when the light is on, and changes from light off to light on. It changes to bright blue in stages, and changes to dark blue in stages from lighting to turning off.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that always blinks, and when it is turned off, it has a dark red display mode, and when it is lit, it has a bright red display mode. It changes to bright red in stages, and changes to dark red in stages from lighting to turning off.

In FIG. 110A, a blue spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad. This suggests an advance notice that a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative symbol color change effect A is started by a look-ahead effect. When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stopped at the number "5" having bright green, and the middle decorative design 8C having bright blue is stopped at the number "6". The right decorative pattern 8R displayed and having a bright red color is stopped and displayed with the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the blue spherical pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C as a decoration pattern. When the color change effect A is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. The first specific background image is switched to the dark space entry image THG2, and the character CRB blinks a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks largely (for example, once or twice), then blinks briefly, and finally blinks again (for example, 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative symbol color change effect A.

When the character CRB is flashed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped with a dark blue number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with a dark blue number "4".

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color. , do not appear with a bright green color. Also, as described above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative symbol color change effect A is started, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative symbol color changes. In rendition A, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative design color change effect A is started, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same dark blue color. Bright blue and dark blue are bluish colors that are similar to each other.

When the decorative design color change effect A is started, the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R normally displayed in the background image. , becomes larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4", which has been temporarily stopped, becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. 110(E), an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from behind as a right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped and displayed as an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 110(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a bright blue color. , do not appear with a bright blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" which has been displayed temporarily becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. Along with this, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern. , is paused at an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and accordingly, it is bright from behind. A red opaque number "7" appears as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped as a bright red number "7" and is displayed as a right decorative pattern. 8R is suspended at number "6" which has a dark blue color. As described above, the number "7" has a bright red color, and when the decorative symbol color change effect A is started, it does not change from bright red to dark blue, that is, the decorative symbol color change effect A is started. Even if it is done, only it will appear without color change.

After that, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. When an opaque number "7" having a red color appears as the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 8C becomes a display mode in which 8C is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" starts to be reduced, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. Again, the dark space escape image THG3, which is the specific background image, is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. , an opaque number "8" having a bright blue color appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R and temporarily stops, after which the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" changes to the original size (usually the background image ), and an opaque number "3" having bright green color appears on the display screen 7a as the middle decorative pattern 8C and is temporarily stopped. As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect A is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(L), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a bright red number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed as a bright green number "3", and the right decoration. When the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed as a number "6" having a bright blue color, it is lost, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect B. FIG. In the decorative design color change effect B, the occurrence thereof is first predicted by a look-ahead effect, and furthermore, the color of the decorative design can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a city image THG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") are displayed in a variable effect (variable display). be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Incidentally, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect B is performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special-design reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is indicated by a blue number (bright blue, dark blue, or blue between bright blue and dark blue). On the left side, the number of second special reservation pending based on the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is indicated by a red number (bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red). Good.) are always displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black sphere icon, smiling sphere icon, red sphere icon, blue sphere icon, white sphere icon, yellow (gold) star icon icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, becomes a dark blue display mode when the light is off, and a bright blue display mode when the light is on, and changes from light off to light on. It changes to bright blue in stages, and changes to dark blue in stages from lighting to turning off.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that always blinks, and when it is turned off, it has a dark red display mode, and when it is lit, it has a bright red display mode. It changes to bright red in stages, and changes to dark red in stages from lighting to turning off.

In FIG. 111(A), a blue spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad. This suggests an advance notice that a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative symbol color change effect B is started by a look-ahead effect. When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stopped at the number "5" having bright green, and the middle decorative design 8C having bright blue is stopped at the number "6". The right decorative pattern 8R displayed and having a bright red color is stopped and displayed with the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(B), the blue spherical pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C as a decoration pattern. When the color change effect B is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. The first specific background image is switched to the dark space entry image THG2, and the character CRB blinks a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks largely (for example, once or twice), then blinks briefly, and finally blinks again (for example, 2 to 3 times). This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change effect B.

When the character CRB blinks a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped with a dark blue number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with a dark blue number "4".

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative symbol color change effect B is started, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative symbol color change effect B is changed. , do not appear with a bright green color. As described above, the number "4" has a bright blue color. In rendition B, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative design color change effect B is started, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same dark blue color. Bright blue and dark blue are bluish colors that are similar to each other.

When the decorative design color change effect B is started, the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R normally displayed in the background image. , becomes larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form a dark space represented by a dark space image THG3. As a result, the opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the right decorative pattern 8R and becomes a display mode in which it is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 111 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped and displayed as an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" that has been displayed temporarily becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward to form the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a bright blue color. , do not appear with a bright blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5", which has been temporarily stopped, becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. 111 (I) and (J), as shown in FIGS. , becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. , and the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" starts to shrink, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. Again, the dark space escape image THG3, which is the specific background image, is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. , the bright red opaque number "7" appears as the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, and then the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" having dark blue is changed to the original size. While returning to (the size of the left decorative pattern 8L normally displayed in the background image), it returns from dark blue to bright blue, and an opaque number "3" having bright green appears on the display screen 7a as the middle decorative pattern 8C. Temporarily stop. As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect B is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(M), the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a bright blue number "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed as a bright green number "3", and the right decoration. When the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed as a bright red number "7", it is lost, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect C]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect C. FIG. In the decorative design color change effect C, the occurrence thereof is first predicted by a look-ahead effect, and furthermore, the color of the decorative design can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a city image THG1 is normally displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") are displayed in a variable effect (variable display). be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Incidentally, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative pattern color change effect C is performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special-design reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is indicated by a blue number (bright blue, dark blue, or blue between bright blue and dark blue). On the left side, the number of second special reservation pending based on the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is indicated by a red number (bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red). Good.) are always displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black sphere icon, smiling sphere icon, red sphere icon, blue sphere icon, white sphere icon, yellow (gold) star icon icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, becomes a dark blue display mode when the light is off, and a bright blue display mode when the light is on, and changes from light off to light on. It changes to bright blue in stages, and changes to dark blue in stages from lighting to turning off.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that always blinks, and when it is turned off, it has a dark red display mode, and when it is lit, it has a bright red display mode. It changes to bright red in stages, and changes to dark red in stages from lighting to turning off.

In FIG. 112A, a blue spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad. This suggests an advance notice that a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative symbol color change effect C is started by a look-ahead effect. When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stopped at the number "5" having bright green, and the middle decorative design 8C having bright blue is stopped at the number "6". The right decorative pattern 8R displayed and having a bright red color is stopped and displayed with the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 112(B), the blue spherical pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C as a decoration pattern. When the color change effect C is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. The first specific background image is switched to the dark space entry image THG2, and the character CRB blinks a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks largely (for example, once or twice), then blinks briefly, and finally blinks again (for example, 2 to 3 times). This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change effect C.

When the character CRB blinks a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped with a dark blue number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with a dark blue number "4".

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative symbol color change effect C is started, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative symbol color change effect C is changed. , do not appear with a bright green color. As described above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative symbol color change effect C is started, the number "4" is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative symbol color changes. In Rendition C, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative design color change effect C is started, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same dark blue color. Bright blue and dark blue are bluish colors that are similar to each other.

When the decorative design color change effect C is started, the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R normally displayed in the background image. , becomes larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form a dark space represented by a dark space image THG3. As a result, the opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 112(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped and displayed as an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" which has been displayed temporarily becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a bright blue color. , do not appear with a bright blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" which has been displayed temporarily becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to form the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. 112(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R approach each other as shown in FIG. 112(I). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" having dark blue color return to the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" having light blue color, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8L are returned. The patterns 8R are separated from each other and return to their original positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 112(J), a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a and moves in an arc toward the blue spherical variation icon 9C existing below, and the variation icon 9C is displayed. It becomes a display mode that collides with the icon 9C.

Due to this collision, as shown in FIG. 112(K), the blue spherical variation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(L), the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the normal The background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (for example, an underground image). As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect C ends.

After that, when the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R is started again. At this time, the colors of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R return to their original colors, and all the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" The even numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' all revert to the same bright blue. Note that the number "7" always remains bright red regardless of the presence or absence of the decorative pattern color change effect C.

After that, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is achieved and then a big win game (big win performance) is started, whereas the left decoration. If the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is lost. When a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern color change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. Equipped with an image display device 7 (display means), and even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) having bright blue (first color) and bright blue (first color) Variation effect (variation display) by one or more of odd numbers '1', '3', '5' and '9' (second pattern) excluding odd number '7' with different bright green (second color) Among them, the first pattern and the second pattern can be changed to dark blue (third color) similar to bright blue (first color). ), FIG. 111 (C) to (K) in the decorative pattern color change effect B, and FIG. 112 (C) to (H) in the decorative pattern color change effect C). According to this configuration, in the specific effect, the first pattern and the second pattern can be changed to dark blue (third color) similar to bright blue (first color). By changing the color, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. , the same color as the color attached to the blue spherical variation icon 9C. The blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, becomes a dark blue display mode when the light is off, and a bright blue display mode when the light is on, and gradually changes from the light off state to the lighted state. It changes to bright blue at first, and gradually changes to dark blue from lighting to turning off. In other words, since the blue spherical variation icon 9C is in a blinking display mode, when blinking, even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) bright blue ( 1st color) may be the same color. According to this configuration, the blue spherical variation icon 9C blinks, and the blue spherical variation icon 9C for colors of even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) A display mode in which colors are partially interlocked can be used.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. As a predetermined combination with the second design, the left decorative design 8L is an odd number "5" (second design), and the right decorative design is an even number "4" (first design). ing. According to this configuration, since the predetermined combination of the first pattern and the second pattern is used as the start of the specific effect, the start time of the specific effect can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. (first symbol) can be changed again from dark blue (third color) to bright blue (first color). According to this configuration, when the ready-to-win is formed by the first pattern in the specific performance, the formation of the ready-to-win can be made more conspicuous by the color change, and the player's expectation of winning is increased by the color change. It can contribute to making you feel.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) changed to (third color) are changed again to bright blue (first color) and dark blue (third color) Odd numbers '1', '3', '5' and '9' (second pattern) can be changed again to bright green (second color) except odd number '7' which has been changed to there is According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to performing the flow from the end of the specific effect to another effect without a sense of incongruity due to the end of the specific effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. , “5” and “9” (second symbols) further include bright red (fourth color) different from bright blue (first color), bright green (second color) and dark blue (third color), respectively. ), and in the specific effect, the odd number "7" (second symbol) with bright red (fourth color) is not changed to dark blue (third color). According to this configuration, the odd number "7" (second pattern), which does not cause color change in the specific effect, can be used as the only pattern, and the presence of the odd number "7" (second pattern) can be made more conspicuous. This can contribute to making the player feel that the degree of expectation for winning will increase when an odd number "7" (second symbol) appears in the specific performance.

[Modification]
A modification of the decorative pattern color change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. However, only odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) are provided with character images, and specific effects (decorative pattern color change effect A in FIGS. 110 (C) to (H), 111 (C) to (K) in the decorative pattern color change effect B, and in FIGS. 112 (C) to (H) in the decorative pattern color change effect C), odd numbers "1", "3", "5"9" (second symbol) may be deleted. In this way, since it is not the character image that changes color in the specific effect, but the odd and even number portions, the occurrence of color change in the number portion is emphasized in a way that the player can easily understand by deleting the character image. can do. When a character image is provided for the odd number "7" (second symbol), the character image provided for the odd number "7" (second symbol) is not deleted in the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to make the character image the only symbol in the specific effect, to make the presence of the odd number "7" (second symbol) more conspicuous, and to make the odd number "7" (second symbol ) appears, it can contribute to giving the player a feeling that the degree of expectation for winning will increase.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. The suspension icon 9A is displayed at the suspension display position 9Ad, suggesting an advance notice of starting the decoration design color change effect. However, when the game ball enters the first start port 20 and the red spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the suspension display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect, it may be possible to suggest a notice to start the decorative symbol color change effect. . In this case, except for the odd number "7", the odd number "1','3','5' and '9' and even numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' may be forcibly changed to dark blue, Since the red spherical pending icon 9A has a higher probability of winning than the blue spherical pending icon 9A, the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" and even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" may be forced to change to bright red.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. 2', '4', '6' and '8' (first symbol) changed again to light blue (first color) and odd numbers except '7' changed to dark blue (third color) "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) were again changed to bright green (second color). However, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) changed to dark blue (third color) are not changed to bright blue (first color) and remain dark blue. The odd numbers '1', '3', '5' and '9' (second symbol) may be kept bright green, except for the odd number '7' which is changed to dark blue (third color). The dark blue color may be maintained as it is without changing to the (second color). By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of effects after the end of the specific effects, and to provide the player with various effects depending on the colors of the symbols.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. (first symbol) from light blue to dark blue, and odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) except odd number "7" from light green to dark blue. It was forced to change to dark blue. However, in a specific production, the even numbers ``2'', ``4'', ``6'' and ``8'' (first symbol) are forcibly changed from bright blue to dark green, and the odd numbers ``1'' excluding the odd numbers ``7'' , "3", "5" and "9" (second symbols) may be forced to change from light green to dark green. It should be noted that bright green and dark green are greenish colors and similar to each other.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. " right decorative pattern 8R) becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. , the number "5" appears as the right decorative pattern 8R) and is temporarily stopped. However, when the temporarily stopped number pattern (for example, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, the number pattern (for example, the number "4") The size of the right decorative pattern 8R) may be gradually increased. In this way, the temporarily stopped number symbols become translucent and can move rapidly forward while increasing in size, so that the temporarily stopped number symbols approach the player side. It is possible to realize the expression of "coming" and to provide the player with a dynamic performance by high-speed movement of the number patterns.

[Modification 7]
In the specific effects in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. It is one size larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in . However, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the specific effect may be the same size as the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R normally displayed in the background image. The size of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the presentation may be slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R normally displayed in the background image.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. It was displayed on the display screen 7a in the state of holding. However, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed on the display screen 7a in the same bright blue color. This bright blue is the same color as the bright blue that the even numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' normally have in the background image.

[Modification 9]
In the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. may have been added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Among variable display by one or more of a first pattern having a first color and a second pattern having a second color different from the first color, the first pattern and the second pattern are the first color. It is possible to execute a specific effect that can be changed to a similar third color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C7-1,
The first color may be the same color as the color attached to the variation icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C7-1 or aspect C7-2,
The specific effect starts from a predetermined combination of the first pattern and the second pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-3,
In the specific effect, when forming reach with the first pattern, the first pattern may be changed from the third color to the first color again,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-4,
Only the second pattern is provided with a character image,
In the specific effect, the character image provided in the second pattern is deleted;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-5,
When the specific effect is completed, the first pattern that has been changed to the third color is changed to the first color again, and the second pattern that has been changed to the third color is changed to the second color again. there is
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-6,
The second pattern further includes those having a fourth color different from the first color, the second color and the third color,
In the specific effect, the second pattern having the fourth color is not changed to the third color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

113 to 115, the special symbol effects A to C will be described below. This special symbol effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the special symbol effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is displayed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Special pattern production A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect A. FIG. The special symbol performance A is executed in a low-probability-low base state in which the game progresses with left-handed hitting. Also, the special symbol effect A is executed using special effect symbols. Therefore, first, the special production pattern will be explained.

The special effect symbols are composed of numerical images of "0 to 9", and the numerical images of "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" indicating odd numbers are "0, 2, 4, 6," indicating even numbers. The size is smaller than the figure image of "8". Then, when the number image indicating the odd number becomes a predetermined mode (double eyes) and a big win is notified, after the big win game is executed, the transition to the high-probability-high base game state is confirmed.

First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. The left effect symbol 8L fluctuates from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the state that the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. At this time, the pattern "3" is displayed below the pattern "4", and the pattern "5" is displayed above the pattern "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become non-display or translucent display almost simultaneously with the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" forming the left effect symbol 8L, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moved near the center, the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3", and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" forming the right effect symbol 8R, the number images representing odd numbers are smaller than the number images representing even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, following the left performance symbol 8L, the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the pattern "3" is displayed below the pattern "4", and the pattern "5" is displayed above the pattern "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become non-display or translucent display almost simultaneously with the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the pattern "2" is moved near the central portion, the pattern "1" is displayed below the pattern "2", and the pattern "3" is displayed above the pattern "2". Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" forming the intermediate effect symbol 8C, the number images representing odd numbers are smaller than the number images representing even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), a middle symbol fan effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring performance is a performance of moving (for example, moving to vibrate) so as to stir whether the middle performance symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops at "4" in normal reach. Here, the symbol "4" is moved near the center, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins this battle effect, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Special pattern production B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect B. FIG. The special symbol effect B is another example of the special symbol effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 114(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. The left effect symbol 8L fluctuates from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the state that the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. At this time, the pattern "3" is displayed below the pattern "4", and the pattern "5" is displayed above the pattern "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become non-display or semi-transparent almost at the same time as the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" forming the left effect symbol 8L, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moved near the center, the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3", and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" forming the right effect symbol 8R, the number images representing odd numbers are smaller than the number images representing even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, following the left performance symbol 8L, the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the pattern "3" is displayed below the pattern "4", and the pattern "5" is displayed above the pattern "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become non-display or translucent display almost simultaneously with the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the pattern "2" is moved near the central portion, the pattern "1" is displayed below the pattern "2", and the pattern "3" is displayed above the pattern "2". Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" forming the intermediate effect symbol 8C, the number images representing odd numbers are smaller than the number images representing even numbers. Further, the number images "0 to 9" forming the medium effect pattern 8C are smaller than the number images "0 to 9" forming the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), a middle symbol fan effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring performance is a performance of moving (for example, moving to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not the middle performance symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops at "4" in normal reach. Here, the pattern "4" is moved near the central portion, the pattern "3" is displayed below the pattern "4", and the pattern "5" is displayed above the pattern "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins this battle effect, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Special pattern production C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect C. FIG. The special symbol performance C is executed in a high probability high base state in which the game progresses by hitting to the right. Also, the special symbol effect C is executed using normal effect symbols. Therefore, first, the normal production pattern will be explained.

The normal effect pattern is composed of numerical images of "0 to 9", and all the numerical images have the same size. Then, when the number image indicating the odd number becomes a predetermined mode (double eyes) and a big win is reported, the transition (continuation) to the high-probability-high base game state is confirmed after the big win game is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in the mode of loss. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is "1", and the right effect symbol 8R is "5". At this time, the variation image 9C disappears and three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and two hold images 9B and the variation image 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in the mode of loss. In this case, the left effect symbol 8L is "0", the middle effect symbol 8C is "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6". At this time, the variation image 9C disappears and two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and one hold image 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, one pending image 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins this battle effect, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of special design production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at each of the number image of the left effect symbol 8L, the number image of the right effect symbol 8R, and the number image of the middle effect symbol 8C, the specific number image is the remaining number image. (FIGS. 113(B)(C)(D)(E)(F), FIGS. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, variations in the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when looking at each of the number image of the left effect symbol 8L, the number image of the right effect symbol 8R, and the number image of the middle effect symbol 8C, the number image indicating an odd number indicates an even number. It is smaller than the numeric image (FIGS. 113(B)(C)(D)(E)(F), FIGS. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, variations in the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the number image that confirms the transition to the high-probability-high base state when the jackpot is won is smaller than the remaining number images (Fig. 113 (B) (C) ( D) (E) (F), FIG. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, variations in the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number images "0 to 9" forming the medium effect pattern 8C are smaller than the number images "0 to 9" forming the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. (Fig. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the variations of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R bring about further changes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are cases where variable display is performed with special effect symbols (FIGS. 113 and 114) and variable display is performed with normal effect symbols (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, the variations of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R bring about further changes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable display is performed with special effect symbols in the low-probability-low base state (FIGS. 113 and 114), and the variable display is performed with normal effect symbols in the high-probability-high base state (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, variations of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of special design production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the special effect symbols, the size of the number image indicating odd numbers is smaller than the size of the number image indicating even numbers. On the other hand, the size of the numerical images representing odd numbers may be larger than the size of the numerical images representing even numbers.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the special effect symbols, the number image that confirms the transition to the high-probability-high base state in the event of a big win is smaller than the remaining number images. On the other hand, the number image that confirms the transition to the high-probability-high base state in the event of a big win may be larger than the rest of the number images.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the special symbol effect C (FIG. 115) is executed in the high accuracy/high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the special symbol production C is executed in one of the low probability low base state (normal game state), high probability high base state (probability variable game state), low probability low base state (time saving game state), Further, the special symbol effect A (special symbol effect B) may be executed in any game state.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C8-1]
A gaming machine that notifies a win-lose result by the performance symbols by varying and stopping the performance symbols in a plurality of rows,
The production pattern is composed of a number image,
In each row of the plurality of rows, a variable display is performed with a special effect pattern in which a specific number image among the number images is smaller than the remaining number images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
the specific numerical images are numerical images representing odd numbers, and the remaining numerical images are numerical images representing even numbers;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
When notifying that a win is achieved as the result of winning, the specific numerical image is a numerical image confirming transition to a specific game state through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-3,
A specific column among the plurality of columns has a smaller size of the specific numeric image and the remaining numeric images compared to the remaining columns.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-4,
In each row of the plurality of rows, the case where the variable display is performed with the special effect symbols and the variable display with the normal effect symbols in which the specific number images and the remaining number images among the number images are of the same size are performed. There is a case to do,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-5,
In the first game state, the variable display is performed with the special effect symbols, and in the second game state, the variable display is performed with the normal effect symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

116 to 118, the decorative pattern visibility changing effects A to C will be described below. 116 to 118, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. Some have been omitted.

This decorative pattern visibility change effect is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and if an instruction to execute a decorative pattern visibility change effect is included, the ROM 103 responds. Then, the image data is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. For example, the position of 14R and the emission mode are changed.

Here, the decorative symbol visibility change effect A will be described first, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect B and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C will be described in order.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect A]
The decorative pattern visibility change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility change effect A. FIG. The decorative pattern visibility change effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each of the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display ) is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The variable icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd are called the variable display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a pending display area is provided as the first special figure pending. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Here, an area composed of the variable display area and the pending display area is referred to as the variable and pending display area THA. The change and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image in the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image in the background cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area. When displayed, the background image in the background cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C. Further, when the pending display position 9Ad is displayed in the pending display area, the background image in the rear cannot be visually recognized through the pending display position 9Ad, and when the pending icon 9A is displayed in the pending display area. , the background image behind it cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

A variable area 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is variably produced (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA in front and behind, and the variable and pending display area. It is arranged behind the THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the reserved display area. is not displayed (that is, if there is no game ball (reserved ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L is visually recognized through the reservation display area. However, when a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed in the pending display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the pending icon 9A.

A variable area 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably produced (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA in front and behind, and the variable and pending display area. It is arranged behind the THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the reserved display area. is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the pending icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. Incidentally, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable display area When the variation icon 9C is displayed in the , the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

A variable area 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative pattern 8R is variably produced (variably displayed) does not overlap the variable and reserved display area THA before and after. As a result, the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized without being hindered by the variation and the reserved display area THA.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 116(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (2 A smooth curve having a bow shape connecting from the lower side center right side (the position from the left side of the lower side of the display screen 7a corresponding to 2/3 of the distance dimension of the lower side of the display screen 7a) to the lower side of the display screen 7a ( A mini-character rendering area MHG surrounded by a curved line that draws an arc), the left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower side of the display screen 7a is displayed and appears on the display screen 7a. In the mini-character production area MHG, various mini-characters appear and production is performed by the mini-characters.

This mini character effect area MHG includes a variable area 8Lr in which the left decorative design 8L is variably rendered (variably displayed), a variable area 8Cr in which the middle decorative design 8C is variably rendered (variably displayed), and a right decorative design 8R which is variably rendered ( There is an area that overlaps with the variable area 8Rr to be displayed in a variable display), and is arranged in front of these variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr, and has an area that overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA before and after. It is located behind the change and hold display area THA. That is, the mini-character effect area MHG is arranged between the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and the variation and suspension display area THA.

A colored and opaque background image is provided in the mini-character rendering area MHG. Therefore, when the mini-character effect area MHG appears, the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the mini-character effect area MHG. , the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character production area MHG. On the other hand, since the change and suspension display area THA is arranged in front of the mini-character effect area MHG, even if the mini-character effect area MHG appears, the visibility is obstructed by the mini-character effect area MHG. never In this way, the variation and suspension display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the mini character production area MHG. , the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, the suspension icon 9A in the variation and suspension display area THA are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character production area MHG. It is designed so that it does not become difficult to see.

Although the mini-characters appearing in the mini-character production area MHG are arranged on the front side of the mini-character production area MHG, they are arranged on the rear side of the variation and suspension display area THA. Even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character rendering area MHG, the visibility is not hindered by the mini-character.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number "1" having a bright green color, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. It is At the position of the left decorative design 8L temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower portion of the left decorative design 8L (part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered with the mini-character rendering area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. Therefore, the part below the left decorative design 8L temporarily stopped and displayed (part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered with the mini-character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L and visually recognized. I can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(D), a colored and opaque friend character CRA appears as a mini character in the mini character rendering area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character effect area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the sword of the ally character CRA at a predetermined timing. Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. It should be noted that there is a case where the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to another icon due to the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character production area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA crosses the mini-character production area MHG and enters the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a straddling. For example, in FIG. 116(D), when the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character effect area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA is not covered by the mini-character effect area MHG among the left decorative symbols 8L temporarily stopped and displayed. part will be covered. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed straddling the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the mini-character effect area MHG, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed is covered with the mini-character effect area MHG. The unexposed portion overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. As the ally character CRA moves around, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered with the mini-character effect area MHG and is exposed, and the ally character CRA does not overlap, and the temporarily stopped display is performed. The exposed portion of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered with the mini-character rendering area MHG can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number "1" having a bright green color, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued to form a reach. be. Since the position of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered by the mini-character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the entire right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed can be visually recognized. can be done. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around the mini-character rendering area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA crosses the mini-character rendering area MHG, and the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. , 8Cr and 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having bright green, for example, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When reach is not formed, the mini-character rendering area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and after that, when the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. may not be stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and may be lost.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having bright green, for example, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When the reach is not formed, the friendly character CRA moving around the mini-character production area MHG jumps over the mini-character production area MHG, and the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decoration In the state where the pattern 8C straddles the variable area 8Cr), the number "9" is sent out below the variable area 8Rr by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the number "1" is pulled in from above the variable area 8Rr to display a temporary stop and reach. , the ally character CRA may return to the mini-character rendering area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(F), when the mini-character effect area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. be. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect A is completed. When the decorative symbol visibility change effect A is being performed, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped while the mini character effect area MHG is displayed, Of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) part) cannot be visually recognized because it is covered with the mini-character rendering area MHG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(G), when the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed blinking), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped with the bright red number "1", are displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 116(H). , and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R were both temporarily stopped and displayed with bright green number "1" in FIG. 116(F). On the other hand, after the ally character CRA appears in FIG. 116(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number "7" in FIG. 116(H). Temporary stop display is made by changing to number "1" having a bright red color. As a result, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the same bright red color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern), the jackpot can be achieved. I have high expectations. It should be noted that when the reach is formed by the bright red number "7", the expectation of a big win is set higher in advance than when the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 116(H), the colors of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are changed from the normal color (bright green) to the same color as the number "7", which is bright red (that is, the color change of the decorative design ) to suggest one of five levels of expectation for a big win (for example, five face images of teammate character CRA are arranged, and an image suggesting that the level of expectation for a big win is 3.5 out of five levels is 3.5). one face image is yellow, half the face image is yellow, half the face image is black, and the remaining face image is black.) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various performances may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is made and then a big win game (big win performance). is started, but when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, it is lost.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility change effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern visibility change effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 117(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each of the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display ) is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The variable icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd are called the variable display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a pending display area is provided as the first special figure pending. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Here, an area composed of the variable display area and the pending display area is referred to as the variable and pending display area THA. The change and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image in the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image in the background cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area. When displayed, the background image in the background cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C. Further, when the pending display position 9Ad is displayed in the pending display area, the background image in the rear cannot be visually recognized through the pending display position 9Ad, and when the pending icon 9A is displayed in the pending display area. , the background image behind it cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

A variable area 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is variably produced (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA in front and behind, and the variable and pending display area. It is arranged behind the THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the reserved display area. is not displayed (that is, if there is no game ball (reserved ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L is visually recognized through the reservation display area. However, when a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed in the pending display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the pending icon 9A.

A variable area 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably produced (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA in front and behind, and the variable and pending display area. It is arranged behind the THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the reserved display area. is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the pending icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. Incidentally, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable display area When the variation icon 9C is displayed in the , the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

A variable area 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative pattern 8R is variably produced (variably displayed) does not overlap the variable and reserved display area THA before and after. As a result, the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized without being hindered by the variation and the reserved display area THA.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 117(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a 1/2) to the center of the right side of the display screen (position corresponding to 1/2 of the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a), a smooth curve having a gentle concave shape, and the display screen 7a. , the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the display screen 7a. In the mini-character production area MHG, various mini-characters appear and production is performed by the mini-characters.

This mini character effect area MHG includes a variable area 8Lr in which the left decorative design 8L is variably rendered (variably displayed), a variable area 8Cr in which the middle decorative design 8C is variably rendered (variably displayed), and a right decorative design 8R which is variably rendered ( There is an area that overlaps with the variable area 8Rr to be displayed in a variable display), and is arranged in front of these variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr, and has an area that overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA before and after. It is located behind the change and hold display area THA. That is, the mini-character effect area MHG is arranged between the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and the variation and suspension display area THA.

A colored and opaque background image is provided in the mini-character rendering area MHG. Therefore, when the mini-character effect area MHG appears, the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the mini-character effect area MHG. , the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character production area MHG. On the other hand, since the change and suspension display area THA is arranged in front of the mini-character effect area MHG, even if the mini-character effect area MHG appears, the visibility is obstructed by the mini-character effect area MHG. never In this way, the variation and suspension display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the mini character production area MHG. , the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, the suspension icon 9A in the variation and suspension display area THA are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character production area MHG. It is designed so that it does not become difficult to see.

Although the mini-characters appearing in the mini-character production area MHG are arranged on the front side of the mini-character production area MHG, they are arranged on the rear side of the variation and suspension display area THA. Even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character rendering area MHG, the visibility is not hindered by the mini-character.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number "1" having a bright green color, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. It is At the position of the left decorative design 8L temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower portion of the left decorative design 8L (part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered with the mini-character rendering area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. Therefore, the part below the left decorative design 8L temporarily stopped and displayed (a part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered with the mini-character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L and visually recognized. I can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a colored and opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini-character in the mini-character rendering area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character effect area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the sword of the ally character CRA at a predetermined timing. Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. It should be noted that there is a case where the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to another icon due to the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character production area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA crosses the mini-character production area MHG and enters the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a straddling. For example, in FIG. 117(D), when the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character effect area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA is not covered by the mini-character effect area MHG among the left decorative symbols 8L temporarily stopped and displayed. part will be covered. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed straddling the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the mini-character effect area MHG, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed is covered with the mini-character effect area MHG. The unexposed portion overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. As the ally character CRA moves around, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered with the mini-character effect area MHG and is exposed, and the ally character CRA does not overlap, and the temporarily stopped display is performed. The exposed portion of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered with the mini-character rendering area MHG can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number "1" having a bright green color, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued, and reach is formed. be. At the position of the right decorative design 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower portion of the right decorative design 8R (part of the right decorative design 8R) is covered with the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R. Therefore, the part below the right decorative design 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed (part of the right decorative design 8R) is covered with the mini-character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R and visually recognized. I can't. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around the mini-character production area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA crosses the mini-character production area MHG, and the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. , 8Cr and 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having bright green, for example, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When reach is not formed, the mini-character rendering area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and after that, when the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. may not be stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and may be lost.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having bright green, for example, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When the reach is not formed, the friendly character CRA moving around the mini-character production area MHG jumps over the mini-character production area MHG, and the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decoration In the state where the pattern 8C straddles the variable area 8Cr), the number "9" is sent out below the variable area 8Rr by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the number "1" is pulled in from above the variable area 8Rr to display a temporary stop and reach. , the ally character CRA may return to the mini-character rendering area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117(F), when the mini-character effect area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. be. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B is completed. When the decorative symbol visibility change effect B is being performed, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped while the mini character effect area MHG is displayed, The lower part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is a mini character production area. It cannot be seen because it is covered by MHG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(G), when the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed blinking), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped with the bright red number "1", are displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 117(H). , and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped and displayed with bright green number "1" in FIG. 117(F). On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number "7" in FIG. 117(H). Temporary stop display is made by changing to number "1" having a bright red color. As a result, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the same bright red color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern), the jackpot can be achieved. I have high expectations. It should be noted that when the reach is formed by the bright red number "7", the expectation of a big win is set higher in advance than when the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 117(H), the color of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to the same color as the number "7", which is bright red (that is, the color change of the decorative design ) to suggest one of five levels of expectation for a big win (for example, five face images of teammate character CRA are arranged, and an image suggesting that the level of expectation for a big win is 3.5 out of five levels is 3.5). one face image is yellow, half the face image is yellow, half the face image is black, and the remaining face image is black.) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, various performances may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is achieved and then a big win game (big win performance). is started, but when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, it is lost.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect C]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility change effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern visibility change effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 118(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each of the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display ) is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The variable icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd are called the variable display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a pending display area is provided as the first special figure pending. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Here, an area composed of the variable display area and the pending display area is referred to as the variable and pending display area THA. The change and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image in the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image in the background cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area. When displayed, the background image behind cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C. Further, when the pending display position 9Ad is displayed in the pending display area, the background image in the rear cannot be visually recognized through the pending display position 9Ad, and when the pending icon 9A is displayed in the pending display area. , the background image behind it cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

A variable area 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is variably produced (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA in front and behind, and the variable and pending display area. It is arranged behind the THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the reserved display area. is not displayed (that is, if there is no game ball (reserved ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L is visually recognized through the reservation display area. However, when a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed in the pending display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the pending icon 9A.

A variable area 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably produced (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA in front and behind, and the variable and pending display area. It is arranged behind the THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the reserved display area. is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the pending icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. Incidentally, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable display area When the variation icon 9C is displayed in the , the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

A variable area 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative pattern 8R is variably produced (variably displayed) does not overlap the variable and reserved display area THA before and after. As a result, the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized without being hindered by the variation and the reserved display area THA.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 118(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a A left movable role product image KGL imitating the left movable role product 14L of the first movable role product 14 toward the right side of the surface screen 7a corresponds to the operation area of the left movable role product 14L. It appears so as to cover the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is modeled from the center of the right side of the display screen 7a (the position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the right side of the display screen 7a) toward the left side of the surface screen 7a. The right movable role product image KGR appears so as to cover the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R so as to correspond to the operation area of the right movable role product 14R. When the left movable role product image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR appear separated from each other, the left movable role product image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR are rendered with a running lightning bolt.

The left movable accessory image KGL has an area that overlaps in front of and behind the variable area 8Lr in which the left decorative pattern 8L is variably produced (variably displayed), is arranged in front of the variable area 8Lr, and is the variable and reserved display area. It is arranged so as not to overlap with the THA in the front and back. In addition, the right movable role product image KGR has a region that overlaps in front and behind the variable region 8Rr in which the right decorative pattern 8R is variablely produced (variably displayed), is arranged on the front side of the variable region 8Rr, and is arranged in front of the variable region 8Rr. It is arranged so as not to overlap the display area THA in front and behind.

The left movable accessory image KGL imitates the left movable accessory 14L and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the left side movable role product image KGL appears, the left side movable role image KGL is displayed in a region where the left side movable role product image KGL overlaps with the left side movable role product image KGL. It becomes impossible to see through the object image KGL. The right movable role product image KGR imitates the right movable role product 14R and is colored and opaque. For this reason, when the right movable role product image KGR appears, in the region where the right decorative pattern 8R variation region 8Rr and the right movable role product image KGR overlap, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable effect (variable display). It becomes impossible to see through the object image KGR.

Note that the left movable character product image KGL and the right movable character product image KGR appear separated from each other, and the left movable character product image KGL and the right movable character product image KGR show lightning running, but the left movable character product image KGL and the right movable character product image KGR appear in a state where lightning bolts run. Since the character object image KGL and the right movable character object image KGR are arranged so as not to overlap the change and the reserved display area THA before and after, the lightning does not overlap the change and the reserved display area THA before and after the change. And in the reserved display area THA, even if the left movable character product image KGL and the right movable character product image KGR appear separated from each other and a running lightning effect is performed, visibility is not hindered by the lightning bolt. do not have.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118(C), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number "1" having a bright green color, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R continues. It is At the position of the left decorative design 8L temporarily stopped and displayed, the left side portion of the left decorative design 8L (part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered with the left movable accessory image KGL arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. Therefore, the part on the left side of the left decorative design 8L temporarily stopped (part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered with the left movable accessory image KGL arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L and visually recognized. I can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(D), in a state in which the left movable role product image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR appear separated from each other, the ring-shaped decorative portion of the left movable role product image KGL appears. The area of the left decorative part that is half and the right decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part of the right movable role object image KGR (that is, the area extending from the upper side to the lower side of the left decorative part and the right decorative part) It can run as appropriate in the area extending from the upper side to the lower side). When the lightning bolt SND runs, it becomes possible to change from the variable icon 9C to another icon at a predetermined timing under the influence of the lightning bolt SND. Here, under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, the white spherical variation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the variation icon 9C is successful. It should be noted that, even under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, the white spherical variable icon 9C may not change to another icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C may fail.

When the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear separated from each other and the lightning bolt SND runs, the lightning bolt SND crosses the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR to the left decorative pattern. There is a case where it is displayed on the display screen 7a across the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr and 8Rr of the 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in FIG. 118(D), when the left movable character product image KGL and the right movable character product image KGR appear separated from each other and the lightning bolt SND runs, the left movable character product image KGL is temporarily stopped and displayed. A portion of the decorative pattern 8L that is not covered with the left movable accessory image KGL is covered. In other words, when the lightning bolt SND is displayed across the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the left movable character image KGL, the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L is covered with the left movable character image KGL. The unbroken exposed portion overlaps with the lightning SND and becomes invisible. In addition, the lightning bolt SND runs appropriately in the range from the upper side to the lower side of the semicircular portion of the left movable character image KGL and the right movable character image KGR, so that the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed becomes the left movable character. The exposed portion not covered with the object image KGL and the lightning bolt SND do not overlap, and the lightning bolt SND obstructs the exposed portion of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed without being covered with the left movable accessory image KGL. It can be visually recognized without being caught (see FIG. 118(E)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number "1" having a bright green color, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued to form reach. be. At the position of the right decorative design 8R temporarily stopped and displayed, the right side portion of the right decorative design 8R (part of the right decorative design 8R) is covered with the right movable role product image KGR arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R. Therefore, the part on the right side of the right decorative design 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed (part of the right decorative design 8R) is covered with the right movable accessory image KGR arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R and visually recognized. I can't. Even at this point, the lightning SND runs appropriately in the range from the upper side to the lower side of the semi-circular portions of the left movable character product image KGL and the right movable character product image KGR, so that the lightning SND moves to the left movable character product image KGL. And there is a case where it is displayed on the display screen 7a across the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R beyond the right movable role product image KGR.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having bright green, for example, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When reach is not formed, the left movable role product image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be stop-displayed as the same pattern and may be lost.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having bright green, for example, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When the reach is not formed, the lightning bolt SND appropriately running in the range from the upper side to the lower side of the semicircular portions of the left movable character image KGL and the right movable character image KGR is the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R. The lightning bolt SND may subside after the number "9" is sent out below the variable region 8Rr and the number "1" is pulled in from above the variable region 8Rr to display a temporary stop to form a reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118(F), when the lightning bolt SND subsides, the left movable character image KGL and the right movable character image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates (changes display). is continued. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect C ends. In addition, when the decorative pattern visibility change effect C is being performed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a state in which the left movable role product image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR are displayed. is temporarily stopped, the left part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L and the right part of the right decorative pattern 8R (part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the right decorative pattern 8R) are left movable. While the object image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR cannot be visually recognized, the middle decorative pattern 8C is not covered by the left movable role product image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR and is visually recognized. be able to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(G), at the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are positioned at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (in a direction to approach each other) from the home position, and is attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a. The left decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the right movable accessory 14R and the right decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a left movable accessory 14L. and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (unified accessory) having an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( hereinafter referred to as a “circular area”). A teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R separate from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory 14L moves. 14R retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R whose display is temporarily stopped at the bright red number "1" are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed. (variable display) is continued.

Before the ally character CRA appears in FIG. 118(G), both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 118(F) are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" in bright green. On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 118(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number "7" in FIG. 118(H). It is changed to the number "1" having a bright red color and is temporarily stopped. As a result, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the same bright red color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern), the jackpot can be achieved. I have high expectations. It should be noted that when the reach is formed by the bright red number "7", the expectation of a big win is set higher in advance than when the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 118(H), the color of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to the same color as the number "7", which is bright red (that is, the color change of the decorative design ) to suggest one of five levels of expectation for a big win (for example, five face images of teammate character CRA are arranged, and an image suggesting that the level of expectation for a big win is 3.5 out of five levels is 3.5). one face image is yellow, half the face image is yellow, half the face image is black, and the remaining face image is black.) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, various performances may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is achieved and then a big win game (big win performance). is started, but when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, it is lost.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern visibility change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. An image display device 7 (display means) that can be displayed is provided, and a specific image (decorative design visual recognition In gender change effects A and B, a second area that can display an ally character CRA, which is a mini character, and in decorative pattern visibility change effect C, a lightning bolt SND) can be displayed (mini character effect area MHG in decorative pattern visibility change effects A and B, In the decorative pattern visibility change effect C, the left movable character object image KGL) is arranged and provided in front of the variable region 8Lr (first region), and a part of the left decorative pattern 8L (design image) is provided in the second region. 116 (C) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A, FIG. 117 (C) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect B, and FIG. 118 (C) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C )) can be executed. According to this configuration, the second area is intentionally placed in front of the variation area 8Lr (first area) so as to partially overlap the variation area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative symbol 8L (design image). Therefore, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L (design image) can be made difficult to see by the second area, and the entire image of the left decorative design 8L (design image) can be viewed by the player himself. can be imagined in As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variable effect (variable display) using novel pattern images that have never existed before. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C in FIG. Further, the variation and suspension display area THA in which the variation icon 9C and the suspension icon 9A can be displayed so as to overlap part of the variation area 8Lr (first area) and part of the second area of the left decorative pattern 8L. (Third area) is provided in front of the second area, and the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are not difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L (design image) and the specific image. . The variable icon 9C may be used as a notice ("variable effect" to change the display mode) for the variable effect (during variable display), and the pending icon 9A is not actually used in the game yet. It may be used as an effect that suggests a future effect by a look-ahead effect in the state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A from being hindered by the symbol image and the specific image when the variable display by the symbol image is performed. This can contribute to making it difficult to overlook changes in the variable icon 9C and changes in the pending icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C in FIG. A specific image (in the decorative pattern visibility change effects A and B, the friendly character CRA, which is a mini character, and the decorative pattern visibility change When the lightning bolt (SND) is displayed in the production C, the other part (Fig. 116 (D) of the decorative design visibility change production A and the decorative design visibility In FIG. 117(D) of the change effect B, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed overlaps with the teammate character CRA, and in FIG. part) is difficult to see. According to this configuration, part of the pattern image can be made invisible by the second area, and further, other parts different from the part can be made difficult to be seen by the specific image. A player can be provided with a variable effect (variable display) by a more novel pattern image.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C in FIG. The second area disappears from the display screen 7a so that the entire left decorative pattern 8L (design image) can be easily visually recognized. According to this configuration, since part of the pattern image is difficult to see due to the second area, the player can imagine the whole image of the pattern image, and the second area disappears from the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to match the answer with what one imagines by oneself, and it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony of the variable display by the pattern image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. It can be executed after the start of the variable display by the pattern image and before the temporary stop display. According to this configuration, before the pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the pattern image can be made difficult to be recognized by the second region, so that variation can be imparted to the variable display of the pattern image. , it is possible to contribute to making the fluctuation display by the pattern image less monotonous.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the variation icon 9C in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. When a specific image (a friendly character CRA, which is a mini character in the decorative pattern visibility change effects A and B, and a lightning bolt SND in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C) is displayed, it can be changed to an image with a high expectation of winning. It's like According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C can be used as a notice (“change effect” for changing the display mode) during the variable effect (during the variable display). In addition, when the specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the degree of expectation for winning may change to a higher one. can be given to

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. , Change the color of the pattern image to another color (for example, change the color of the number “1” from the normal color (bright green) to bright red) to increase the expectation of winning Fig. 116 (H) in the gender change effect A, Fig. 117 (H) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect B, and Fig. 118 (H) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C) can be executed. . According to this configuration, there is a possibility that the second effect in which the color of the symbol image is changed is executed after the end of the first effect. While enjoying the first performance, one can also look forward to a second performance that has not yet been executed but may be executed in the future.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern visibility change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect A shown in FIGS. 116(E) and (F) and the decorative symbol visibility change effect B shown in FIGS. It disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the mini-character effect area MHG may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. In addition, in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIGS. 118(E) and (F), when reach is formed, the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a. However, the left movable role product image KGL and the right movable role product image KGR may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the timing of the temporary stop display of the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the reach is formed by the odd decorative patterns (symbol images). However, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as the bright blue number "2", and then the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the bright blue number "2". A reach may be formed by a decorative design (design image).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIGS. 118B to 118E, the left movable role image KGL imitating the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 changes the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L. It appeared so as to cover it, and furthermore, the right movable role image KGR imitating the right side movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 appeared so as to cover the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, the left movable role product image KGL may be replaced with the left movable role product 14L, and the right movable role product image KGR may be replaced with the right movable role product 14R. A part of the left decorative pattern 8L can be made invisible by covering a part of the left decorative pattern 8L with the left movable accessory 14L, and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R can be covered with the right movable accessory 14R. Since a part of the right decorative pattern 8R can be made difficult to see, the player can imagine the whole image of the left decorative pattern 8L and the whole image of the right decorative pattern 8R by himself/herself. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variable effect (variable display) using novel pattern images that have never existed before. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

Also, the left movable role product image KGL is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operating area of the left movable role product 14L, and the right movable role product image KGR is displayed so as to correspond to the operating region of the right movable role product 14R. Since the left movable character product image KGL and the right movable character product image KGR do not overlap with the change and reservation display area THA in front and behind, the left movable character product image is displayed on the screen 7a. Even if the left movable role 14L is used instead of KGL, and the right movable role 14R is used instead of the right movable role image KGR, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are the change and reservation display area THA. Do not overlap before and after. That is, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R do not cover the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, and the suspension icon 9A in the variation and suspension display area THA.

[Modification 5]
The decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. production may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C9-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A second area in which a specific image can be displayed is arranged in front of the first area so as to overlap a part of the first area in which the variable display by the symbol image is performed, and a part of the symbol image. is capable of executing a first effect that is difficult to see due to the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C9-1,
In the first effect, further, a third area capable of displaying the variable icon and the holding icon so as to overlap a part of the first area and a part of the second area is the second area. is arranged in front of, and the variable icon and the pending icon are not difficult to see due to the pattern image and the specific image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C9-1 or aspect C9-2,
In the first effect, when the specific image is displayed straddling the first area and the second area, another part different from a part of the pattern image is visually recognized by the specific image. can be difficult,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-3,
In the first effect, the second area may disappear and the entire pattern image may be easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-4,
The first effect can be executed after the start of the variable display by the symbol image and before the temporary stop display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-5,
The variable icon can change to an icon with a high probability of winning when the specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-6,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect that changes the color of the pattern image to another color to increase the expectation of winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

119 to 121, decorative pattern rotation stop display effects A to C will be described below. In FIGS. 119 to 121, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. is therefore omitted.

This decorative symbol rotation stop display effect is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and if an instruction to execute a decorative symbol rotation stop display effect is included, the ROM 103 responds. Then, the image data is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Here, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A will be described first, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be described in order.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A]
The decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 119(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C includes special patterns in addition to the number patterns. This special pattern is composed only of the pattern of the character.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered designs are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) having multiple colors (full colors), while the even-numbered designs are configured with no character designs. It has not been. Character designs attached to odd-numbered designs are displayed in a large size, with the character design as the main component. For this reason, the odd-numbered designs have a size smaller than the size of the characters attached to the odd-numbered designs. On the other hand, since the even-numbered symbols do not have character symbols attached thereto, the even-numbered symbols themselves are largely displayed in a large size. For this reason, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the symbols of the characters attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special pattern is a pattern of a winged character, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special design is composed only of the design of the character in the winged human form, and the size of the special design is about the same size or larger than the size of the design of the character attached to the odd-numbered design. ing.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 119(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern 8Cb. The right decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a bright blue number "6", and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and are lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. An effect (variable display) is started, and a decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A is started.

After that, the left decorative design 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the bright green number "1" 8La and the character 8Lb appear. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing the front for a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character design 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" design 8La has yellow shining eyes, but does not face the front and tilts to the right front as viewed from the character design 8Lb. A variable production (variable display) is performed in a state of a silhouette like this. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R is continued.

As shown in FIG. 119(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is such that the character pattern 8Lb faces from the right front to the front while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La faces the front. When the character pattern 8Lb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a silhouette to a full color, and the left decorative pattern 8L as a whole moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb facing forward.

Subsequently, the right decorative design 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variation area of , the figure 8Ra of the number "2" in bright blue color appears without the character. In the right decorative pattern 8R, when the translucent state is changed to the opaque state, the pattern 8Ra of the number "2" having bright blue does not face the front and is tilted to the left front when viewed from the pattern 8Ra of the number "2". It is in the same state as it was and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes its posture so that the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra faces forward from the left front to the bright blue number "2". 2” pattern 8Ra faces the front, the entire right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a manner that it slowly moves up and down in small steps. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra facing forward.

Subsequently, the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. A character pattern 8Cb is attached to a bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the pattern 8Ca of the numeral "7" having bright red remains facing the front, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed. Furthermore, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and is tilted to the right front as viewed from the character pattern 8Cb. A variable production (variable display) is performed in a state of a silhouette like this.

As shown in FIG. 119(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is such that the character pattern 8Cb faces from the right front to the front while the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca faces the front. When the character pattern 8Cb turns to the front, the character pattern 8Cb changes from a shadow play-like silhouette to a full color display, and the entire middle decorative pattern 8C moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb facing forward. As a result, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A ends.

After that, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed and are lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8La is slowly changed in posture so as to face from the right front to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, and in the middle decorative pattern 8C, , the character pattern 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8Ca slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, whereas the even-numbered pattern 8R is used for the right decorative pattern 8R. The posture is slowly changed so that 8Ra faces from the left front to the front when viewed from the even-numbered pattern 8Ra. In other words, when a character pattern is present in the decorative pattern, the character pattern is rotated, and when there is no character pattern in the decorative pattern, the number pattern is rotated. It's like Furthermore, the direction in which the character pattern rotates when there is a character pattern in the decorative pattern is opposite to the direction in which the number pattern rotates when there is no character pattern in the decorative pattern. It's becoming

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable area from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C includes special patterns in addition to the number patterns. This special pattern is composed only of the pattern of the character.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered designs are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) having multiple colors (full colors), while the even-numbered designs are configured with no character designs. It has not been. Character designs attached to odd-numbered designs are displayed in a large size, with the character design as the main component. For this reason, the odd-numbered designs have a size smaller than the size of the characters attached to the odd-numbered designs. On the other hand, since the even-numbered symbols do not have character symbols attached thereto, the even-numbered symbols themselves are largely displayed in a large size. For this reason, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the symbols of the characters attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special pattern is a pattern of a winged character, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special design is composed only of the design of the character in the winged human form, and the size of the special design is about the same size or larger than the size of the design of the character attached to the odd-numbered design. ing.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 120(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca and a character pattern 8Cb. The right decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a bright blue number "6", and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed and are lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. An effect (variable display) is started, and a decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B is started.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again during the variable effect (during variable display), and as shown in FIG. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the bright green number "1" 8La and the character 8Lb appear. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing the front for a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character design 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" design 8La has yellow shining eyes, but does not face the front and tilts to the right front as viewed from the character design 8Lb. A variable production (variable display) is performed in a state of a silhouette like this. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R is continued.

As shown in FIG. 120(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is such that the character pattern 8Lb faces from the right front to the front while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La faces the front. When the character pattern 8Lb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a silhouette to a full color, and the left decorative pattern 8L as a whole moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb facing forward.

Subsequently, the right decorative design 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variation area of , the figure 8Ra of the number "2" in bright blue color appears without the character. In the right decorative pattern 8R, when the translucent state is changed to the opaque state, the pattern 8Ra of the number "2" having bright blue does not face the front and is tilted to the left front when viewed from the pattern 8Ra of the number "2". It is in the same state as it was and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes its posture so that the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra faces forward from the left front, and the bright blue number "2" 2” pattern 8Ra faces the front, the entire right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a manner that it slowly moves up and down in small steps. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra facing forward.

Subsequently, the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. A winged character design 8Cb appears at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variation area of . When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the pattern 8Cb of the character in the winged human form is all silver-colored, and is variably produced (variably displayed).

Then, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C grows in size while emitting a flashing light FH, and is a silver-colored winged character design. 8Cb changes to another color (full color), and the color of the eyes also changes from silver to yellow. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C remain displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are displayed with the flash FH arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. It is not covered by the flash FH, and the visibility of the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C is not hindered. When the pending icon 9A exists, the pending icon 9A does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and the flashing light FH is arranged behind the pending icon 9A. 9A is not covered with the flash FH, and the visibility of the pending icon 9A is not hindered.

After that, in the state where the flash FH is emitted, as shown in FIG. 120(I) (the flash FH is omitted in the same figure), the winged human form character design in the enlarged middle decorative design 8C. 8Cb jumps forward from the middle decoration pattern 8C and is displayed in a larger size, and animation effect of the winged character pattern 8Cb is performed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends.

In FIG. 120(I), when the winged character pattern 8Cb in the middle decorative pattern 8C does not jump forward from the middle decorative pattern 8C, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward in its own variation area. Then, it appears from above in a state in which the character pattern 8Cb is added to the number "1" pattern 8Ca having a bright green color. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the pattern 8Ca of the number "1" having bright green remains facing the front, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed. Furthermore, the character design 8Cb attached to the bright green number "1" design 8Ca has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and tilts to the right front as viewed from the character design 8Cb. A variable production (variable display) is performed in a state of a silhouette like this. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C slowly changes its posture so that the character pattern 8Cb faces from the right front to the front while the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca remains facing the front. When the pattern 8Cb faces the front, it changes from a shadow play-like silhouette to full color, and the entire middle decorative pattern 8C becomes a display mode that slowly moves up and down in small steps. As a result, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb facing forward. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stop-displayed as the same pattern, and are lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 120(J), a battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. If the pending icon 9A exists, of course, the pending icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same pattern, resulting in a big win, and then a big win game (big win performance). On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stop-displayed as the same pattern and are lost. When the battle effect ends and a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Incidentally, when the pending icon 9A exists, the pending icon 9A is also displayed on the display screen 7a again.

Thus, in the middle decorative design 8C, the winged human form character design 8Cb, which is a special design, does not change its posture while facing the front, but in the left decorative design 8L, the odd-numbered design 8La The attached character pattern 8Lb slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front, while in the right decorative pattern 8R, the even numbered pattern 8Ra slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the left front to the front. It is designed to let That is, except for special patterns, when character patterns are present in the decorative patterns, the character patterns are rotated, and when there are no character patterns in the decorative patterns, the number patterns are rotated. The rotating target is different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character design rotates when there is a character design in the decorative design, except for special designs, is opposite to the direction in which the number design rotates when there is no character design in the decorative design. It's getting different.

In addition, even when a character pattern exists in the decoration pattern, there are a pattern of the character that rotates and a special pattern that does not rotate while the pattern of the character faces the front. Furthermore, if there are two types of decorative designs: one with a number design as the only design, and one with a design with a winged human form character as the only design, the only design is It is designed to rotate.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. . Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are card-type decorative patterns, and various characters are added to the number patterns in the card. In addition, there is a special design in the middle decorative design 8C. This special pattern is composed only of the pattern of the character.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color except the number "7". Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Numeral patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are composed of various character patterns (all different character patterns) with multiple colors (full colors), and the character patterns are the main ones. displayed as large. For this reason, the size of the number pattern is smaller than the size of the character pattern attached to the number pattern. The special pattern is a pattern of a winged character, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special design is composed only of the design of the character in the winged human form, and the size of the special design is about the same size or larger than the size of the design of the character attached to the number design. ing.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 121(A), the left decorative design 8L is the number "2" in bright blue and the character design 8Lb is attached to the temporary stop display, and the middle decorative design 8C is the number "3" in bright green 8Ca. is temporarily stopped and displayed with a character design 8Cb attached thereto, and the right decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a bright blue number "6" with a character design 8Rb attached thereto, followed by a left decorative design 8L and a middle decoration. The symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stop-displayed and are lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. An effect (variable display) is started, and a decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C is started.

After that, the left decorative design 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the bright green number "1" 8La and the character 8Lb appear. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing the front for a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character design 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" design 8La has yellow shining eyes, but does not face the front and tilts to the right front as viewed from the character design 8Lb. A variable production (variable display) is performed in a state of a silhouette like this. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R is continued.

In the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the character pattern 8Lb faces from the right front to the front while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La faces the front. When the character pattern 8Lb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L of the card type slowly moves up and down in small steps. Become. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L of the card type is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb facing forward.

Subsequently, the right decorative design 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. In the variable area of the display screen 7a, at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, the number "2" pattern 8Ra in bright blue color is added to the character pattern 8Rb. In the right decorative pattern 8R, when the translucent state is changed to the opaque state, the pattern 8Ra of the number "2" having bright blue does not face the front and is tilted to the left front when viewed from the pattern 8Ra of the number "2". The character pattern 8Rb attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra has its eyes shining yellow and faces the front in full color. It is in the state of being changed and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes its posture so that the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra faces forward from the left front to the bright blue number "2". 2” pattern 8Ra faces the front, the entire card-type right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a manner that it slowly moves up and down in small steps. As a result, the card-type right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra and the character pattern 8Rb facing forward.

Subsequently, the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable rendering (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. In the variable region of , a character pattern 8Cb is attached to a bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having bright red remains facing the front, and the variable production (variable display) is performed. Furthermore, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has yellow shining eyes, but does not face the front and tilts to the right front as viewed from the character pattern 8Cb. A variable production (variable display) is performed in a state of a silhouette like this.

As shown in FIG. 121(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is such that the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca faces the front while the character pattern 8Cb faces from the right front to the front. When the character pattern 8Cb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a silhouette to full color, and the entire card-type middle decorative pattern 8C moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. Become. As a result, the card-type middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb facing forward. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C ends.

After that, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and are lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative pattern 8L of the card type, the posture of the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8La is slowly changed so that the character pattern 8Lb faces from the front right side to the front side as viewed from the character pattern 8Lb. In the middle decorative pattern 8C, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8Ca slowly changes its posture so as to face from the right front to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, whereas the card type right side In the decorative pattern 8R, the posture of the even-numbered pattern 8Ra is slowly changed so that the even-numbered pattern 8Ra faces from the front left to the front when viewed from the even-numbered pattern 8Ra. In other words, even if various characters are attached to odd-numbered and even-numbered symbols, the odd-numbered symbols rotate the character symbols, and the even-numbered symbols rotate the number symbols. are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the odd-numbered symbols rotate is opposite to the direction in which the even-numbered symbols rotate.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. Equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8L (a plurality of pattern images), the odd numbered patterns are provided with character patterns. The decorative symbols (first symbol image) are temporarily stopped in the first stop mode, and the even-numbered decorative symbols (second symbol image) are displayed in the second stop mode (the second stop mode is , which is different from the first stop mode.) to display a temporary stop (Fig. 119 (B) to (H) in decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A, Fig. 120 ( B) to (G), and in the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C, (B) to (I) of FIG. 121) can be executed. According to this configuration, out of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L (a plurality of pattern images), the character is attached to the odd-numbered patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode. A novel decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. And the second pattern image is a number pattern (numeric image), and the first pattern image further includes a character pattern (decoration image). According to this configuration, the first pattern image includes a number pattern (numeric image) and a character pattern (decorative image), and the second pattern image includes a number pattern (numeric image). Become. Therefore, there is already a difference between the decorative design that is the first design image and the decorative design that is the second design image, and the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is started and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Depending on the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed, different impressions can be given to the player, and the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the temporary stop display. can.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable effects in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. In the second stop mode, the first symbol image is temporarily stopped after rotating the character symbol (decorative image) without rotating the number symbol (numeric image) in the first symbol image. , the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image is rotated, and then the second pattern image can be temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the first pattern image in which the character pattern (decorative image) is included in the number pattern (numeric image) is the character pattern (decorative image) without rotating the number pattern (numeric image). is rotated and temporarily stopped, and the second symbol image that becomes a number symbol (number image) is temporarily stopped and displayed after the number symbol (number image) is rotated, and the object to be rotated is It looks different. As a result, as variations in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, there are cases where only the first symbol image is used, cases where only the second symbol image is used, and cases where the first symbol image and the second symbol image are used. In any variation, there is always a part that rotates in the decorative pattern, so the unified effect of "rotation" is performed for the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern. Even if the object to be rotated is different between the symbol image and the second symbol image, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the variation performance (variation display) of the decorative symbol.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. The number patterns (number images) in the second pattern image include those having bright green (first color) and those having bright red (second color). ) are such that some have a bright blue color (the third color). According to this configuration, the first pattern image and the second pattern image differ in the mode of temporary stop display in the first place. Furthermore, since the number patterns (number image) in the first pattern image also have two colors, a different impression can be given to the player depending on the combination displayed temporarily.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIGS. The pattern image) further includes a special pattern (third pattern image) of a middle decorative pattern 8C that has a character pattern (decorative image) and does not have a number pattern (number image). The special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped in the third stop mode, and the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped in the third stop mode. When displayed, the pattern (decorative image) of the character in the winged human form in the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C jumps out of the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and operates. You can do it. According to this configuration, when the special symbol (third symbol image) of the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol of the winged human form character in the special symbol (third symbol image) of the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed. (Decorative image) suddenly jumps out from the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and moves to the outside. can be provided to the player.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable effects in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. When the pattern image starts to fluctuate, part of the character pattern (decorative image) in the first pattern image is changed to a silhouette (shadow picture image) like a shadow play, and in the first stop mode, the original ( full-color) character pattern (decorative image). According to this configuration, by returning from a shadow-like silhouette (shadow picture image) to the original (full-color) character pattern (decorative image), it is possible to easily determine which character's pattern is. , a silhouette (shadow picture) like a shadow picture can further enhance the effect of presentation.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. The size of the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image is smaller than the size of the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image. Since the first design image includes the design of the character (decorative image) in the design of the number (numeric image), the design of the character (decoration image) is the main component in the first design image, The size of the number pattern is smaller than the size of the character pattern (decorative image). Also, the second pattern image becomes a number pattern (number image), and the number pattern itself becomes large. That is, the player is made to pay attention to the character design (decorative design) displayed large in the first design image, and the number design (numeric image) displayed large in the second design image. It is designed to be able to make it possible, and the target to be paid attention to is different. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to making it difficult for the fluctuation performance (variation display) by the decorative pattern serving as the first pattern image and the decorative pattern serving as the second pattern image to become monotonous.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in a line at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, for example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are arranged slightly above the center line, the middle decorative design 8C is arranged further rearward, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are arranged. They may be arranged in a triangular shape with a base. In this case, the size of the middle decorative design 8C is made smaller than the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. As a result, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are arranged on the front side, and the middle decorative design 8C is arranged on the depth side, thereby realizing a three-dimensional arrangement.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, the special symbol is a symbol of a winged human form character. A moving image production of a pattern of a humanoid character was performed. However, the special pattern may be a character pattern other than the winged character pattern. For example, it may be a character pattern that performs a pseudo-continuation (a character pattern of "pseudo-ren"), or a character pattern that changes the change icon 9C or the pending icon 9A (a character pattern of "change"). By doing this, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character pattern jumps forward from the middle decorative pattern 8C and activates the contents of the character pattern, and by increasing the variations of the special pattern, the special pattern can be used. It is possible to further enhance the effect of production.

[Modification 4]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. production may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C10-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Of the plurality of symbol images, the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a first stop mode, and the second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a second stop mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-1,
The first pattern image and the second pattern image are numeric images,
The first pattern image further includes a decoration image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-2,
In the variable effect, as the first stop mode, the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed after the decoration image is rotated without rotating the number image in the first symbol image, and the second symbol image is temporarily stopped. temporarily stop displaying the second symbol image after rotating the number image in the second symbol image as a stop mode of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect C10-2 or aspect C10-3,
The number images in the first pattern image include those having a first color and those having a second color,
The number image in the second pattern image may have a third color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-4,
The plurality of pattern images further include a third pattern image that has the decorative image and does not have the numeric image,
In the variable effect, the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a third stop mode,
In the third stop mode, when the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative image in the third symbol image is operable by popping out of the third symbol image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-5,
In the variable effect, when the first pattern image starts to fluctuate, part of the decoration image in the first pattern image is changed to a silhouette image, and in the first stop mode, the original decoration image is changed. return to the decorative image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-6,
the size of the number image in the first pattern image is smaller than the size of the number image in the second pattern image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

122 to 124, the expected degree number display effects A to C will be described below. This degree-of-expectation number display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the expected degree number display effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Expectation degree number display effect A]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the degree-of-expectation number display effect A. FIG. The expected degree numerical display effect is an effect in which an image showing the expected degree at the time of ready reach development in numbers is displayed during the ready reach effect. First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state (here, the reach to "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. After a predetermined period of time has passed after this ready-to-win effect, a black doll character CRA1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a character image of "chance to enter the jackpot with variable probability" is displayed together with the character CRA1.

This character image of "chance to rush into the probability variable jackpot" is a hit type suggesting image that indicates the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot. In other words, it suggests that if you win in the variation, you will get a definite variable jackpot. Here, it is suggested that if a jackpot is achieved after the change, it will be a 16R (round) V passage scheduled jackpot (substantially 15R or 13R). This character image is changed when the jackpot in the variation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning, the jackpot type is the 16RV scheduled jackpot, and the display of this character image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected. to be displayed. In addition, it is selected that this character image is displayed by lottery even when the loss in the variation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning. It should be noted that this character image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a scheduled 16RV passage jackpot at the time of the jackpot, or when another jackpot (for example, a 16RV non-passage scheduled jackpot) is displayed at the time of the jackpot. may also be set to be displayed.

After the character image of "chance to enter the probability variable jackpot" is displayed for a predetermined period, it disappears from the display screen 7a. After the character image of "chance to rush into the probability variable jackpot" disappears, the character CRA1 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a during the same variation, as shown in FIG. 122(B). Character CRA1 is an image representing the same object (black person) as in FIG. 122(A), but the display position is different (changes) from that in FIG. 122(A). In addition, a character image of "expectation level 40% with development of Smile Reach" is displayed together with the character CRA1. A character image of "expectation level of 40% with development of Smile Reach" is displayed as a speech bubble of the character CRA. The reach state of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This character image of "expectation level 40% with smile reach development" is a winning expectation suggesting image that numerically represents the expectation level of the big win when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the variable reach. In other words, it suggests that the expectation of the jackpot is 40% when the smile reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when a big win in the variation is determined by a lottery at the time of winning and when a loss is determined. If it is selected by lottery to display this character image when selecting a variation pattern, it is displayed during variation. The variation pattern for the big win and the variation pattern for the loss are set so that the ratio of selecting the display of the character image is 4:6.

The character image of "expectation level 40% with development of smile reach" disappears from the display screen 7a after being displayed for a predetermined period. After the character image of "expectation level 40% with smile reach development" disappears, as shown in FIG. be done. This is an image notifying that the reach has developed in the reach performance. After that, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a reach development effect is executed. Here, a plurality of smiley face images are displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of losing "282".

FIG. 122(F) shows variations different from those shown in FIGS. 122(A) to (E), and the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 122(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a ready-to-win state (here, a reach of "6↓6"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and the special ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, first, a battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. During the display of this battle video, a character image of "30% expected with smile reach development" is displayed. A character image of "30% expected with smile reach development" is displayed in a rectangular frame below the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB.

This character image of "30% expected degree of smile reach development" is a win expectation degree suggesting image that numerically represents the degree of expectation of a big win when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the variable reach. In other words, it suggests that the expectation of a big win is 30% when the smile reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when a big win in the variation is determined by a lottery at the time of winning and when a loss is determined. If it is selected by lottery to display this character image when selecting a variation pattern, it is displayed during variation. The variation pattern for the big win and the variation pattern for the loss are set so that the ratio of selecting the display of the character image is 3:7.

Comparing this character image of "expectation level 30% with smile reach development" and the character image of "expectation level 40% with smile reach development" in FIG. While the image represents the degree of expectation when it is done, a different numerical value is displayed as the degree of expectation. In this way, different expected values may be displayed with the same reach development effect (smile reach development), so that the player can be made to pay attention to the numerical value. In addition, this character image of "Expectation level of 30% with development of Smilereach" is displayed together with friend character CRA and enemy character CRB, while the character image of "Expectation level of 40% with development of Smilereach" in FIG. 122(B). is displayed with a black doll character CRA1. In this way, the character image of "30% expected level of smile reach development" and the character image of "40% expected level of smile reach development" in FIG. be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand with which image the character image of "expectation degree XX% in the development of Smile Reach" is displayed, thereby increasing the player's expectation of the display.

The character image of "expectation level 30% with development of smile reach" disappears from the display screen 7a after being displayed for a predetermined period. After the character image of "expectation level 30% with smile reach development" disappears, the character image of "smile reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same change as shown in FIG. be done. This is an image notifying that the reach has developed in the reach effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 122(I), a reach development effect is executed. Here, the friend character CRA throws a plurality of smiley face images toward the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are decided and stopped. Here, along with an image in which the teammate character CRA has been defeated, the game is fixed and stopped in the mode of losing "686".

[Expectation degree number display effect B]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the degree-of-expectation number display effect B. FIG. The expected degree numerical display effect is an effect in which an image showing the expected degree at the time of ready reach development in numbers is displayed during the ready reach effect. First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state (here, the reach to "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. After a predetermined period of time has passed after this ready-to-win effect, a battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. A smiley character CRA1 is displayed during the display of this battle image. In addition, a character image of "chance to rush into RUSH with battle victory" is displayed together with the smiley character CRA1.

This character image of "chance to rush into RUSH with battle victory" is a winning type suggesting image that suggests a jackpot type when the ally character CRA wins in the battle presentation. In other words, it suggests that a big win with RUSH will occur when winning in the variation. Here, it is suggested that if a jackpot is achieved after the change, it will be a 16R (round) V passage scheduled jackpot (substantially 15R or 13R). This character image is changed when the jackpot in the variation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning, the jackpot type is the 16RV scheduled jackpot, and the display of this character image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected. to be displayed. In addition, it is selected that this character image is displayed by lottery even when the loss in the variation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning. In this case, an image is displayed in which the teammate character CRA is defeated. This character image may be set so as to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a 16RV scheduled passing jackpot at the time of the big win, or displayed when another jackpot (for example, a 16RV non-passing scheduled jackpot) is obtained at the time of the big win. may be set to be

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the character image "chance to rush into RUSH with battle victory" was displayed, the display of the character image "chance to rush into RUSH with battle victory" continued, as shown in FIG. 123(B). In this state, a smiley character CRA2 is also displayed. The smiley character CRA2 is an image representing the same object (smiley face) as the smiley character CRA1, but has a different display position (vertical alignment). In addition, a character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" is displayed together with the smiley character CRA2. A character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" is displayed as a balloon of the smiley character CRA2. The reach state of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This character image of "60% expected degree of reach development with smileman participation" is a win expectation degree suggesting image that numerically indicates the degree of expectation of a big win when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the variable reach. In other words, it suggests that the expectation level of the jackpot will be 60% when the smileman participation reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when a big win in the variation is determined by a lottery at the time of winning and when a loss is determined. If it is selected by lottery to display this character image when selecting a variation pattern, it is displayed during variation. The variation pattern for the big win and the variation pattern for the loss are set so that the ratio of selecting the display of this character image is 6:4.

The character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" disappears from the display screen 7a after being displayed for a predetermined period. At this time, the character image of "chance to rush into RUSH with battle victory" also disappears. After the text images of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" and "chance to rush into RUSH with battle victory" disappear, as shown in FIG. A text image of "Smileman Joins!" is displayed nearby. This is an image notifying that the reach has developed in the reach performance. Together with this notification image, Smileman CRC participates in a battle video in which friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB fight. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a ready-to-win development effect is executed. Here, an image is displayed in which ally characters CRA and Smileman CRC are defeated by enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of losing "282".

FIG. 123(F) shows variations different from those shown in FIGS. 123(A) to (E), and the display screen 7a displays the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready state (here, the reach of "6↓6"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and the special ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, first, a battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. During the display of this battle video, a rectangular striped pattern image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 123(H) to 123(I), when the striped pattern in the rectangular striped pattern image slides to the left, the character "60% expectation for development of reach with smileman participation" is displayed. An image is displayed. A character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" is displayed inside a rectangular frame.

This character image of "expectation level 60% with reach development with smileman participation" is a hit expectation suggesting image that numerically shows the expectation level of the big win when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the variable reach. In other words, it suggests that the expectation of the jackpot will be 60% when the smileman participation reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when a big win in the variation is determined by a lottery at the time of winning and when a loss is determined. If it is selected by lottery to display this character image when selecting a variation pattern, it is displayed during variation. The variation pattern for the big win and the variation pattern for the loss are set so that the ratio of selecting the display of the character image is 6:4.

123(G) to (I) with the character image of "60% expected level of reach development with smileman participation" and the character image of "60% expected level of reach development with smileman participation" in FIG. 123(B). By comparison, it is an image representing the degree of expectation when the same reach development effect (smileyman participating reach development) is executed, and the same numerical value is displayed as the degree of expectation. On the other hand, the character image of "60% expectation for smileman participation reach development" in FIGS. On the other hand, the character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" in FIG. 123B is displayed as a speech bubble of the smile character CRA2. Thus, even if the content is the same, the display modes are different. 123(G) to (I), the character image of "expectation level 60% with Smileman participation reach development" is displayed together with ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, while FIG. 123(B) "smile The character image of "expectation level 60% with human participation reach development" is displayed together with the smiley character CRA2. In this way, the character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" in FIGS. With the character image, images representing different objects are displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand in what manner and with what image the character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" will be displayed, thereby increasing the player's expectation level of display. can.

The character image of "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" disappears from the display screen 7a after being displayed for a predetermined period. After the character image of "60% expected reach development with Smileman participation" disappears, if reach development effect is not executed (when Smileman CRC in FIG. 123 does not appear), as shown in FIG. 123(J) Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are determined and stopped. Here, along with an image in which the teammate character CRA has been defeated, the game is fixed and stopped in the mode of losing "686".

[Expectation degree number display effect C]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the degree-of-expectation number display effect C. FIG. FIGS. 124(A) to (C) are the same as FIGS. After FIG. 124(C), as shown in FIG. 124(D), reach development effect is executed. Here, an image is displayed in which ally character CRA and smiley man CRC defeat and defeat enemy character CRB. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped by this victory. Here, since the ally character CRA has won, the winning state of "222" is determined and stopped.

FIGS. 124(F)-(G) are the same as FIGS. 124(G), the character image "expectation level 60% with smileman participation reach development" disappears, and then, as shown in FIG. 124(H), "Smileman participation!" ” is displayed. This is an image notifying that the reach has developed in the reach performance. Together with this notification image, Smileman CRC participates in a battle video in which friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB fight. After that, as shown in FIG. 124(I), a ready-to-win development effect is executed. Here, an image is displayed in which ally character CRA and smiley man CRC defeat and defeat enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 124(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are determined and stopped. Here, since the ally character CRA has won, the winning state of "666" is determined and stopped.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the expectation degree number display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 122(B), 123(B), and 124(B), in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a first effect is executed in which the degree of expectation at the time of development of the reach is indicated numerically at the time of the reach. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(A), 123(A), and 124(A), during the same variation as the variation in which the first effect is executed, the first Prior to the performance, a second performance suggesting the winning type at the time of winning can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(A), (B), FIGS. 123(A), (B), and FIGS. , the image representing the same object is displayed, and the image representing the same object is displayed at different positions in the first effect and the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(B) and (G), in the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed numerically. Sometimes, it is possible to execute a third effect that expresses the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed by a numerical value different from the numerical value in the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122B and 122G, images representing different objects are displayed in the first effect and the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123(B)(G) to (I) and FIGS. 124(B)(G), a specific reach development effect is executed in the first effect. The degree of expectation in the case is expressed by a number, and the degree of expectation in the case where a specific reach development time production is executed at the time of reach is expressed by the same number as the numerical value in the first production, but is different from the first production. A fourth effect displayed in a mode can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the expectation level number display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]

In FIG. 122 (G) of the degree of expectation numerical display effect A, the degree of expectation represented by the character image of "expectation 30% with development of smile reach" is the degree of expectation represented by the character image "expectation 40% with development of smile reach" in FIG. 122 (B). It may be the same numerical value as the degree of expectation represented by the character image. In this case, during the ready-to-win state, the effects representing the degree of expectation in the case where the specific ready-to-win state development time effect is executed are executed in different manners from each other, so that the interest can be improved. In addition, in FIGS. 123(G) to 123(I) of the degree of expectation numerical display effect B, the degree of expectation represented by the character image of "expectation 60% with smileman participation reach development" is It may be a numerical value different from the degree of expectation represented by the character image "expectation degree 60% in the development of participation reach". In this case, at the time of ready reach, an effect is executed in which the degree of expectation in the case where a specific ready reach development time effect is executed is expressed by a different numerical value, so it is possible to improve interest.
[Modification 2]
In the expectation degree numerical display effect A, the effect of displaying a character image of "Expectation degree XX% with development of smile reach" may be executed a plurality of times during one variation. That is, the degree of expectation may change during one fluctuation. In this case, the degree of expectation displayed later may be higher or lower than the degree of expectation displayed earlier.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a first performance in which the degree of expectation at the time of development of reach can be expressed numerically at the time of reach.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect suggesting a winning type at the time of winning during the same variation as the variation in which the first effect is executed and prior to the first effect. .
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
An image representing the same object is displayed in the first effect and the second effect,
A gaming machine, wherein images representing the same object are displayed at different positions in the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is represented by a number,
A game machine capable of executing a third effect in which the degree of expectation when the specific ready-to-win development effect is executed is expressed by a numerical value different from the numerical value in the first effect.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
A gaming machine, wherein images representing different objects are displayed in the first effect and the third effect.
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
In the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is represented by a number,
A fourth effect for displaying the degree of expectation when the specific ready-to-win development time effect is executed at the ready-to-win state by the same numerical value as the numerical value in the first effect, while displaying it in a manner different from the first effect. A game machine characterized by being executable.

125 to 127, specific effect execution suggestion effects A to C will be described below. This specific effect execution suggesting effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a specific effect execution suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Specific effect execution suggestion effect A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect A. FIG. The specific effect execution suggesting effect is a effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed from now on in the variation. First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continues. That is, even after the special symbol (identification information) variable display (variable display) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L. The suspension icon (variation icon) 9C is displayed in the suspension display area (variation icon display area, suspension digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation, a specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, which suggests that the specific effect will be executed from now on in the variation. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is a character image of "Smiley big gathering!", and notifies that the special ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win effect) will be executed. When appearing, the character image of "Smiley-kun big gathering!" is enlarged and displayed across three screens, ie, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Also, the effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed so as to protrude from the three screens. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R has not yet been displayed. That is, in this effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed before the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed after the start of the variation. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG can suddenly execute the specific effect such as the special ready-to-win effect without knowing the state of the decorative pattern, such as whether or not the decorative pattern will reach the ready-to-win state. be informed. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised, and the interest can be improved. Part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed so as to be superimposed on the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(C), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed on three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. fits inside the screen. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(D), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is further reduced and displayed, and the entire specific effect execution suggesting image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is not yet displayed. A part of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C, and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(E), while the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is being displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward from the top of the display screen 7a, Temporarily stops at a position overlapping the performance execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(F), the right decorative design 8R is displayed above the display screen 7a in a state in which the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative design 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a. , and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. The right decorative design 8R is the same "7" as the left decorative design 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of “7↓7” is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(G), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and the special ready-to-win effect as the specific effect is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in the reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is split, and a plurality of smiley face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 125(H) and (I), a specific effect (special ready-to-reach effect) is executed using a plurality of smiley face images. That is, a character corresponding to the content indicated in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special ready-to-win effect. Here, in the specific performance, a performance with a high expectation of a big win is being executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are determined and stopped. Here, it is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot of "777".

[Specific effect execution suggestion effect B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining specific effect execution suggestion effect B. FIG. The specific effect execution suggesting effect is a effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed from now on in the variation. First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continues. That is, even after the special symbol (identification information) variable display (variable display) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L. The suspension icon (variation icon) 9C is displayed in the suspension display area (variation icon display area, suspension digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 126(B) and (C), a specific effect execution suggestion image ESG that suggests that the specific effect will be executed in the fluctuation is displayed. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is a character image of "Smiley big gathering!", and notifies that the special ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win effect) will be executed. The character image of "Smiley-kun big gathering!" appears while moving from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R has not yet been displayed. That is, in this effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed before the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed after the start of the variation. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG can suddenly execute the specific effect such as the special ready-to-win effect without knowing the state of the decorative pattern, such as whether or not the decorative pattern will reach the ready-to-win state. be informed. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised, and the interest can be improved. When the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 126(C), a part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed overlapping the suspension icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(D), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is enlarged and displayed, and the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed on three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. displayed across. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific effect execution suggesting image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a again. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is not yet displayed. A part of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C, and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(F), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is being displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward from the top of the display screen 7a, Temporarily stops at a position overlapping the performance execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 126(G), the display screen 7a displays the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed above the display screen 7a. , and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. The right decorative design 8R is the same "7" as the left decorative design 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of “7↓7” is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and the special ready-to-win effect as the specific effect is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in the reach state. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is split, and a plurality of smiley face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(I), a specific effect (special ready-to-reach effect) is executed using a plurality of smiley face images. That is, a character corresponding to the content indicated in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special ready-to-win effect. Here, in the specific performance, a performance with a high expectation of a big win is being executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, it is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot of "777".

[Specific effect execution suggestion effect C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect C. FIG. In the specific effect execution suggesting effect C, the specific effect execution suggesting effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed in combination. First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continues. That is, even after the special symbol (identification information) variable display (variable display) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen A state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the symbols 64L. The suspension icon (variation icon) 9C is displayed in the suspension display area (variation icon display area, suspension digest image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed below the reserved display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, the effects shown in FIGS. 127B to 127D are executed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127(B)-(D) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 126(B)-(H) of specific effect execution suggestion effect B. As shown in FIG. 127(D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and the special ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win effect) as the specific effect is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in the reach state. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is split, and a plurality of smiley face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. After that, a specific effect (special reach effect) is executed using a plurality of smiley face images. That is, a character corresponding to the content indicated in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special ready-to-win effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped. Here, the temporary stop is made in the mode of "767" being lost. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(F), a character image of "One more time!" FIGS. 127(G)-(I) are the same as FIGS. 127(B)-(D). After that, as shown in FIG. 127(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are determined and stopped. Here, it is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot of "777".

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the specific effect execution suggestion effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols is not displayed continuously after the start of the variation, it is determined that the specific effect is executed in the variation. A first effect in which a suggested specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed, and a second effect in which after the first effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped overlapping the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in the ready-to-win state so as to overlap the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, after the second effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken in a state where the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are superimposed, and the SP ready-to-win effect is performed. A third rendition to be executed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the third effect, the character (smiley face image) corresponding to the content indicated in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed as a specific effect execution suggestion. The image ESG is destroyed, and a character (smiley face image) appears in the SP reach performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first effect, a pending icon (the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C) is superimposed and displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R, and on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64R. It is displayed across the display screen 64L sub-display means. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of specific production|presentation execution suggestion production|presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific effect execution suggesting effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R temporarily stop in the ready-to-win state on the front side of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG, but may be stopped in a mode other than the ready-to-win state. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at "567" on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Further, for example, after temporarily stopping at "567", the game may be changed again by a pseudo-continuous effect, and a specific effect may be executed at that time.

[Modification 2]
The content of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG may suggest that effects other than the special ready-to-win effect be executed. For example, it may be suggested that a big win confirmation effect or a loss confirmation effect will be executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which a specific effect execution suggesting image is displayed to suggest that a specific effect is to be executed in the variation in a state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is not continuously displayed after the start of the change;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the decorative pattern temporarily stops overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image can be executed.
◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second effect, the decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-win state so as to overlap the specific effect execution suggestion image.
◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
The game machine is characterized in that, after the second performance, the specific performance execution suggesting image is broken in a state where the decorative patterns are overlapped, and a third performance in which the SP ready-to-win performance is executed can be executed.
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
In the third effect, a character corresponding to the content indicated in the specific effect execution suggestion image destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image, and in the SP ready-to-win effect, the character appears. machine.
◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the suspension icon is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggesting image so as to be superimposed thereon.
◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5 further comprises
Equipped with sub-display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image is displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The special direction suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG. This special direction suggesting effect can be executed during a special symbol variation effect or during a jackpot game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command and the jackpot game start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a performance.

[Special Direction Suggestion A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggesting effect A. FIG. In this special direction suggesting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. This time-saving performance is performed in a time-saving game state that is relatively advantageous to the player, and displays an ally character XF1, a direction suggestion display XF2, and a time-saving number display XF3. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The directional indication XF2 includes a directional indication XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit to the right, and the characters "Right to hit" inside the arrow. The time saving number display XF3 is a display showing the number of remaining time saving times, and in the example of FIG. Also, in this time-saving effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure. Also, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), a direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggesting display performance 1 is a continuation of the time-saving performance and is performed during the time-saving game. In this direction suggesting display presentation 1, the belt item XF11 of the friend character XF1 flies toward the direction suggesting display XF2 and finally becomes a part of the direction suggesting display XF2. In other words, the direction indication XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction indication XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged on the arrow shaft of the arrow of the direction display XF21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggesting display performance 2 is a continuation of the direction display performance 1 and is performed during the time saving game. In this direction suggesting display effect 2, the teammate character XF1, the direction suggesting display XF2, and the time saving display XF3 are continuously displayed. It is carried out.
This direction suggesting display effect 2 is executed until the time-saving game ends or until a big win is achieved.

[Special Direction Suggestion Effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggesting effect B. FIG. In this special direction suggesting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), the normal middle effect is executed. This normal medium effect is performed in a normal game state which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and displays a teammate character XF1 and a direction suggesting display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The directional indication XF2 includes a directional indication XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit to the right, and the characters "right hit" inside the arrow. Also, in this normal medium effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Also, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. After this, the following will be described as having entered a time-saving game state with a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), a direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggesting display performance 1 is performed during a time-saving game that is relatively advantageous to the player. In this direction suggesting display presentation 1, the belt item XF11 of the friend character XF1 flies toward the direction suggesting display XF2 and finally becomes a part of the direction suggesting display XF2. In other words, the direction indication XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction indication XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged on the arrow shaft of the arrow of the direction display XF21. In addition, in this direction suggesting display effect 1, the time reduction number display XF3 is displayed. The time saving number display XF3 is a display showing the number of remaining time saving times, and in the example of FIG. 129(B), "50 more times" is indicated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), a direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggesting display performance 2 is a continuation of the direction suggesting display performance 1, and is performed in the time-saving game state. In this direction suggesting display effect 2, the teammate character XF1, the direction suggesting display XF2, and the time saving display XF3 are continuously displayed. It is carried out.
This direction suggesting display effect 2 is executed until the time-saving game ends or until a big win is achieved.

[Special Direction Suggestion Effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggesting effect C. FIG. In this special direction suggesting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), the normal middle effect is executed. This normal medium effect is performed in a normal game state which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and displays a teammate character XF1 and a direction suggesting display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The directional indication XF2 includes a directional indication XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit to the right, and the characters "right hit" inside the arrow. Also, in this normal medium effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Also, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. After that, the following description will be made assuming that the player has hit the jackpot and entered the jackpot gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), a direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggesting display effect 1 is performed during a jackpot game. In this direction suggesting display presentation 1, the belt item XF11 of the friend character XF1 flies toward the direction suggesting display XF2 and finally becomes a part of the direction suggesting display XF2. In other words, the direction indication XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction indication XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged on the arrow shaft of the arrow of the direction display XF21. In addition, in this direction suggesting display effect 1, an obtained ball display XF4 is displayed. The winning ball display XF4 is a display showing the winning ball during the big win, and in the example of FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), a direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggesting display performance 2 is a continuation of the direction suggesting display performance 1, and is carried out in the jackpot game state. In this direction suggesting display effect 2, the teammate character XF1, the direction suggesting display XF2, and the acquired ball display XF4 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggesting display XF2, the belt item XF11 moves along the arrow shaft portion of the direction display XF21. is performed.
This direction suggesting display effect 2 is executed until the jackpot game ends.

[Modification]
In the above special direction suggesting effects A to C, the display position of the direction suggesting display XF2 is fixed, but it is not limited to this, and the direction suggesting display XF2 may also move while the belt item XF11 moves. .
Further, the direction display XF21 may also move in the direction indication display XF2. Further, in the direction suggesting display XF2, the direction display XF21 may blink. Further, in the direction suggestive display XF2, the belt item XF11 may move to a position overlapping the direction display XF21. In this case, the belt item XF11 may be in front of the direction display XF21. Also, the belt item XF11 may be behind the direction display XF21. In the direction suggesting display XF2, when another image (such as a character (or teammate character XF1)) moves to a superimposed position, the direction suggesting display XF2 is displayed in front of the other image. In other words, the other image moves behind the directional indication XF2. In the direction indication display XF2, the belt item XF11, which is a part of the friend character XF1, is included. , may include parts of other characters or other images.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned special direction suggesting effect B, a normal medium effect is performed in which the friend character XF1 is displayed in a normal game state relatively disadvantageous to the player, and then a right-handed stroke is suggested in a time-saving game state relatively advantageous to the player. A direction suggesting display XF2 including a direction display XF21 and a part of the teammate character XF1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the direction suggesting display XF2 includes a part of the teammate character XF1 displayed in the normal game state, which is relatively disadvantageous for the player. , the friendly character XF1 that appeared in the normal game state can be recognized and the mysterious atmosphere can be felt even during the time saving, and the time saving can be enjoyed more. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the above-mentioned special direction suggesting effect C, a time-saving medium effect is performed in which the friend character XF1 is displayed in the normal game state, which is relatively disadvantageous for the player, and thereafter, during the big win game, a direction display XF21 suggesting the launching direction of the game ball. , and XF11 representing a part of the teammate character XF1. According to this configuration, the direction suggesting display XF2 includes a part of the teammate character XF1 displayed in the normal game state, which is relatively disadvantageous for the player. , the player can recognize the friendly character XF1 appearing in the normal game state even during the jackpot game, feel a mysterious atmosphere, and enjoy the jackpot game more. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first image,
The second display effect is a direction indication display,
The direction suggesting display includes a direction display suggesting the launch direction of the game ball and a second image representing a part of the first image,
After the first display effect, the second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display effect is performed in a second game state out of a first game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second game state that is relatively advantageous to the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The first display effect is performed in the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display effect is performed during a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XF-2 to XF-4,
wherein the first image is a character;
A gaming machine characterized by:

131 to 133, the sound effect productions A to C will be described below. In FIGS. 131 and 133, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. is therefore omitted.

This production sound effect production can be executed over a plurality of variable productions (variable displays) by decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a command to start a variable effect, a pre-determining command), and when the instruction to execute a sound effect effect is included, the ROM 103 corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7 to display the image on the display screen 7a.

In addition, the background image (referred to as "specific background image") used in the production of sound effects is a specific image that is not usually included in the background image. It has become. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an undersea image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, the sound effect production A will be explained first, and the sound effect production B and the sound effect production C will be explained in order.

[Production sound effect production A]
The production sound effect production A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the production sound effect presentation A. FIG. The production sound effect production A is performed over a plurality of variable productions (variable displays) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 131(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad, and the third No pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two pending icons that are stocked without being digested.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the holding icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be easily discerned by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)). Note that the icons also include specific icons having various characters. These specific icons are white spherical icons in which various characters appear and are used in the production of sound effects. , or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 131(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image, and when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, after that, during the variable effect (during the variable display), the As shown in 131(B), a game ball enters the first start port 20 and a white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the third reservation display position 9Ad (a look-ahead effect is performed in relation to this ball entry). However, there was no change from the white spherical pending icon 9A to another icon, resulting in the white spherical pending icon 9A). At this time, the speaker 67 emits the first winning sound "Pyon" in relation to the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 . That is, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the variable performance (during the variable display) and the performance sound effect performance A is started by the look-ahead performance, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), the fourth A pending icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as a "specific pending icon 9A") having an ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad. At this time, in relation to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a second winning sound called "Kurukuru" different from the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67, and after that, following the second winning sound, A first effect sound “OARO”, which is the name of the character CRA, is played from the speaker 67 . That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is played from the speaker 67 subsequently.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

After that, due to the pending digestion, the variable effect (variable display) continues, and the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad in FIGS. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. , and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3".

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131(E), when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second The specific pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the speaker 67 starts playing the second production sound, which is the theme song of the teammate character CRA.

Then, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. As shown in F), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, flashes as the name image TIL. Accompanied by FH, it is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a for the first display period (for example, 1 second). When switching from the city image THG1 as the normal background image to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed only for a short period of time. In some cases, the city image THG1 becomes transparent and can be seen behind the space image THG2.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific suspended icon 9A are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 131(G). The space image THG2, which is the specified background image, is gradually switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. Continue the variable effect (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(H), the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1". If the stop display results in a loss, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. At this time, the second effect sound, which is the theme music of the ally character CRA, stops flowing from the speaker 67 . That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131(I), when the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRA is displayed. A second production sound, which is a tune, starts to flow from the speaker 67 . Although the output of this second effect sound was stopped immediately before, it is not restarted from the point where it progressed to just before the stop, but is restarted from the beginning.

Then, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRA "OARO" is displayed as the name image TIL. Accompanied by a flash FH, it is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a for a second display period (for example, 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. In the second display period (for example, 4 seconds), unlike the first display period (for example, 1 second), the space image THG2 is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second). is displayed for a longer period of time, the space image THG2 does not become translucent and becomes opaque, preventing the city image THG1 from being seen through behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, a third effect sound "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is displayed. flows from the speaker 67 . The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. The third effect sound has the same content as the first effect sound ("OARO", which is the name of the teammate character CRA), but has a different intonation. The difference is that the first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is excessively intonation and impressive. In addition, the volume of the third effect sound is larger than the volume of the first effect sound, and the contents conveyed by the first effect sound and the third effect sound ("OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA) Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound give a different impression to the player.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. A space image THG2 is switched to a lunar surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the friendly character CRA is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The teammate character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and visibility is not hindered.

Then, in FIG. 131(I), as a specific image related to the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the friend character CRA, started to flow from the speaker 67, the second effect sound lyric image TG (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the friend character CRA) is displayed. ) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as a part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, for the part "Starting from here one day..." (13 hiragana characters), the lyrics image TG is First, the lyric image TG1 of "one day" is displayed at the first position (to the left of the teammate character CRA) on the display screen 7a, and then the lyric image TG2 of "ni" is displayed in time with the rhythm of the second effect sound. Displayed at the second position (upper left of teammate character CRA) on display screen 7a, next, lyric image TG3 "from here" is displayed at third position (right of teammate character CRA) on display screen 7a, then Then, a lyric image TG4 reading "Start" is displayed at the fourth position (upper right of the teammate character CRA) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound ends, as shown in FIG. 131(L), the moon image THG3, which is the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, changes again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. The switching and the variable effect (variable display) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When a fireball is shot toward the variable icon 9C so as to draw a circular arc, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C having the ally character CRA to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon. Change to 9C. As a result, the production sound effect production A ends.

The size of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon is the same as the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C in FIGS. 131(A) to (G). After the production sound effect production A, various productions may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is made after that. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, the game is lost.

[Production sound effect production B]
Next, the production sound effect production B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the production sound effect presentation B. FIG. The production sound effect production B is performed over a plurality of variable productions (variable displays) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the holding icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be easily discerned by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)). Note that the icons also include specific icons having various characters. These specific icons are white spherical icons in which various characters appear and are used in the production of sound effects. , or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 132(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image, and when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, after that, during the variable effect (during the variable display), the As shown in 132(B), a game ball enters the first start port 20, and a white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the second reservation display position 9Ad (a look-ahead effect associated with this ball entry is displayed). However, there was no change from the white spherical pending icon 9A to another icon, resulting in the white spherical pending icon 9A). At this time, the speaker 67 emits the first winning sound "Pyon" in relation to the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 . That is, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the variable performance (during the variable display) and the performance sound effect performance B is started by the look-ahead performance, as shown in FIG. 132(C), the third A suspension icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as a "specific suspension icon 9A") having an ally character CRB as a specific icon is displayed at the suspension display position 9Ad. At this time, in relation to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, the second winning sound "Kurukuru" different from the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67. A first effect sound “OARO-B”, which is the name of the character CRB, is played from the speaker 67 . That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is played from the speaker 67 subsequently.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

After that, due to the holding digestion, the variable effect (variable display) continues, and the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad in FIGS. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. , and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3".

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132(E), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second The specific pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the speaker 67 starts playing the second production sound, which is the theme song of the teammate character CRB.

Then, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. As shown in F), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRB "OARO-B" is displayed in the name image TIL. is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a for a first display period (for example, 1 second) accompanied by a flash FH. When switching from the city image THG1 as the normal background image to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed only for a short period of time. In some cases, the city image THG1 becomes transparent and can be seen behind the space image THG2.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific suspended icon 9A are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 132(G). The space image THG2, which is the specified background image, is gradually switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. Continue the variable effect (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(H), the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1". If the stop display results in a loss, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. At this time, the second effect sound, which is the theme music of the teammate character CRB, stops flowing from the speaker 67 . That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132(I), when the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRB is displayed. A second production sound, which is a tune, starts to flow from the speaker 67 . Although the output of this second effect sound was stopped just before, it is not restarted from the point where it progressed to just before the stop, but is restarted from the beginning.

Then, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB, is displayed as the name image. The TIL is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a accompanied by the flash FH for a second display period (for example, 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second). is displayed for a longer period of time, the space image THG2 does not become translucent and becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 is not visible behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, a third display of "OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB, is displayed. A production sound flows from the speaker 67 . The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. The third effect sound has the same content as the first effect sound ("OARO-B", which is the name of the teammate character CRB), but has a different intonation. The difference is that the first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is excessively intonation and impressive. In addition, the volume of the third effect sound is larger than the volume of the first effect sound, and the contents conveyed by the first and third effect sounds ("OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB) ) are the same, the player is given a different impression between the first effect sound and the third effect sound.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. A space image THG2 is switched to a lunar surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the friendly character CRB is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The teammate character CRB is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the teammate character CRB, and visibility is not hindered.

Then, in FIG. 132(I), as a specific image related to the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the friend character CRB, which has started to flow from the speaker 67, a lyric image TG of the second effect sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the friend character CRB) is displayed. ) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as a part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRB, for the part (12 characters in hiragana) that reads, "I'm still hot and passionate...", the lyrics image TG is displayed in the second First, the lyric image TG1 of "hot" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the first position (upper left of the teammate character CRB), and then the lyric image TG2 of "passion" is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the sound effect. The lyric image TG3 is displayed at the second position (lower right of teammate character CRB), then the lyric image TG3 of "wo" is displayed at the third position (right of teammate character CRB) on the display screen 7a, and then "mada" is displayed. The lyric image TG4 is displayed at the fourth position (upper right of the teammate character CRB) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound ends, as shown in FIG. 132(L), the moon image THG3, which is the specific background image, displayed on the display screen 7a again changes to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. The switching and the variable effect (variable display) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When a fireball is shot toward the variable icon 9C so as to draw an arc, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C having the friend character CRB to the smiling sphere blue variable icon 9C. Change. As a result, the production sound effect production B ends.

It should be noted that the size of the blue smiley sphere icon is the same as the size of the white sphere variation icon 9C in FIGS. 132(A) to 132(G). After the production sound effect production B, various productions may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a big win is made and then. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, the game is lost.

[Production sound effect production C]
Next, the production sound effect production C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the production sound effect production C. FIG. The production sound effect production C is performed over a plurality of variable productions (variable display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad, and the third No pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two pending icons that are stocked without being digested.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the holding icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be easily discerned by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)). Note that the icons also include specific icons having various characters. These specific icons are white spherical icons in which various characters appear and are used in the production of sound effects. , or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 133(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image, and when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, after that, during the variable effect (during the variable display), the As shown in 133(B), a game ball enters the first start port 20, and a white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the third reservation display position 9Ad (a look-ahead effect associated with this ball entry is displayed). (Although it was done, there was no change from the white spherical pending icon 9A to another icon, resulting in a white spherical pending icon 9A). At this time, the speaker 67 emits the first winning sound "Pyon" in relation to the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 . That is, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the variable performance (during the variable display) and the performance sound effect performance C is started by the look-ahead performance, as shown in FIG. 133(C), the fourth A pending icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as a "specific pending icon 9A") having an ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad. At this time, in relation to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a second winning sound called "Kurukuru" different from the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67, and after that, following the second winning sound, A first effect sound “OARO”, which is the name of the character CRA, is played from the speaker 67 . That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is played from the speaker 67 subsequently.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

After that, due to the holding digestion, the variable effect (variable display) continues, and the holding icon 9A displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad in FIGS. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. , and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3".

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133(E), when the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second The specific pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the speaker 67 starts playing the second production sound, which is the theme song of the teammate character CRA.

Then, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. As shown in F), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, flashes as the name image TIL. Accompanied by FH, it is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a for the first display period (for example, 1 second). When switching from the city image THG1 as the normal background image to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed for a short period of time, and the space image THG2 is half displayed. In some cases, the city image THG1 becomes transparent and can be seen behind the space image THG2.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific suspended icon 9A are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 133(G). The space image THG2, which is the specified background image, is gradually switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. Continue the variable effect (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(H), the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "1". If the stop display results in a loss, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. At this time, the second effect sound, which is the theme music of the ally character CRA, stops flowing from the speaker 67 . That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133(I), when the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRA is displayed. A second production sound, which is a tune, starts to flow from the speaker 67 . Although the output of this second effect sound was stopped just before, it is not restarted from the point where it progressed to just before the stop, but is restarted from the beginning.

Then, a variable effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is displayed as the name image TIL. Accompanied by a flash FH, it is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a for a second display period (for example, 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second). is displayed for a longer period of time, the space image THG2 does not become translucent and becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 is not visible behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, a third effect sound "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is displayed. flows from the speaker 67 . The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. The third effect sound has the same content as the first effect sound ("OARO", which is the name of the teammate character CRA), but has a different intonation. The difference is that the first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is excessively intonation and impressive. In addition, the volume of the third effect sound is larger than the volume of the first effect sound, and the contents conveyed by the first effect sound and the third effect sound ("OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA) Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound give a different impression to the player.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. A space image THG2 is switched to a lunar surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the friendly character CRA is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The teammate character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and visibility is not hindered.

Then, in FIG. 133(I), a lyric image TG of the second effect sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the friend character CRA) is used as a specific image related to the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the friend character CRA, started to flow from the speaker 67. ) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, here, as part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, instead of the part "Starting from here one day..." (13 hiragana characters), "Soon (13 hiragana characters), and the lyrics image TG is changed to the first position of the display screen 7a with the lyrics image TG1 saying "Soon soon" in sync with the rhythm of the second effect sound. (to the left of the teammate character CRA), then the lyric image TG2 of "Atari" is displayed at the second position (upper left of the ally character CRA) on the display screen 7a, and then the lyric image TG3 of "GA" is displayed. is displayed on the display screen 7a at the third position (on the right side of the teammate character CRA), and then the lyric image TG4 of "coming" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the fourth position (on the upper right side of the teammate character CRA). Even if the contents of the lyrics are partially replaced, the number of hiragana characters is the same (13 characters). In addition, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of a big win to the player by means of this replaced content.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound ends, as shown in FIG. 133(L), the moon image THG3, which is the specific background image, displayed on the display screen 7a again changes to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. The switching and variable performance (variable display) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When a fireball is released toward the variable icon 9C so as to draw an arc, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C, and the smiling sphere having rainbow colors is changed from the variable icon 9C having the friendly character CRA. Change to icon 9C. As a result, the production sound effect presentation C is completed.

It should be noted that the size of the smiley sphere icon having seven colors (rainbow) is about twice the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C in FIGS. 133(A) to 133(G). When the variation icon 9C of the smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow) is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the big win is strong, and after the performance sound effect performance C, various performances may be further continued. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same pattern, a big win is achieved and then a big win game (big win presentation) is started.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effects of the production sound effects production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the sound effect production A of FIG. 131, the sound effect production B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect production C of FIG. 20 (ball entrance), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker 67 capable of outputting a plurality of types of effect sounds. mouth) corresponding to the specific holding icon 9A among the holding icons 9A displayed in relation to the entry of the game ball into the mouth) (the name of the friend character CRA, the name of the friend character 131 (C) for sound effect production A, FIG. 132 (C) for sound effect production B, and FIG. 133 for sound effect production C (C)), after the first production, the specific hold icon 9A is displayed as the variable icon 9C, and the second production sound (the theme song of the ally character CRA, the production sound effect 131 (I) to (K) in production sound effect production A, and FIGS. 132 (I) to (K) in production sound effect production B. , and (I) to (K) in FIG. According to this configuration, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (entrance) and the specific holding icon increases as the holding icon, the first effect sound flows from the speaker, and the specific holding icon is the variable icon Then, since the second effect sound flows from the speaker, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect by the first effect sound and the second effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, before the second production in the production sound effect production A in FIG. 131, the production sound effect production B in FIG. 132, and the production sound effect production C in FIG. is output and the output of the second effect sound is stopped until the specific pending icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C (Fig. 131 (E) in the effect sound effect effect A, 132(E), and in the production sound effect production C, FIG. 133(E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, the second effect sound that is played when the specific pending icon becomes the variable icon is played as a notice before the specific pending icon becomes the variable icon, so that the player can enjoy the effect that will be developed from now on. There is a heightened sense of expectation for

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second production in the production sound effect production A in FIG. 131, the production sound effect production B in FIG. 132, and the production sound effect production C in FIG. 133, the second production sound is output. In addition, a third effect sound (the name of the friend character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the name of the friend character CRB in the effect sound effect effect B) can be output. According to this configuration, when the second effect sound is played, the third effect sound overlaps, so compared to the case where the second effect sound and the third effect sound are played independently, each effect is different. A player can be provided with a performance sound having an impact associated with the impression of the sound, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second production in the production sound effect production A in FIG. 131, the production sound effect production B in FIG. 132, and the production sound effect production C in FIG. A lyric image TG (specific image) related to the . According to this configuration, when the second effect sound is played, the specific image related to the second effect sound is displayed, so the player imagines the progress of the second effect sound and the specific image to be displayed. It is possible to imagine the progress of the specific image and imagine the second effect sound that flows, and the second effect sound and the specific image complement each other to provide the player with an attractive effect. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second production in the production sound effect production A in FIG. 131, the production sound effect production B in FIG. 132, and the production sound effect production C in FIG. A lyric image TG (specific image) can be displayed in accordance with this. According to this configuration, the relationship between the second effect sound and the lyrics image TG (specific image) can be emphasized in a more comprehensible manner.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the lyric image TG (specific image) in the sound effect presentation A of FIG. 131, the sound effect presentation B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect presentation C of FIG. It is composed of a plurality of character images. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the expression method of the lyric image TG (specific image), and to individually emphasize the character image of the lyric image TG (specific image) to attract the player's attention.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the second production in the production sound effect production A in FIG. 131, the production sound effect production B in FIG. 132, and the production sound effect production C in FIG. 131 (L) for the sound effect production A, FIG. 132 (L) for the sound effect production B, and FIG. 133 (L) for the sound effect production C). It has become. According to this configuration, since the change of the variable icon may occur after the second effect sound is finished, the expectation of the change of the change icon can be maintained while the second effect sound is playing. .

[Modification]
Modified examples of the production sound effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
131 sound effect production A, sound effect production B shown in FIG. 132, and sound effect production C shown in FIG. . In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the sound effect presentation A of FIG. 131, the sound effect presentation B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect presentation C of FIG. 133, the lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the lyric image TG, an image related to the second sound effect (the theme song of the teammate character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the theme song of the teammate character CRB in the sound effect effect B) may be used. For example, a movie, a video broadcast on television, or one scene of these in which the second effect sound is played can be mentioned.

[Modification 3]
131 (I) ~ (K) sound effect production A, Figure 132 (I) ~ (K) sound effect production B, FIG. 2 sound effect (the theme song of the friend character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the theme song of the friend character CRB in the effect sound effect effect B) is played from the speaker 67 to the end, after which the change icon 9C changes. was However, if the second effect sound ends in the middle, the variation icon 9C may not change. In this case, the white spherical variation icon 9C with the lowest expectation of winning is obtained.

[Modification 3]
In the production sound effect production A in FIG. 131 (C), the production sound effect production B in FIG. 132 (C), and the production sound effect production C in FIG. 20, a specific hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a by a look-ahead effect. In B, the name of the ally character CRB) was played from the speaker 67 . However, the specific pending icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a and the first effect sound may not be played from the speaker 67. FIG. In this case, the second prize winning sound "kurukuru" different from the first prize winning sound may be played from the speaker 67, or may not be played.

[Modification 4]
The lyric image TG (specific image) in the sound effect production A of FIG. 131 (K), the sound effect production B of FIG. 132 (K), and the sound effect production C of FIG. It was composed of character images and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lyric image TG (specific image) may be rotated, enlarged or reduced in size. In this way, it is possible to increase variations in the expression method of the lyric image TG (specific image), and it is also possible to individually emphasize the character image of the lyric image TG (specific image) to attract the player's attention.

[Modification 5]
131(K), the sound effect production B of FIG. 132(K), and the sound effect production C of FIG. An icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the pending icon 9A exists, it may of course disappear from the display screen 7a. This is because the variable icon 9C is used as an advance notice ("variable effect" that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during variable display), so it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the display screen 7a. It is from. In addition, since the variable display position 9Cd also indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not always have to be displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because 9A indicates the position where 9A is displayed (display position), so it does not always have to be displayed on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the reserved icon 9A indicates the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used in the game, and therefore needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown) respectively. Since the pending icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a. 131(K), the sound effect presentation B of FIG. 132(K), and the sound effect presentation C of FIG. 133(K) are displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the second sound effect. This can contribute to drawing attention to the lyric image TG to be displayed.

[Modification 6]
In the sound effect production A of FIG. 131 (L), the sound effect production B of FIG. 132 (L), and the sound effect production C of FIG. An icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd and the holding display position 9Ad may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the pending icon 9A exists, it may of course disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, only the variable icon 9C among the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, when a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C and contributes to attracting attention to the change of the variable icon 9C. Since the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the reserved display position 9Ad is also reserved. Since it indicates the position (display position) where the icon 9A is displayed, it does not always have to be displayed on the display screen 7a, so the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are erased from the display screen 7a. be able to. On the other hand, the reserved icon 9A indicates the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used in the game, and therefore needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown) respectively. Since the pending icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
131 (I) ~ (K) sound effect production A, Figure 132 (I) ~ (K) sound effect production B, FIG. 2 sound effects (a theme song for the friend character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and a theme song for the friend character CRB in the effect sound effect effect B) were played from the speaker 67 . However, the second effect sound may not be played from the speaker 67 .

[Modification 8]
131 (I) ~ (K) sound effect production A, Figure 132 (I) ~ (K) sound effect production B, FIG. During the output of the second sound effect (the theme song for the friendly character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the theme song for the friendly character CRB in the sound effect effect B), the third sound effect (sound effect effects A, In C, the name of the friend character CRA, and in the effect sound effect presentation B, the name of the friend character CRB) were played from the speaker 67. However, the third effect sound may not be played from the speaker 67 .

[Modification 9]
In the sound effect production A of FIG. 131(L), the sound effect production B of FIG. 132(L), and the sound effect production C of FIG. 133(L), the change icon 9C is changed. However, the variation icon 9C may not be changed. In this case, the white spherical variation icon 9C with the lowest expectation of winning is obtained.

[Modification 10]
131(L), the sound effect production B of FIG. 132(L), and the sound effect production C of FIG. The first special figure suspension based on the number and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. was Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, which makes it intuitive and easy to understand. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the performance sound effect presentation is started, the specific suspension icon 9A having the teammate character CRA as the specific icon is displayed at the suspension display position 9Ad. As a result, the player may misunderstand the number (the number of held balls) displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as a countdown until the specific held icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number representing the above-mentioned number of held balls as a numerical value. This eliminates the possibility that the number displayed as the number of reserved balls is misunderstood by the player as a countdown until the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. The numbers displayed as numerical values can be difficult to discern due to being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 11]
Sound effect production A in FIG. 131, sound effect production B in FIG. 132, and sound effect production C in FIG. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker capable of outputting a plurality of types of effect sounds,
A first effect capable of outputting a first effect sound corresponding to a specific hold icon among the hold icons displayed in relation to the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the specific pending icon is displayed as the variable icon and a second effect sound can be output can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
Before the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect of outputting the second effect sound and stopping the output of the second effect sound until the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-1 or aspect D4-2,
In the second effect, a third effect sound can be output while the second effect sound is being output.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
In the second effect, a specific image related to the second effect sound can be further displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-4,
In the second effect, the specific image can be displayed in time with the rhythm of the second effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-5,
The specific image is composed of a single or a plurality of character images,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After the second effect, a fourth effect of changing the variable icon can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The lyric image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. FIG. This lyric image effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the lyric image effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Lyrics image production A]
134 is a diagram for explaining the lyric image effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 134(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 134(D), (E) and (F), the lyrics display effect is executed. The lyric display effect is an effect of displaying a lyric image on the display screen 7a in time with the music played during the battle effect. A plurality of lyric images are sequentially displayed according to the progress of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyric "Let's live romantically" is sequentially displayed with a plurality of lyric images.

First, as shown in FIG. 134(D), the lyric display effect (early stage) is executed. In the lyric display effect (previous term), a lyric image KG1 of "romantic" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In addition, since the battle effect is also continued, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the lyric display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyric display effect (middle term), a lyric image KG2 of "raw" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the lyric image KG2 of "raw" is a lyric image of one character, which is larger than the characters forming the lyric image KG1 of the lyric display effect (previous term). Also, the lyric image KG2 of "raw" is displayed in a rotated state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyric display effect (second term), a lyric image KG3 of "Let's come" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters that compose the lyric image KG3 of "Let's come" are smaller than the characters that compose the lyric image KG2 of the lyric display effect (middle term).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed. When the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image "defeated" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the middle left and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "5".

[Lyric image production B]
135 is a diagram for explaining the lyric image effect B. FIG. The lyric image effect B is another example of the lyric image effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 135(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 135(D), 135(E) and 135(F), a lyric display effect is executed. The lyric display effect is an effect of displaying a lyric image on the display screen 7a in time with the music played during the battle effect. A plurality of lyric images are sequentially displayed according to the progress of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are sequentially displayed using a plurality of lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(D), the lyric display effect (early stage) is executed. In the lyric display effect (previous term), a lyric image KG1 of "romance" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In this case, the characters "Ro" and "Ma" forming the lyric image KG1 are transparent except for their outlines, so that the teammate character CRA can be visually recognized as a background image. In addition, since the battle effect is also continued, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the lyric display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyric display effect (middle term), a lyric image KG2 of "Tick ni" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a. Also, a lyric image KG3 of "raw" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters "Tick ni" forming the lyrics image KG2 are smaller than the characters forming the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display effect (previous term). , to the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the lyric image KG3 of "raw" is a lyric image of a single character, which is larger than the characters forming the lyric image KG1 of the lyric display effect (previous term). , is displayed, it rotates counterclockwise as indicated by an arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyric display effect (second term), a lyric image KG4 of "Let's come" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters that make up the lyric image KG4 of "Let's come" are larger than the characters that make up the lyric image KG2 of the lyric display effect (middle term), and are smaller than the characters that make up the lyric image KG3. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed. When the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image "defeated" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "5".

[Lyrics image production C]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the lyric image effect C. FIG. The lyric image effect C is another example of the lyric image effects A and B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 136(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern temporarily stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle production, victory is achieved when the ally character CRA wins. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 136D, 136E, and 136F, a lyric display effect is executed. The lyric display effect is an effect of displaying a lyric image on the display screen 7a in time with the music played during the battle effect. A plurality of lyric images are sequentially displayed according to the progress of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyric "Let's live romantically" is sequentially displayed with a plurality of lyric images.

First, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the lyric display effect (early stage) is executed. In the lyric display effect (previous term), a lyric image KG1 of "romantically" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In addition, since the battle effect is also continued, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the lyric display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyric display effect (middle term), a lyric image KG2 of "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyric display effect (second term), a lyric image KG3 of "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the lyric image KG2 of "Let's live" displayed in the lyric display effect (middle term) is gradually enlarged and displayed to become the lyric image KG3. That is, the lyrics image KG3 is enlarged after being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect for notifying whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG of "Victory" is displayed. When the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image "defeated" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, it is shown that all of the left and right middle production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined and stopped at "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the lyric image presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when displaying the lyrics "Let's live romantically" as a plurality of lyrics images, it is possible to display the sequentially displayed lyrics images in various modes (Fig. 134(D)(E)(F), Figures 135(D)(E)(F), Figures 136(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, the music to be output can be enjoyed more, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric image "raw" in a rotated state (FIG. 134(E)). According to this configuration, since the display of the lyric image is changed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display lyrics images in various sizes (FIGS. 134(D), (E), (F), FIGS. 135(D), (E), (F) ). According to this configuration, since the display of the lyric image is changed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a lyric image composed of one character (FIGS. 134(E) and 135(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the display of the lyric image more impactful, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric image transparently or translucently so that the background image can be visually recognized (Fig. 135(D)). According to this configuration, the background image can be enjoyed together with the lyric image, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, it is possible to change the mode of the lyrics image (FIGS. 135(E), 136(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, since the lyric image changes after being displayed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, the lyrics image can be moved (FIG. 135(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the display of the lyric image more impactful, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, the lyrics image can be rotated (FIG. 135(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the display of the lyric image more impactful, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, the size of the lyrics image can be changed (FIGS. 136(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the display of the lyric image more impactful, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of the lyric image effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, after the lyrics image is displayed, the display color of the lyrics image may be changed. For example, it is conceivable to change the display color of the lyric image according to the output of the music.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, the displayed lyric image is rotated about the front-rear axis (FIG. 135(E)). may

[Modification 3]
In the above, the production for the second special figure reservation is taken as an example, but it may be the production for the first special figure reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine that displays the lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyrics images in accordance with the output of the song,
In sequentially displaying the plurality of lyric images, it is possible to execute mode display effects for displaying the lyric images that are sequentially displayed in various modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1,
The mode display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyric image in a rotated state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-1 or aspect D5-2,
The mode display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyric image in various sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3,
The mode display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyric image composed of one character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-4,
The mode display effect includes a effect of displaying the lyric image transparently or semi-transparently so that the background image is visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-6]
A gaming machine that displays the lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyrics images in accordance with the output of the song,
In sequentially displaying the plurality of lyric images, after displaying the lyric images, it is possible to execute a mode change effect of changing the mode of the lyric images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-5,
In sequentially displaying the plurality of lyric images, after displaying the lyric images, it is possible to execute a mode change effect of changing the mode of the lyric images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-6 or aspect D5-7,
The mode change effect includes a effect of moving the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-8,
The mode change effect includes a effect of rotating the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-9,
The mode change effect includes a effect of changing the size of the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-11]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-10,
The mode change effect includes a effect of changing the display color of the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific area variable effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. FIG. 137 to 139, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front (front) side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. Some have been omitted.

This specific area variable effect is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and when the instruction to execute the specific area variable effect is included, the corresponding image is generated from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left side movable role 14L and the right side movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2. For example, the position of 14R and the emission mode are changed.

Here, the specific area variable effect A will be described first, and the specific area variable effect B and then the specific area variable effect C will be described in order.

[Specific area variable effect A]
Specific area variable effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect A. FIG. The specific area variable effect A is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable area from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. .

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in FIG. 137(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 137(B), a flash FH is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L that are in the process of variable production (variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8L, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed state. The flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered with the flash FH and visibility is not hindered.

After that, when the flash FH gradually disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. Advance (move) from the home position toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in a direction to approach each other), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployed position)) , the left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the right side decoration that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. , and are combined to form one decorative member (unified accessory) having a ring-shaped left ornamental portion of the left movable accessory 14L and a right ornamental portion of the right movable accessory 14R.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( hereinafter referred to as a “circular area”). A teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the variable icon 9C is kept displayed on the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R separate from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory 14L moves. 14R retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, suddenly, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the number "1" and are displayed large while approaching from the rear to the front of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137(D), A temporary stop display is performed at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in each of the variable regions, and a reach is formed. At this time, the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C remains hidden from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(E), when the left decorative symbol 8L with the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed starts to move downward in its own variation area, the number "2" is displayed from behind the left decorative symbol 8L. " appears, and the left decorative symbol 8L with the number "2" starts to move upward in its own variation area. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed starts to move upward in its own variation area, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" appears from behind the right decorative pattern 8R, and the number The right decorative pattern 8R of "2" starts to move downward in its own variation area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(F), the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" completes its movement downward in its own variation area and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the number "2" is displayed. In the state in which the left decorative pattern 8L has moved upward in its own variable area and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, each appears independently in the normal size (hereinafter referred to as "normal size ) is smaller (for example, about one size smaller). On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" completes moving upward in its own variable area and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" is displayed in its own variable area. When the downward movement is completed and the display screen 7a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" are compared to the normal size. smaller (for example, about one size smaller). As a result, the first reach is formed on the rising right line of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped displayed on the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped displayed on the upper right. , The second reach is formed on the right downward line by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right. Reach.

In FIG. 137(F), a double reach is formed by two left decorative designs 8L and two right decorative designs 8R. A square-shaped first specific area is formed by connecting the vertex images. In other words, a first specific region surrounded by four vertex images is formed. When the first specific area is formed, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again from the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed within the first specific area. Since the middle decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it will be visually recognized as an unclear image within the first specific area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left jumps out of its own variation area toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc. When the left decorative pattern 8L starts to move, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" appears from behind the left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" stays in place and is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower right corner jumps out of its own variable area toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw a circular arc, this right decorative pattern 8R starts moving. The right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" appears from behind, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" stays on the spot and is temporarily stopped.

In FIG. 137(G), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped on the upper left is switched to the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3", and the number "2" temporarily stopped on the lower right. Since the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" has been switched to the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3", the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left, and the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower left. , the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper right as the vertex image. Then, a quadrangular second specific region is formed by connecting the four vertex images. In other words, a first specific region surrounded by four vertex images is formed. This second specific area has the same size as the first specific area.

The left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left corner jumps out of its own variable area toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right corner. Since the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" has started to move toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, it jumps out of its own variation area and starts to move, so the left decorative pattern of the number "2" that started to move 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" which started to move are set as the second specific area, the size of the second specific area is compared with the size of the first specific area. grow larger.

Since the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is performed within the first specific region, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued also within the second specific region. . Since the middle decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it will be visually recognized as an unclear image even in the second specific area. In addition, in the second specific area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued, but instead of this, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be erased from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(H), the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" jumps out of its own variation area, completes movement to the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, and temporarily moves toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a. In the stopped display state, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped displayed on the upper left, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped displayed near the center of the left side, and the temporarily stopped display displayed on the lower left. The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" drawn is smaller than the normal size (for example, about the size of the lid). In other words, it is smaller than when double reach is achieved. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" jumps out of its own variation area and moves to the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, The right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper right. 8R is smaller than the normal size (for example, about the size of the lid). In other words, it is smaller than when double reach is achieved. As a result, the first reach is formed on the rising right line of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped displayed on the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped displayed on the upper right. A second reach is formed on the lower right line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right. A third reach is formed on the horizontal line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped displayed near the center of the right side to form a triple reach. becomes.

In FIG. 137(H), a triple reach is formed by three left decorative designs 8L and three right decorative designs 8R. A hexagonal third specific region connecting the vertex images is formed. In other words, a third specific region surrounded by six vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of the first specific area (second specific area) and the third specific area, in FIG. It jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a as if drawn, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" appears behind the left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" appears. The decorative pattern 8L stays on the spot and is temporarily stopped, and on the other hand, the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" moves toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw a circular arc, and moves to its own variable area. The right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" appears behind the right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" stays in place and is temporarily stopped. The size of the 3 specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area (second specific area). Although the third specific area has a hexagonal shape when the six vertex images are connected, it actually has a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape) passing through the six vertex images.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" is displayed in the third specific area in the display mode in the center of the display screen 7a while increasing in size from the rear to the front. appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped and displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, it is larger than the normal size by about a quarter). Then, the temporary stop-displayed middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "2" is displayed in the third specific area in a display manner that increases from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a and approaches the front. appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped and displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, it is larger than the normal size by about a quarter). Then, the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "2" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the third specific area in a display mode that increases from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a and approaches the front. appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped and displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, it is larger than the normal size by about a quarter).

When the temporary stop-displayed number "3" middle decorative pattern 8C moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a, it is lost and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends. Then, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable performance (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R.

Following FIG. 137(K), as shown in FIG. 137(L), at the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 respectively. It advances (moves) again from the home position toward the (forward) central advanced position (in a direction toward each other), and at the front (forward) central position (advanced position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, the left movable role A left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the object 14L and a right decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form one decorative member (unified accessory) having an annular shape. At this time, the three left decorative symbols 8L, the three right decorative symbols 8R, and the middle decorative symbols 8C disappear from the display screen 7a, while the variation icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a. ing.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, an image corresponding to the circular area formed in the ring is displayed. A display screen 7a of the device 7 displays an ally character CRA. By the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the appearance of the teammate character CRA displayed in the circular area, the player can be notified of the big win.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R separate from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory 14L moves. 14R retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are larger than the normal size (for example, about the size of the lid is larger than the normal size). ), and are arranged at the central position of each variable area, and the numbers "3" are arranged on a horizontal line and temporarily stopped. At this time, if the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "3", and is stopped and displayed, it is lost, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable performance (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R.

Following FIG. 137(M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "3", a big win is achieved, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. . When the jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R.

In addition, in FIG. 137(H), a quadruple reach may be formed after a triple reach is formed. In this case, when the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left corner jumps out of its own variation area toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, and starts to move, this left The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" appears from behind the decorative pattern 8L, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped, and the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side. ” starts to move toward the lower center of the left side. On the other hand, when the right decoration pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right corner jumps out of its own variation area and starts to move toward the bottom center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw a circular arc, this right decoration. The right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" appears from behind the pattern 8R, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped, and the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side. starts to move toward the upper center of the right side.

When the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" jumps out of its own variation area and moves to the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" is displayed on the display screen 7a. , and is displayed as a temporary stop. In this state, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" temporarily stopped is displayed on the upper left, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" is displayed temporarily stopped near the upper center of the left side, and the temporarily stopped display is displayed near the lower center of the left side. The left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed temporarily and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower left are smaller than the normal size (for example, about half the circumference of the lid). there is In other words, it is smaller than it was when triple reach was achieved. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" jumps out of its own variation area and moves to the bottom center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" is displayed. When the movement to the upper center of the right side of the screen 7a is completed, a temporary stop display is displayed. In this state, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower right, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed near the lower center of the right side, and the temporary stop display is displayed near the upper center of the right side. The right decorative pattern 8R of the displayed number "2" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right are smaller than the normal size (for example, about half the circumference of the lid). there is In other words, it is smaller than it was when triple reach was achieved. As a result, the first reach is formed on the first upward right line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped displayed on the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped displayed on the upper right. A second reach is formed on the first lower right line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right. On the second upward right line formed by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped near the lower center of the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped near the upper center of the right side. A third reach is formed, and a left decorative pattern 8L of the number ``3'' temporarily stopped near the upper center of the left side and a right decorative pattern 8R of the number ``3'' temporarily stopped displayed near the lower center of the right side form the second reach. A fourth reach is formed on the downward sloping line, forming a quadruple reach.

In this way, the quadruple reach is formed by the four left decorative designs 8L and the four right decorative designs 8R, and if the four left decorative designs 8L and the four right decorative designs 8R are used as vertex images, respectively, eight vertex images are formed. are connected to form a fourth octagonal specific region. In other words, a fourth specific region surrounded by eight vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of this fourth specific area and the third specific area formed by the above-described triple reach, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed appears to draw an arc on the display screen. It jumped out of its own variation area toward the upper center of the left side of 7a and started moving, and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" appeared from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and was temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side. The number "2" starts to move toward the lower center of the left side, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped and displayed, while the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern of the number "3" is displayed. As 8R draws an arc, it jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the bottom center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" appears behind this right decorative pattern 8R, The number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the right side starts to move toward the upper center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped. The size is larger than the size of the third specific region. In other words, the first specific region (second specific region) formed by double reach, the third specific region formed by triple reach, and the fourth specific region formed by quadruple reach, in order of size. is getting bigger.

Expectations of winning are increasing in order of double reach, triple reach, and quadruple reach. In other words, double reach has four vertex images, triple reach has six vertex images, and quadruple reach has eight vertex images.

In addition, even in the fourth specific area formed by quadruple reach, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the middle decorative pattern 8C shown in FIGS. An effect is performed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.

[Specific area variable effect B]
Next, specific area variable effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining specific area variable effect B. FIG. The specific area variable effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 138(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. .

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in FIG. 138(A), after that, as shown in FIG. Three effect images EG having a shape (hereinafter referred to as "round effect images EG") appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other.

Then, the three round effect images EG are kept at the positions where the three round effect images EG are arranged, and rotate counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, 2) toward the position of the adjacent round effect image EG. As shown in FIG. 138(C), the three round effect images EG are used as the vertex images, and a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images is formed. When the effect image EG has moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the three round effect images EG light up at once. As a result, the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round effect images EG form the first specific area having a triangular shape.

In the first specific area, the friend character CRA appears as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) immediately before the three round performance images EG emit light all at once. The straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of a clear image (an image in focus (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the first specific region can be easily seen. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the first straight line RG from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted within a specific area of .

After that, when the three round effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the teammate character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(D), an effect image EG having a triangular shape (hereinafter referred to as a "triangular effect image EG") is displayed in a display mode intruding into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Four of them appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the four triangular effect images EG are kept at the positions where the four triangular effect images EG are arranged, and are rotated clockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 138(E), four triangular effect images EG are used as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images is formed, and four triangles are formed. When the type effect image EG has moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the four triangular effect images EG emit light simultaneously only once. As a result, the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG form the second specific area having a square shape. The size of the second specific region is larger than the size of the first specific region formed in FIG. 138(C). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to heightening the player's sense of expectation for winning.

In the second specific area, immediately before the four triangular effect images EG light up all at once, the teammate character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of a clear image (a focused image (an unfocused image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the second specific region can be easily identified. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), a second straight line RG from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted within a specific area of . The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green instead of blue in FIG. 138(C) can also contribute to heightening the player's expectation of winning.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the teammate character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(F), an effect image EG having a square shape (hereinafter referred to as a "square effect image EG") is displayed in a display mode intruding into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five of them appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other. The size of the square effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect image EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the five square effect images EG are kept at the positions where the five square effect images EG are arranged, and then rotate counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, , 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. When the quadrangular effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five quadrangular effect images EG emit light simultaneously only once. As a result, the five straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five square effect images EG form a third specific area having a pentagonal shape. The size of the third specific region is larger than the size of the second specific region formed in FIG. 138(E). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to heightening the player's sense of expectation for winning.

In this embodiment, three vertex images are shown in FIGS. 138(B) and (C), four vertex images are shown in FIGS. 138(D) and (E), and five vertex images are shown in FIGS. , and the sizes of the first to third specific regions increase as the number of vertex images increases.

In the third specific area, immediately before the five square-shaped effect images EG light up all at once, the teammate character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a red color, and in the case of a clear image (a focused image (non-blurred image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the third specific region can be easily seen. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the third line from the straight line RG, which is the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted within a specific area of . The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, unlike the green in FIG. 138(E), can also contribute to heightening the player's expectation of winning.

After that, when the five square effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear image of the teammate character CRA and the five straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the third specific area disappears. As a result, the specific area variable effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "5". The change icon 9C is stopped and displayed, and is lost, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific Area Variable Effect C]
Next, specific area variable effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect C. FIG. The specific area variable effect C is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable area from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. .

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 139(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, as shown in FIG. Three effect images EG having a shape (hereinafter referred to as "round effect images EG") appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other.

Then, the three round effect images EG are kept at the positions where the three round effect images EG are arranged, and rotate counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, 2) toward the position of the adjacent round effect image EG. As shown in FIG. 139(C), three round effect images EG are used as vertex images, and a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images is formed. When the effect image EG has moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the three round effect images EG emit light simultaneously only once. As a result, the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three circular effect images EG form the first specific area having a triangular shape.

In the first specific area, the friend character CRA appears as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) immediately before the three round performance images EG emit light all at once. The straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of a clear image (an image in focus (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the first specific region can be easily seen. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the first straight line RG from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted within a specific area of .

After that, when the three round effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the teammate character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139(D), an effect image EG having a triangular shape (hereinafter referred to as a "triangular effect image EG") is displayed in a display mode intruding into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Four of them appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the four triangular effect images EG are kept at the positions where the four triangular effect images EG are arranged, and are rotated clockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 139(E), four triangular effect images EG are used as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images is formed, and four triangles are formed. When the type effect image EG has moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the four triangular effect images EG emit light simultaneously only once. As a result, the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG form the second specific area having a square shape. The size of the second specific region is larger than the size of the first specific region formed in FIG. 139(C). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to heightening the player's sense of expectation for winning.

In the second specific area, immediately before the four triangular effect images EG light up all at once, the teammate character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of a clear image (an image in focus (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the second specific region can be easily recognized. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), a second line from the straight line RG, which is the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted within a specific area of . The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green instead of blue in FIG. 139(C) can also contribute to heightening the player's expectation of winning.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the teammate character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139(F), an effect image EG having a square shape (hereinafter referred to as a "square effect image EG") is displayed in a display mode intruding into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five of them appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other. The size of the square effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect image EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the five square effect images EG are kept at the positions where the five square effect images EG are arranged, and then rotate counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, , 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. When the quadrangular effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five quadrangular effect images EG emit light simultaneously only once. As a result, the five straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five square effect images EG form a third specific area having a pentagonal shape. The size of the third specific region is larger than the size of the second specific region formed in FIG. 139(E). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to heightening the player's sense of expectation for winning.

In this embodiment, three vertex images are shown in FIGS. 139(B) and (C), four vertex images are shown in FIGS. 139(D) and (E), and five vertex images are shown in FIGS. , and the sizes of the first to third specific regions increase as the number of vertex images increases.

In the third specific area, immediately before the five square-shaped effect images EG light up all at once, the teammate character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a red color, and in the case of a clear image (a focused image (non-blurred image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the third specific region can be easily seen. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the third line from the straight line RG, which is the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted within a specific area of . The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, unlike the green in FIG. 139(E), can also contribute to heightening the player's expectation of winning.

After that, the five rectangular effect images EG do not simply disappear from the display screen 7a, but rather fly away in all directions toward the outside of the display screen 7a, thereby changing the length and direction of the straight line RG, thereby forming a third specific area. Shape changes. When the five square effect images EG fly away, as shown in FIG. 139(H), the five straight lines RG forming the third specific region become one substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape). line RG, and a fourth specific region having a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape) is formed. The size of the fourth specific area is larger than the size of the third specific area formed in FIG. can do.

In the fourth specific area, the teammate character CRA appears as a clear image (focused image (non-out-of-focus image)). The color of the straight line RG is inherited as it is and is red, but it may be yellow (gold). By doing so, it is possible to contribute to further heightening the player's sense of expectation for winning.

After that, the friend character CRA, which is a clear image, and the substantially circular (similar to circular) line RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the fourth specific region disappears. , before the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", five square effect images EG fly away in all directions. One of the square effect images EG becomes larger (approximately four times larger than when displayed in FIGS. 139(F) and (G)) and appears near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a. do. Then, when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", a lightning bolt is emitted from the square effect image EG to the right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R is forcibly changed (variable display). ) to form a temporary stop display with the number "6" to form a reach. As a result, the specific area variable effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(K), a battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. In the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A disappeared from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C was displayed. state is maintained. When the battle effect is being performed, the sword of the ally character CRA is swung down, and the white spherical variation icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(L), at the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are positioned at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (in the direction of approaching each other) again from the home position (moving), and attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a. The left decorative part which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached and the right decorative part which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form the left movable accessory. The left decorative portion of 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (unified accessory) having an annular shape. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, an image corresponding to the circular area formed in the ring is displayed. A display screen 7a of the device 7 displays an ally character CRA. By the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the appearance of the teammate character CRA displayed in the circular area, it is possible to notify the player of the big win.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R separate from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory 14L moves. 14R retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged at the center positions of the respective variable regions, and the number "6" is arranged on the horizontal line to display the temporary stop. be done. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "6". Then, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable performance (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R.

Following FIG. 139(M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "6", a jackpot is achieved. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific area variable effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 7 (display means), and in the first to third specific regions (specific regions) surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second 137 (E) to (K) for specific area variable effect A, FIGS. 138 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable effect B, specific area In the variable effect C, it is possible to execute (C), (E), (G), (H)) in FIG. According to this configuration, the first to third specific regions (specific regions) surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) are formed on the image display device 7 (display means). By displaying the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) in the formed first to third specific regions (specific regions), an unprecedented novel effect is presented to the player. can provide. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. ), the sizes of the first to third specific regions (specific regions) increase. Even if the number of multiple vertex images (plurality of first effect images) is the same, if the positions at which the multiple vertex images (plurality of first effect images) are arranged are different, the size of the specific region may become smaller. , and may become larger. Therefore, even if the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) increases, the size of the specific region may become small, and the expectation for the effect may decrease. Therefore, by increasing the size of the specific region as the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) increases, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the decrease in the sense of expectation for the effect. .

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. ) is expected to increase as the number of wins increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the degree of expectation for winning in an easy-to-understand manner by drawing attention to the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 137 (F) to (K), specific area variable effect B in FIGS. 138 (C), (E), (G), specific area variable effect C in FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G)) , The middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) is displayed in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) in an unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). It is possible to do so. According to this configuration, the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region) as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) are the middle decorative pattern 8C or the friendly character CRA (the 2 effect image) can be displayed to attract attention, the player can imagine what the unclear image looks like, and if another effect is performed after that, the unclear image can be displayed. The player himself/herself can discover the relevance or rule between the image and other effects.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. In FIG. 139(H) in the specific area variable effect C), after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), the specific area (in the specific area variable effect A, the third specific area, the specific area variable When the fourth specific region in the effect C) is formed in a shape similar to a circular shape, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) becomes clear (focused image (non-out-of-focus image). )) can be displayed in a specific area. According to this configuration, when the specific area surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) is formed as a polygonal area, it is subsequently formed into a shape similar to a circular shape. The player is made to pay attention to the change from the straight line to the smooth curve by the polygon, and the image change (for example, unclear It is possible to make it easier to recognize a change from an image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) to a clear image (a focused image (out-of-focus image)).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 137 (E), (G), specific area variable effect B in FIGS. 138 (B), (D), (F), specific area variable effect C in FIGS. 139 (B), (D), (F)) , a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) can be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction. According to this configuration, after the plurality of vertex images (plurality of first effect images) appear, by moving in a predetermined direction, the first effect surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (plurality of first effect images) to a third specific region (specific region).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 14 (movable body), and the first effect (Figs. 137 (E) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, Figs. 139 (C), (E), (G), After (H)), a second effect (specified area variable FIG. 137(L) can be executed in the effect A, and FIG. 139(L) can be executed in the specific area variable effect C). According to this configuration, the action of the first movable role 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left side movable role 14L, the right side movable role 14R, and the appearance of the teammate character CRA displayed in the circular area indicates that a big win has been achieved. can be communicated to the player.

[Modification]
A modification of the specific area variable effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. . In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138 and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. In 139 (C), (E), (G)), the teammate character CRA (second effect image) is made unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) from the first specific region to the third specific region. It was displayed in a specific area (specific area). However, other images may be used in place of the teammate character CRA. For example, when there are a plurality of enemy characters, the first to third specific areas are displayed in a step-up manner based on the degree of expectation for the hit set for the enemy character fighting the ally character CRA. You may make it display in order. Also, instead of the ally character CRA, an image of an icon that can change the variable icon 9C, an image of an icon that can change the hold icon 9A, an image of an icon that foretells the occurrence of a pseudo-reunion, and a forewarning effect. It may be an icon image that foretells the occurrence. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 3]
The first effect in the specific region variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific region variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific region variable effect C of FIG. 138(C), (E), and (G) for the variable effect B, and FIGS. 2 effect image) was displayed in the first to third specific regions (specific regions) in an unclear manner (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). However, a specific portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) is unclear (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and other portions are clear (a focused image (out-of-focus image)). It may be an image that does not have))). Also, the sub-control board 90 may draw a lottery independently, and when winning, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) may be made clear. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 4]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. ), after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), a specific region (the third specific region in the specific region variable effect A, the fourth specific region in the specific region variable effect C) is a circle When formed in a shape similar to the shape, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) is displayed clearly (focused image (unfocused image)) in the specific area. However, a specific portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) is unclear (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and other portions are clear (a focused image (out-of-focus image)). It may be an image that does not have))). Further, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery, and when the lottery is won, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) may be obscured. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 5]
The first effect in the specific region variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific region variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific region variable effect C in FIG. 138(B), (D), and (F) for the variable effect B, and FIGS. image) was temporarily stopped after being moved in a predetermined direction. However, the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) may be temporarily stopped and displayed as they are after appearing on the display screen 7a without being moved in a predetermined direction. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production. The intended direction may be to move in one direction, move in one direction and then move in the opposite direction, or rotate clockwise or counterclockwise (clockwise). direction and counterclockwise rotation, counterclockwise rotation and clockwise rotation back), zigzag movement, or any combination thereof. may be The sub-control board 90 independently draws a lottery, and when it wins the lottery, it can move in a predetermined direction and then display a temporary stop, or when it loses the lottery, it can display a temporary stop as it is.

[Modification 6]
137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the first movable accessory 14 ( 137 (F) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, and FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G), (H) in the specific area variable effect C )), the second effect (specific area variable effect A 137(L), and FIG. 139(L) for specific area variable effect C). However, since the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) appears on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed on the image display device 7 respectively. When advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), it does not appear on the front (front) of the display screen 7a, and does not appear on the way. You may make it return to a home position again. In this case, the plurality of vertex images (plurality of first effect images) and the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) proceeds. Become. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 7]
In the specific area variable production A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable production B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable production C of FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the start hole 21 was arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, which makes it intuitive and easy to understand. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, a plurality of vertex images (plurality of first effect images) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when the specific area variable effect is started. As a result, the player may misunderstand the number (the number of held balls) arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images). Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number representing the above-mentioned number of held balls as a numerical value. This eliminates the possibility that the number displayed as the number of held balls is misunderstood by the player as the number of a plurality of vertex images (plurality of first effect images), and furthermore, the number of held balls is not misunderstood by the player. The numbers displayed as numerical values can be difficult to discern due to being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 8]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. It may be a stereoscopic image. Also, the straight line RG may be a planar image or a stereoscopic image. Also, the teammate character CRA (second effect image) may be a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image. Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 may independently draw lots for these images to determine either the planar image or the stereoscopic image. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 9]
The first effect in the specific region variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific region variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific region variable effect C of FIG. 138(C), (E), and (G) for the variable effect B, and FIGS. 2 effect image) was displayed in the first to third specific regions (specific regions) in an unclear manner (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). However, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all, or the middle decorative pattern 8C or the teammate character CRA (second effect image) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, , 3 seconds) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery to determine display or non-display of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image). By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 10]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. As a method of expressing an out-of-focus image, it may be undulating and swaying like waves, or it may be flickering like a heat haze. In this case, it may be a still image or a moving image. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 11]
The specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
a first effect capable of displaying a second effect image in a specific area surrounded by a plurality of first effect images;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
the size of the specific region increases as the number of the plurality of first effect images increases;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
As the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, the expectation of winning increases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-3,
In the first effect, the second effect image may be displayed in the specific area indistinctly.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-4,
In the first effect, when the specific area is formed in a shape similar to a circle after being surrounded by the plurality of first effect images, the second effect image is clearly displayed in the specific area. there is a case,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-5,
In the first effect, the plurality of first effect images may be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-6,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the plurality of first effect images and the second effect images are erased and the movable body is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reliability change effects A and B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. FIG. In FIGS. 141 and 142, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. is therefore omitted.

This reliability change effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command), and when an instruction to execute a reliability change effect is included, the corresponding image The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Here, first, the reliability of single appearance and double appearance of each character appearing in the reliability change effect will be explained, and then the reliability change effect A and the reliability change effect B will be explained in order.

[Reliability in single appearance and double appearance by each character]
The reliability of each character's single appearance and double appearance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the reliability in single appearance and double appearance by each character.

In the reliability change effect, a character that appears alone can defeat multiple balloons that cover the card with the winning result displayed, or a specific character will appear in addition to the character that appears alone to double (jointly) ), and the reliability, which is the degree of expectation for a big hit, is different.

First, the "character" includes symbols such as a cross mark, a circle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark, as well as balloons and characters. They are a cross mark, a circle mark, a square mark, a heart mark and a star mark, and a balloon is a character that does not belong to the first group.

The above-mentioned characters that appear alone belong to the first group, and are the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark. Double (jointly) with the character that appears in to destroy multiple balloons (characters that do not belong to the first group).

The reliability when the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark, which are characters belonging to the first group, appear alone (that is, the reliability when attacking alone) is as shown in FIG. 140(A). In addition, the cross mark is 8%, the circle mark is 16%, the triangle mark is 12%, the square mark is 15%, and the heart mark is 50%. 50%.

In addition to the single appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark, which are characters belonging to the first group, the reliability in the double appearance of the specific character star mark (that is, the double attack As shown in FIG. 140(B), the cross mark is 18% (10% higher than when alone), the circle mark is 23% (7% higher than when alone), and the triangle mark is 42% (when alone). 30% up from when alone), 55% for the square mark (40% up from when alone), and 47% for the heart mark (3% down from when alone). The reliability is higher by 7% to 40% when the star mark, which is a specific character, appears double (jointly) than when it appears alone.

On the other hand, only for the heart mark, the reliability is lower by 3% when the star mark, which is the specific character, appears double (jointly) than when the star mark appears alone. Furthermore, when the heart mark appeared alone, the reliability was the highest, and when the square mark appeared alone, the reliability was the second highest. When it appears, the square mark and the specific character star mark have the highest reliability, and the heart mark and the specific character star mark have the second highest reliability. , The order of high reliability is reversed in the case of appearing double (jointly) with a specific character.

In this way, in addition to the single appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark, when the star mark, which is a specific character, appears double (jointly), the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark appear. The reliability is higher than when it appears alone, and exceptionally, when only the heart mark appears, the star mark, which is a specific character, appears alone. less reliable than the As a result, basically, when the star mark, which is a specific character, appears, the reliability increases. It is possible to discover by oneself the relevance and regularity of expectations in the single appearance of marks, triangular marks, square marks, and heart marks, and star marks, which are specific characters.

[Reliability change effect A]
Next, the reliability change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect A. FIG. The reliability change effect A is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable area from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. .

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), respectively, so that a maximum of four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 141(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, after that, although not shown, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily the same design (for example, the number "5"). A stop is displayed and a reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the reliability change effect A is started, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears alone, and the right side of the cross mark GZ1 " The message MS "X mark" is displayed. The independent appearance of this cross mark GZ1 results in a reliability of 8% shown in FIG. 140(A). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R which are in the process of variable production (variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed state. In this case, the variation icon 9C remains a white spherical icon, and there is no change to another icon.

After that, when the cross mark GZ1 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141(C), in the center of the display screen 7a, a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG with characters "Double Attack Chance" flashes. It emits FH and flashes while appearing in a manner approaching from the rear to the front. At this time, the flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered with the flash FH and visibility is not hindered. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a star mark, which is a specific character, in addition to the cross mark GZ1.

When the double attack chance icon TG flashes and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. is stop-displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "5", thereby losing. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable effect (variable display). As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

On the other hand, following FIG. 141(C), when the double attack chance icon TG flashes and approaches from the rear to the front again, as shown in FIG. 141(E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advances (moves) from the home position (in a direction toward each other) toward the advance position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and advances (moves) from the home position to the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)), the left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative part, which is half of the part, is united, and the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (unified accessory) having an annular shape. be.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( hereinafter referred to as a “circular area”). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the white spherical variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R separate from each other. , the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and moves to the right movable role. The object 14R retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 141(F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a by emitting a flashing light FH, and a "star mark" appears to the right of the star mark GZ2. A message MS is displayed. By the appearance of this star mark GZ2, the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2 are doubled (shared), and the reliability shown in FIG.

After the star mark GZ2 is displayed on the display screen 7a and a second predetermined period (eg, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined period (eg, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. Then, it appears by displaying a plurality of balloons GZ4 arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, a star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG indicates the degree of reliability that the double (cooperation) of the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, destroys the balloon and wins the result displayed on the card. The reliability image KDG suggests this reliability by ranking it in 5 levels. and suggest by. Here, as the reliability image KDG, "expectation" is shown in the same figure, which means "reliability", and there are three black circle images, and the expectation (after trust) is in five stages. Among them, it suggests that it is level 3.

Next, when star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, starts to shoot lightning toward multiple balloons GZ4 to start defeating them, cross mark GZ1 also shoots lightning toward multiple balloons GZ4, as shown in FIG. to start destroying.

When a plurality of balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke caused by the blast gradually disappears, a card appears, and the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same. A pattern (number "5") is stopped and displayed, resulting in a big hit. As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen. disappear from 7a. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R. is stopped by displaying the number "5", it is lost. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable effect (variable display). As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

Thus, in the reliability change effect A, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears alone. At this point, the reliability is 8%. After that, a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a with flashing light FH. By the appearance of this star mark GZ2, the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2 are doubled (jointly). As a result, the reliability is 18% (10% higher than when alone).

[Reliability change effect B]
Next, the reliability change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect B. FIG. The reliability change effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 142(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable area from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated. .

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension No pending icon is displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one pending icon that is stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be easily discerned by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 142(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, after that, although not shown, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design (for example, the number "5"). A stop is displayed and a reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 142(B), the reliability change effect B is started, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears alone, and the heart mark GZ3 appears alone. , the reliability shown in FIG. 140A is 50%. A message MS "Heart Mark" is displayed to the right of the heart mark GZ3. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R which are in the process of variable production (variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed state. Note that here, the change icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a red smiling spherical icon.

After that, when the heart mark GZ3 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142(C), a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG having the characters "Double Attack Chance" appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It emits flashing light FH and flashes while approaching from the rear to the front. At this time, the flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered with the flash FH and visibility is not hindered. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a star mark, which is a specific character, in addition to the heart mark GZ3.

When the double attack chance icon TG flashes and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. is stop-displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "5", thereby losing. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable effect (variable display). As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

On the other hand, following FIG. 142(C), when the double attack chance icon TG flashes and approaches from the rear to the front again, as shown in FIG. 142(E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advances (moves) from the home position (in a direction toward each other) toward the advance position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and advances (moves) from the home position to the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)), the left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative part, which is half of the part, is united, and the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (unified accessory) having an annular shape. be.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( hereinafter referred to as a “circular area”). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the smiling sphere variation icon 9C having a red color disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R separate from each other. , the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and moves to the right movable role. The object 14R retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a by emitting a flashing light FH, and a "star mark" appears to the right of the star mark GZ2. A message MS is displayed. With the appearance of this star mark GZ2, the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2 are doubled (jointly), and the reliability shown in FIG.

After the star mark GZ2 is displayed on the display screen 7a and a second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. , a plurality of balloons GZ4 are arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, a star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG indicates the degree of reliability that the winning result displayed on the card will win by destroying the balloon by double (jointly) the heart mark GZ3 and the specific character star mark GZ2. The reliability image KDG suggests this reliability by ranking it in 5 levels. and suggest by. Here, as the reliability image KDG, "expectation" is indicated in the same figure, but it means "reliability", three black circle images, one half black circle, and the expectation (after trust ) is level 3.5 out of 5 levels, suggesting that it is an intermediate level between level 3 and level 4.

Next, when star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, shoots lightning toward multiple balloons GZ4 to start defeating them, heart mark GZ3 also shoots lightning toward multiple balloons GZ4 as shown in FIG. 142(H). Launch and start shooting.

When a plurality of balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke caused by the blast gradually disappears, a card appears, and the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same. The symbol (number "5") is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is won. As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen. disappear from 7a. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R. is stopped by displaying the number "5", it is lost. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable effect (variable display). As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate effect. (variation display) is started.

Thus, in the reliability change effect B, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears alone. At this point, the reliability is 50%. After that, a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a with flashing light FH. When this star mark GZ2 appears, the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2 are doubled (jointly). As a result, the reliability is 47% (down 3% from when alone).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the reliability change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. When the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed after GZ1 (first image) is displayed, the expectation of winning increases (reliability is 18% (10% higher than when alone)) , When the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed and then the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is lowered (reliability is 47% (3% lower than when alone) )) Execute the first effect (FIGS. 141 (A) to (C) and (D) for the reliability change effect A, and FIGS. 142 (A) to (C) and (D) for the reliability change effect B). It is possible to do so. According to this configuration, even if the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning may be changed to be higher or lower. It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect that changes depending on the combination with the mark GZ2 (second image). Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. image), the variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is hidden, and the variation icon 9C is displayed. Of the icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd can be hidden. According to this configuration, even when the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) changes from being displayed to being hidden, the variation icon 9C is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the variable icon 9C changes to another icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. An attack chance icon TG (specific image) can be displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the double attack chance icon TG (specific image), it is possible to contribute to increasing the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 14 (movable body), and in the first presentation, the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) can be operated as a suggestion of displaying the star mark GZ2 (second image). . According to this configuration, the action of the first movable accessory 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R causes the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed. can contribute to increasing

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. A second effect (in the reliability change effect A In FIG. 141(E) and reliability change effect B, FIG. 142(E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the suggestion that the effect by the star mark GZ2 (second image) and the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) will be started so that the player can easily understand it. In addition, since the reliability image KDG (image of the expected degree of winning) is displayed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the reliability of this effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. When GZ1 (first image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed, or when heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed Sometimes. According to this configuration, since the double (joint) effect is developed by the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image), in addition to the cross mark GZ1 (first image), Furthermore, the involvement of the star mark GZ2 (second image) in the production can contribute to mutually enhancing the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image). , Heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) double (jointly) effects are developed, so in addition to heart mark GZ3 (third image), further star mark Participation in the presentation by GZ2 (second image) can contribute to mutually enhancing the heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. , triangle mark, square mark, heart mark and star mark (multiple characters), excluding star mark (first character) and heart mark (second character) cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark and square mark (other character), the star mark GZ2 (second image) is a star mark (first character), the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is a heart mark (second character), A plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group. According to this configuration, before the star mark (first character), which is the second image, is displayed, the cross mark, the circle mark, the triangle mark, and the square mark (other characters) are displayed as the first image. When one of the characters is displayed, the probability of winning is changed to a higher one. When a certain heart mark (second character) is displayed, the probability of winning is changed to be low, and the first character, the second character and other characters belong to the same first group. However, before the star mark (first character), which is the second image, is displayed, the degree of expectation for winning can be changed depending on what kind of character is displayed. there is In addition, although the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group, they can contribute to the player's own finding of relevance to characters that belong to the first group.

[Modification]
A modified example of the reliability change effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
141 and B in FIG. 142 are performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 20. In FIG. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the reliability change effect A shown in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B shown in FIG. Alternatively, it may be a character. For example, as characters belonging to the first group, friendly character A replaces the cross mark, friendly character B replaces the circle mark, friendly character C replaces the triangular mark, friendly character D replaces the square mark, and a heart mark replaces it. ally character E, and ally character F at the star mark. If each reliability in this case is the same as in FIGS. 140A and 140B, after the friendly character A (first image) replaced from the cross mark GZ1 is displayed, the friend replaced from the star mark GZ2 is displayed. When the character F (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is high (reliability is 18% (10% higher than when alone)), and the friendly character E (third image) replaced from the heart mark GZ3 image) is displayed, and after that, when the friendly character F (second image) that replaces the star mark GZ2 is displayed, the expectation of winning is lowered (reliability is 47% (down 3% from when alone)). . By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Also, the character not belonging to the first group was the balloon, but instead of this, a different character belonging to the first group may be used. In this case, it may be a plurality of characters. For example, characters not belonging to the first group are enemy character A, enemy character B, enemy character C, enemy character D, and enemy character E. Then, an effect is performed in which the ally character A and the enemy character A are associated, an effect is performed in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are associated, an effect is performed in which the ally character C and the enemy character C are associated, A performance in which the ally character D and the enemy character D are associated is performed, and a performance in which the ally character E and the enemy character E are associated is performed. If the reliability levels in this case are the same as in FIGS. 140A and 140B, ally character F appears as a double (joint) with ally character A to ally character E, and repels the enemy character. As a result, after the friendly character A (first image) that replaces the cross mark GZ1 is displayed, an effect is performed in which friendly character A (first image) and enemy character A (fourth image) are associated with each other. Therefore, when the friendly character F (second image) replaced from the star mark GZ2 is displayed, the expectation of winning increases (reliability is 18% (10% higher than when alone)), and from the heart mark GZ3 After the replacement ally character E (third image) is displayed, an effect is performed in which the ally character E (third image) and the enemy character E (fourth image) are associated with each other. When the replacement ally character F (second image) is displayed, the degree of expectation for winning is lowered (reliability is 47% (down 3% from when alone)). By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 3]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(C) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(C), a double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is displayed as a suggestion of displaying the star mark GZ2 (second image) Was. However, the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is not displayed, and in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 (D) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. A single decorative member (united accessory) having a ring shape with the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R may be formed. Whether or not this is done can be determined by an independent lottery by the sub-control board 90 . As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 4]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. Two decorative members (unified accessories) were formed. However, the decorative member (unified accessory) may not be formed. Whether or not this is done can be determined by an independent lottery by the sub-control board 90 . As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 5]
In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(B), the variation icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a smiling spherical red icon. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be increased by a predetermined factor (for example, about 5 to 8 times) as compared to the size of the white spherical icon. By doing so, the change of the variation icon 9C can be emphasized in a way that the player can easily understand.

[Modification 6]
In the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change performance B of FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the ball was arranged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, which makes it intuitive and easy to understand. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In this embodiment, when the reliability change effect is started, after that, a reliability image KDG showing the reliability in 5 stages that the balloon is destroyed and the hit result displayed on the card wins is displayed under the display screen 7a. displayed on the side. As a result, the player may misunderstand the number (the number of held balls) arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a as the reliability indicated by these five levels. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number representing the above-mentioned number of held balls as a numerical value. In this way, there is no possibility that the number displayed as the number of held balls is misunderstood by the player as the degree of reliability shown in stages, and furthermore, the number displayed as the number of held balls is not displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, which makes it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 7]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed again on the display screen 7a and may appear. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is a character, shoots lightning toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeating them, and furthermore, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. , and in the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning toward a plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts to defeat them. For example, a moving image display mode may be used in which the ball shrinks and extends vertically as if it bounces up and down, or a moving image display mode in which the ball rotates. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the presentation effect by the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the change icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed again on the display screen 7a and may appear. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is a character, emits lightning toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeating them, and furthermore, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. , and in the reliability change effect B of FIG. It may collide toward and explode, contributing to the destruction of multiple balloons GZ4. In this way, in addition to the two characters, the variation icon 9C can be used to set a state in which a plurality of balloons GZ4 are destroyed, thereby providing the player with a more powerful effect of defeating the plurality of balloons GZ4. In addition, the contribution of defeating the plurality of balloons GZ4 by the variable icon 9C can give the player an impression that the degree of reliability has further increased, contributing to the improvement of the production effect. can be done.

[Modification 9]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, some of the effects described above may not be provided, and other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, the expectation of winning increases, and when the second image is displayed after the third image is displayed, the win is expected. It is possible to execute the first production that lowers the expectation of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-1,
In the first effect, when the first image or the third image is displayed, the variation icon is displayed at the variation display position, and then the first image or the third image is hidden. and further, hiding the variable display position out of the variable icon and the variable display position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D7-1 or aspect D7-2,
In the first effect, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion of displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-3,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
In the first effect, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion of displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-4,
After the first effect, a fourth image is displayed in addition to the second image, and a second effect of displaying an image of the expected degree of winning based on the second image is executable. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-5,
In the second effect, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image are displayed, or the third image and the second image are displayed. may be
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-6,
the first image is a character other than the first character and the second character among the plurality of characters belonging to the first group;
the second image is the first character,
the third image is the second character,
the fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The item superimposition effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. This item superimposition effect can be executed during the variable effect of special symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, moves the third movable accessory 13, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a production that is realized by

[Item superimposition effect A]
143 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect A. FIG. In this item superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display thereof is omitted. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. This face image XG1 includes a spectacles image XG11 representing spectacles as a predetermined item. The glasses image XG11 is displayed with the portions corresponding to the lenses being transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), an item role movement presentation is performed. In this item accessory movement effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent the glasses. 3 A movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role movement effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13 is transmissive.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed, but in the face image XG1, the spectacles image XG11 is erased and the invisible eye image hidden by the spectacles image XG11 is displayed.

[Item superimposition effect B]
144 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect B. FIG. In this item superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display thereof is omitted. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, a face image XG1 is displayed. This face image XG1 includes a spectacles image XG11 representing spectacles as a predetermined item. The glasses image XG11 is displayed with the portion corresponding to the lens being transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), an item role movement presentation is performed. In this item accessory movement effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent the glasses. 3 A movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role movement effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13 is transmissive.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the character XG2 is displayed at the position where the face image XG1 was displayed.

[Item superimposition effect C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect C. FIG. In this item superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display thereof is omitted. Also, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. This face image XG1 includes a spectacles image XG11 representing spectacles as a predetermined item. The glasses image XG11 is displayed with the portions corresponding to the lenses being transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), an item role movement presentation is performed. In this item accessory movement effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent the glasses. 3 A movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role movement effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13 is transmissive.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), the item role transparency effect 1 is performed. In this item transmission effect 1, eyes are displayed on the portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13 on the main display screen 7a, and the lens portion of the third movable accessory 13 is made transparent to the player. The eyes of the face image XG1 are made visible through the three movable accessories 13. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), item role transparency effect 2 is performed. In this item transmission effect 2, the main display screen 7a displays the characters "Geki" and "Heat" in the portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13, and the lens portion of the third movable accessory 13 is transparent. so that the player can see these characters through the third movable accessory 13.例文帳に追加

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the character XG2 is displayed at the position where the face image XG1 was displayed.

[Modification]
In the item superimposition effect, glasses are used as the item, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the glasses is moved to the position of the glasses image XG11. may For example, a mask may be used as the item, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the mask may be moved to the position of the mask image to perform the same effect as the item superimposition effect.
In the item superimposition effect, in the item image display effect, a portion corresponding to the lens of the glasses image XG11 is displayed so as to be transparent, and a predetermined image (for example, an image of an eye, or "hot" or "heat") is displayed in the transparent portion. characters such as ) may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the item superimposition effect, the glasses image XG11 representing glasses as an item is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing glasses is moved to the unfolded position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11. The production (super reach production) is performed. According to this configuration, the spectacle image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13 can deliver a three-dimensional spectacle image to the player, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the item superimposition effect, the glasses image XG11 is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing glasses is moved to the unfolded position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11. After returning to the retracted position (home position), a character XG2 that performs a predetermined effect (super ready-to-win effect) is displayed at the position where the glasses image XG11 was displayed. According to this configuration, the spectacles image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13 can deliver a three-dimensional spectacle image to the player, thereby realizing a dynamic display performance and the third movable accessory. After 13 returns to the retracted position, the character XG2 performing the super ready-to-win effect is displayed instead of the spectacle image XG11, so that the effect can be provided at a good tempo, and the player can be given an exhilarating feeling. . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the item superimposition production, the third movable role 13 includes the third movable role 13L and the third movable role 13R. It moves to the unfolded position with the object 13R and unites on the glasses image XG11. According to this configuration, the spectacles image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13 can deliver a more three-dimensional spectacles image to the player, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect of displaying a first image representing a predetermined item on the display means,
The second effect is a effect of moving a movable accessory representing the predetermined item to a development position on the first image,
The third effect is a effect for performing a predetermined display effect on the display means,
Performing a combined effect including the first effect, the second effect and the third effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
In the combination effect, the first effect is performed, then the second effect is performed, and then the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
As one of the plurality of effects, a fourth effect may be performed,
The fourth effect is a effect of moving the movable accessory from the deployed position to the basic position,
The combination effect may include the fourth effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth effect is performed after the second effect, the third effect is performed after the fourth effect, and in the third effect, on the display means a second image in the predetermined effect is displayed instead of the first image displayed at a position corresponding to the deployment position of the movable accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
The movable accessory has a first accessory and a second accessory,
The movable character represents one character by combining the first character and the second character,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the first accessory and the second accessory of the movable accessories are moved to the deployment position on the first image, and the first Combine the role item and the second role item at the deployed position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

146 to 148, the movable accessory decoration lighting effect will be described below. 146 to 148, for example, the second movable accessory 15 and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This movable accessory decoration light emitting effect can be executed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and if an instruction to execute a movable accessory decoration light emitting effect is included, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate will be explained, and the movable role object decoration light emitting effect by the first movable role object 14 will be explained in order.

[Game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate]
First, the game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate. FIG. 147 is a continuation diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed by the transparent acrylic plate of FIG.

The game board 2, as shown in FIG. 146(A), is composed of a transparent acrylic plate 2z, which is a transparent acrylic plate. The first movable accessory 14, the image display device 7, etc. are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. A through hole is formed substantially in the center of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the image display device 7 is arranged at a position corresponding to the through hole. The first movable accessory 14 is arranged in the space between the transparent acrylic plate 2z and the image display device 7, and is covered with the transparent acrylic plate 2z in front when it is waiting at the home position. , appears in front of the image display device 7 and is not covered with the transparent acrylic plate 2z due to the opening of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Although the first movable accessory 14 is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z, since the transparent acrylic plate 2z is transparent, even when the first movable accessory 14 waits at the home position, the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. It is easy to see even when moving toward. The game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate 2z has the same configuration as the game board 2 described above, except that it has the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the description thereof is omitted here.

Although not shown, the first movable accessory 14 is provided with a decoration substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted, an inner lens covering the front of the decoration substrate is arranged, and the inner lens and the decoration substrate are accommodated by the decoration member. configured. An opening is formed in the decorative member, and the inner lens is exposed from this opening. The inner lens irregularly refracts the light from the plurality of full-color LEDs, making it difficult to recognize the existence of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. Therefore, even when all the full-color LEDs are turned off, the full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. Light emitted by a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board passes through the inner lens and is emitted forward (hereinafter referred to as "the first movable accessory 14 emits light").

Since the transparent acrylic plate 2z is arranged in front of the first movable role object 14, when the first movable role object 14 emits light, the light passes through the transparent acrylic plate 2z and forwards the transparent acrylic plate 2z. It will be irradiated. As a result, the game ball flowing down in the area of the game area 3 corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 and the game ball flowing down in the area of the game area 3 not corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 are separated. In comparison, the game balls flowing down in the area of the game area 3 corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 are brightly illuminated and easily visible.

In addition, a plurality of game nails or the like are projected (implanted) on the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and when the first movable accessory 14 emits light, the game nails are brightly illuminated by the light. It is possible to emphasize the passage through which the liquid flows down so that the player can easily understand it.

Here, the state in which the first movable accessory 14 waits at the home position will be described. The first movable accessory 14 includes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, as described above. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) are attached to the tip side. . That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape.

The first movable accessory 14 is stationary at a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a.

The left movable accessory 14L waiting at the home position, as shown in FIG. 146(B), has a left decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of a ring shape, and rotates on the arc with the center point of the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the arc. At the rotation center point LKP on the arc, it is further divided into the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU rotates counterclockwise. direction, the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD rotates clockwise, and the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD open almost 180 degrees.

When the left movable accessory 14L starts to advance toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU rotates clockwise at the rotation center point LKP on the arc, and then moves to the lower arc-shaped left side. After the movable accessory 14LD rotates counterclockwise and becomes a left decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape, it advances and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a.

As shown in the figure, the right movable accessory 14R waiting at the home position has a right decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of a ring shape, and the center point of the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the arc is the center point of the rotation center point RKP. Then, at the rotation center point RKP on this arc, it is further divided into the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, and the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU rotates clockwise. , the lower-arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD rotates counterclockwise and is opened to approximately 180 degrees.

When the right movable accessory 14R starts to advance toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU rotates counterclockwise at the rotation center point RKP on the arc, and the lower arc-shaped accessory 14RU is rotated. After the right movable accessory 14RD rotates clockwise and becomes a right decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape, it advances and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the left side movable accessory 14L waiting at the home position emits light, the light is emitted from the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD at almost 180 degrees, as shown in FIG. 146(C). In the open state, the front corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD is brightly illuminated.

When the right movable accessory 14R waiting at the home position emits light, the light spreads almost 180 degrees between the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, as shown in the figure. In this state, the front corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD is brightly illuminated.

As described above, the game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The hitting method of shooting is called "left hitting", and the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting".

When the left movable accessory 14L is on standby at the home position, as shown in FIGS. 147(D) and (E), when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped accessory 14L emit light. When the left side movable role 14LD emits light, the light is emitted from the left game area 3A to the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable role 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable role 14LD (hereinafter referred to as "left-handed"). ) is brightly illuminated. As a result, when comparing the game ball flowing down the left-side light emitting area 3AF in the left-side playing area 3A and the game ball flowing down other areas in the left-side playing area 3A excluding the left-side light emitting area 3AF, A game ball flowing down the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF is brightly illuminated and easily visually recognized.

In addition, since a plurality of game nails (represented by a small "O" in the figure) are protruding (implanted) in the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, when the left-side movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, When the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, the game nail in the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF is brightly illuminated by the light, so that the player can enter the passage where the game ball flows down. can be clearly emphasized. In addition, when the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emits light in the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF, a so-called windmill is also arranged in the area brightly illuminated by the light, in addition to the game nail. Rotation can be emphasized in a way that the player can easily understand. The windmill is as important to the player as the game nail because the rolling direction of the game ball to the first starting port 20 changes depending on the direction of rotation and the speed of rotation.

When the right movable accessory 14R is on standby at the home position, as shown in the figure, when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD are illuminated. When the light is emitted, the light is emitted from the right game area 3B to the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD (hereinafter referred to as "right hitting side emitting area 3BF"). ) will be illuminated brightly. As a result, in the right game area 3B, when comparing the game ball flowing down the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF and the game ball flowing down other areas in the right game area 3B excluding the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF, A game ball flowing down the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF is brightly illuminated and easily visually recognized.

In addition, since a plurality of game nails (represented by a small "O" in the drawing) are protruding (implanted) in the right-side light-emitting area 3BF, when the right-side movable accessory 14R emits light, that Since the game nail in the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF is illuminated brightly by the light, the path along which the game ball flows down can be emphasized in a way that the player can easily understand. Specifically, when the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU emits light in the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, the game nail is not projected (planted) in the area illuminated by the light, and the center decoration is performed. The passage along which the game ball flows down along the right side outline of the body 10 can be emphasized so that the player can easily understand it. When the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emits light in the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, a plurality of game nails or the like are protruded (implanted) in the area that is brightly illuminated by the light. is brightly illuminated to emphasize the path through which the game balls flow down in a way that the player can easily understand.

In FIG. 147(E), at the home position, the left movable accessory 14L can emit light, and the right movable accessory 14R can emit light. The side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF are illuminated brightly, as if the electrical decorative member were arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electrical decorative member was placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z). fixed), so that it is possible to realize an expression in which the illumination effect is performed by the electrical decorative member. In other words, it is possible to perform the same light emission performance as that of the electrical decoration member without providing the electrical decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Of course, the light emitting modes of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R include lighting, gradation lighting, blinking, and the like. In addition, the left movable accessory 14L emits light and the right movable accessory 14R is extinguished, and there is an effect in which only the left striking side light emitting area 3AF is illuminated brightly, and the left movable accessory 14L is extinguished and the right movable accessory is illuminated. The object 14R emits light, and only the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF is illuminated brightly. There is an effect that the hitting side light emitting area 3BF is turned off.

[Movable Accessory Decorative Luminous Effect by First Movable Accessory 14]
Next, the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 (hereinafter referred to as “movable accessory decoration light emitting effect”). The movable accessory decoration light emitting effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In FIG. 148(A), in a state in which the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started and the movable role object decorative light emission effect is started, the left movable role object 14L and the right movable role object 14R are each on standby at the home position. In this state, when a left-handed game is played or when a right-handed game is played, for example, as shown in FIG. When the movable accessory 14R is turned off, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, and the light is emitted from the left game. In the area 3A, the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left-side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable accessory 14LD, is illuminated brightly, excluding the left-side light-emitting area 3AF. The left playing area 3A is not illuminated brightly and is darker than the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF. On the other hand, since the right movable accessory 14R is turned off, the entire right game area 3B is not illuminated brightly by the right movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

In addition, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at the home position, respectively, when playing a left-handed game or when playing a right-handed game. For example, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light. As a result, the light brightly illuminates the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left-side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable accessory 14LD, in the left game area 3A. Thus, the left game area 3A excluding the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF is not illuminated brightly, and is darker than the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF. When the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light. The right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF, which is the front area corresponding to the role object 14RU and the lower-arc-shaped right-side movable role object 14RD, is illuminated brightly, and the right-handed game area 3B excluding the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF is not illuminated brightly. It becomes darker than the striking side light emitting region 3BF.

In addition, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at the home position, respectively, when playing a left-handed game or when playing a right-handed game. For example, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are turned off, the entire left game area 3A is not illuminated brightly by the left movable accessory 14L and becomes dark. The entire right game area 3B is not illuminated brightly by the right movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

In this way, when a left-handed game is played or a right-handed game is played, the left movable accessory 14L can emit light and the right movable accessory 14R can emit light at the home position. As a result, the left-side light-emitting region 3AF and the right-side light-emitting region 3BF are illuminated brightly, as if the electrical decorative member were arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the transparent acrylic plate 2z is fixed behind the electric decoration member), so that it is possible to realize an expression in which the electric decoration member is emitting light. In other words, it is possible to perform a light emission performance equivalent to that of the electrical decoration member without providing the electrical decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Next, from the state in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively waiting at the home position, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the central advanced position (in the direction of approaching each other), when playing a left-handed game or right-handed game, FIG. 148 ( As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (extended position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, the left side decoration that is half of the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. and the right decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united to form the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right side of the right movable accessory 14R. One decorative member (combined accessory) having a ring-shaped decorative portion is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring is a circular area ( hereinafter referred to as a “circular area”). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area.

At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have already advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). It's becoming Therefore, even if the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, the light is emitted from the left game area 3A. The left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD, is not brightly illuminated, and is transparent at the front (front) center advanced position of the display screen 7a. The light is emitted forward without passing through the acrylic plate 2z. Also, even if the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light, the light is emitted from the upper part of the right game area 3B. The right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF, which is the front area corresponding to the arc-shaped right-hand side movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable accessory 14RD, is not brightly illuminated, and transparent acrylic is applied at the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a. The light is emitted forward without passing through the plate 2z.

In this embodiment, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) from the home position toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). Since the performance suggests the start of a performance in which the expectation of a big win is high, the player is advised that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are positioned at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. When you see them advancing (moving) from their home position toward (in the direction of approaching each other), the sense of anticipation for the progressing performance increases.

In this way, when playing a left-handed game or when playing a right-handed game, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R stand by at their home positions. 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction toward each other), the left movable accessory 14R is movable. Even if the accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF are not illuminated brightly.

When the electrical decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, when the electrical decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), the electrical decoration member Even when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). Although it can be done, there is a risk that it will not be possible to emphasize the attention to the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R by focusing on the light emission effect by the electrical decoration member.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed from the state in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R respectively wait at the home position. Even if the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, the left Since the hitting side light emitting area 3AF and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF are not brightly illuminated, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be emphasized by making the player pay attention to the state in which they have advanced (moved) from the home position (toward each other).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the movable role decoration light emitting effect by the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate and the first movable role 14 will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. part), and a game board 2 having a plurality of game nails projecting from the front surface of a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). A plurality of possible left movable accessories 14L (movable bodies) are arranged (the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R), and the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). When the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light while the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is waiting at the home position, the game area corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L (movable body). 3, the first effect (FIGS. 147(E) and 148(A)) of illuminating the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) can be executed. According to this configuration, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated, so it is as if the electric decorative member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electric decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z). The decorative member is fixed), and the expression that the electric decorative member is performing light emission effect can be realized. In other words, it is possible to perform a light emission performance equivalent to that of the electrical decoration member without providing the electrical decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. A game ball flowing down the left-side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) flows down the left game area 3A (area) excluding the left-side light emitting area 3AF which is not illuminated by the light emission of the left movable accessory 14L (movable body). It is easy to visually recognize compared with the game ball which does. According to this configuration, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated by the light emission of the left-hand side movable accessory 14L (movable body), so that the game ball flowing down the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated. It can contribute to emphasizing the turning trend. Furthermore, when adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball, when the player operates the handle 60, the rolling direction of the game ball can be easily seen depending on the strength of the shooting intensity, which makes it easy to adjust the shooting intensity. can contribute to

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. A game nail protruding (implanted) in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the path through which the game ball flows down so that the player can easily understand it.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. It has a left game area 3A (first downflow area) where balls flow down and a right game area 3B (second downflow area) where game balls flow down on the right side of the game area 3. The left side movable role product 14L and the right side movable role product 14R (movable bodies) that are arranged include those that illuminate the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flowing area) and the right game area. There is one that illuminates the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the area 3B (second flowing area). According to this configuration, it is possible to brightly illuminate the game ball flowing down the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF in the left game area 3A to make it easy to see, and in the right-side game area 3B, the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF can be illuminated. It is possible to brightly illuminate the falling game ball and make it easy to see.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. When a movable body such as the left movable accessory 14L or the right movable accessory 14R emits light while performing a left hitting (first game) that flows down to the first flow area), the left game area 3A (first There are cases where the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) are illuminated. According to this configuration, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light while the left hand (first game) is being played, the left side in the left game area 3A (first flowing area) The hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) can be illuminated and brightened. Further, when the left side movable accessory 14L emits light and the right side movable accessory 14R is extinguished when the left side movable accessory 14L is lit (first game), the left game area 3A (first flowing area) The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) can be illuminated and brightened, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) can be made dark without illumination. In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L is turned off and the right side movable accessory 14R is illuminated while the left handed player (first game) is being played, the left game area 3A (first flowing area) The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when left-handed (first game) is performed, variation is given to the light emission mode of the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second flowing area). be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. When a movable body such as the left movable accessory 14L or the right movable accessory 14R emits light while performing a right shot (second game) that flows down to the second flow area), the left game area 3A (first There are cases where the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) are illuminated. According to this configuration, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light while playing the right hand (second game), the left side in the left game area 3A (first flowing area) The hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) can be illuminated and brightened. In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L emits light and the right side movable accessory 14R is extinguished when the right hand hitting (second game) is performed, the left game area 3A (first flowing area) The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) can be illuminated and brightened, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) can be made dark without illumination. In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L is turned off and the right side movable accessory 14R is illuminated while the right hand hitting (second game) is being performed, the left game area 3A (first flowing area) The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when playing right (second game), variation is given to the light emitting mode of the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second flowing area). be able to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect of FIG. When it moves to the advanced position (effect position), it is possible to execute the second effect (Fig. 148 (B)) that is united into one decorative member (union accessory) (union movable body). ing. According to this configuration, what was recognized by the player as an electric decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z suddenly becomes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, and the display screen 7a is displayed from the home position. When it moves to the advanced position (directing position) in the center of the front (front) of the, it is combined into one decorative member (combined accessory) (combined movable body), so it changes from an electric decorative member to a movable body. It is an unexpected presentation for the person and can provide an impactful presentation, and furthermore, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R can provide the same light emission presentation as the light emission presentation by the electric decorative member fixed at the predetermined position. It can be performed with a movable body such as

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect of FIG. Even if the movable body emits light, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF are not illuminated. According to this configuration, in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14L are advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position (production position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in a direction toward each other). Even if the movable body such as the movable accessory 14R emits light, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF are not illuminated brightly, so that the left side movable role 14L and the right side movable role 14R are illuminated. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14L are focused on the player's attention to the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advanced position (performance position) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). A movable object such as the role object 14R can be emphasized.

[Modification]
Below, a game board having a transparent acrylic plate and a modification of the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable role object decoration light emitting effect in FIG. However, it may be performed as part of the demonstration effect for waiting for customers. In this way, before playing the game, it is possible to experience the movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect that can be experienced when actually playing the game. In addition, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) waits for the lapse of a predetermined waiting time, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and sub-controls. Output to substrate 90 . The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a movable accessory decoration light emitting effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG. Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

[Modification 2]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect in FIG. However, plywood (so-called plywood) is used as an opaque plate instead of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. A through hole is provided in the portion corresponding to the right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, and a transparent portion is placed at the position of the cel image pasted on the front surface of the plywood (so-called plywood) corresponding to the through hole. (It may be transparent or translucent.) may be provided. Alternatively, the through hole may be closed with a transparent member (for example, a transparent acrylic member). The transparent member may be shaped.

[Modification 3]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect of FIG. It is divided into an arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD. It was divided into the shape right movable accessory 14RD. However, the left decorative part having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L may stand by without being divided vertically at the home position, or half of the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion having the arc shape of .theta.

Even when the left decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L stands by at the home position, the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) overlaps a part of the left decorative portion in the front-rear direction. Since it may overlap with the entire left decorative part, this overlapping area is formed as a left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF, and when the left-hand side movable accessory 14L emits light, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF can be illuminated brightly. In addition, even when the right decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R stands by at the home position, the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and a part of the right decorative portion in the front-rear direction. Since it may overlap or may overlap with the entire right decorative part, this overlapping area is formed as the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF, and when the right-side movable accessory 14R emits light, the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF can be illuminated brightly. .

[Modification 4]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, movable bodies such as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion). No decorative member was arranged in the space between the back surface of the (transparent portion) and the front surface of the movable body. However, a decorative member having a transparent portion is arranged in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and the front surface of the movable body, and the positional relationship between the decorative member and the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) changes. The decorative member may be fixed so that it does not occur. A decorative member having a transparent portion is not mounted with a light emitting portion such as a full-color LED at all, and is arranged on the back side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z via other members. The decorative member having a transparent portion may or may not be attached to the back side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

A decorative member having a transparent part is arranged in front of the left movable accessory 14L at a position corresponding to the home position of the left movable accessory 14L to hide the existence of the left movable accessory 14L, and the left movable accessory 14L emits light. Then, the light is emitted forward through the transparent portion of the decorative member. The transparent portion of the decorative member may be, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens refracts light incident from behind, and if the left movable accessory 14L is arranged behind the inner lens, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the presence of the left movable accessory 14L. , the inner lens of the decorative member can make the left movable accessory 14L difficult to see. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. As a result, the electrical decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electrical decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the illumination effect by the electrical decoration member is performed. It is possible to realize a certain expression. In other words, it is possible to perform a light emission performance equivalent to that of the electrical decoration member without providing the electrical decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. In addition, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light in a state where it advances (moves) from the home position toward the advanced position (production position) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in a direction toward each other), Since the light does not pass through the transparent portion of the decorative member, the light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent portion disappears, and the left movable accessory 14L advances to the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (performance position). The left movable accessory 14L can be emphasized by making the player pay attention to the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward (in the direction of approaching each other). In other words, the left movable accessory 14L waiting at the home position is hidden by the decorative member, so that when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, it is placed in front of the left movable accessory 14L. While the presence of the decorative member having the transparent portion can be emphasized, the left movable accessory 14L in the advanced (moved) state from the home position has the transparent portion when the left movable accessory 14L emits light. It is not necessary to emphasize the existence of the decorative member to hide its own existence, and this time it is possible to emphasize its own existence.

In addition, by placing a decorative member having a transparent portion in front of the right movable accessory 14R at a position corresponding to the home position of the right movable accessory 14R, the presence of the right movable accessory 14R is hidden (in other words, the right movable accessory 14R is hidden). The accessory 14R becomes invisible due to the decorative member), and when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the light is emitted forward through the transparent portion of the decorative member. The transparent portion of the decorative member may be, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens refracts light incident from behind, and when the right movable accessory 14R is arranged behind the inner lens, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the existence of the right movable accessory 14R. , the inner lens of the decorative member can make it difficult to see the right movable accessory 14R. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. As a result, the electrical decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electrical decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the illumination effect by the electrical decoration member is performed. It is possible to realize a certain expression. In other words, it is possible to perform a light emission performance equivalent to that of the electrical decoration member without providing the electrical decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Further, in a state in which the right movable accessory 14R emits light in a state in which it advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (production position) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in a direction toward each other), Since the light does not pass through the transparent portion of the decorative member, the light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent portion disappears, and the right movable accessory 14R advances to the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (performance position). The right side movable accessory 14R can be emphasized by making the player pay attention to the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward (in the direction of approaching each other). In other words, the right movable accessory 14R waiting at the home position is hidden by the decorative member, so when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, it is placed in front of the right movable accessory 14R. While the presence of the decorative member having the transparent portion can be emphasized, the right movable accessory 14R in the advanced (moved) state from the home position has the transparent portion when the right movable accessory 14R emits light. It is not necessary to emphasize the existence of the decorative member to hide its own existence, and this time it is possible to emphasize its own existence.

[Modification 5]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect of FIG. An inner lens is arranged to cover the front of the decoration substrate, and the inner lens and the decoration substrate are accommodated by the decoration member. An opening was formed in this decorative member, and the inner lens was exposed from this opening. The inner lens irregularly refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens. Even when all lights are turned off, the multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. In other words, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. The full-color LED was considered difficult to see. However, an inner lens may be formed so that the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed in the first movable accessory 14 can be easily viewed, or alternatively, the inner lens may be replaced with a design. It may be a transparent member to which is applied. This transparent member may be transparent or translucent.

[Modification 6]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect in FIG. In the past, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R were sometimes in a state of emitting light when a left-handed game was played or a right-handed game was played. However, when the left-handed game changes to the right-handed game, the left movable accessory 14L may be turned off and the right-handed movable accessory 14R may emit light. When changing, the left movable accessory 14L may emit light and the right movable accessory 14R may be extinguished. In this way, when switching between a left-handed game and a right-handed game, the player can know which way to play the game by the lighting modes of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. can be clearly communicated to

[Modification 7]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIG. 147(E) and the movable role object decoration light emitting effect in FIG. No game nails were protruding (implanted) in the brightly lit area. However, the game nail may be projected (implanted). In this way, the game nail is illuminated brightly, so that the passage through which the game ball flows down can be clearly emphasized for the player.

[Modification 8]
The movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect of FIG. 148 may not include a part of the described effect, or may be added with another effect.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A game machine comprising a game board having a transparent portion in which a game area is formed, and a game board having a plurality of game nails projecting from the front surface of the transparent portion,
A plurality of movable bodies capable of emitting light are arranged behind the transparent portion on the game board,
The movable body is visible through the transparent portion,
When the movable body emits light while the movable body is waiting at the home position, a first effect of illuminating a specific area of the game area corresponding to the movable body can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
When the movable body emits light, the game ball flowing down the specific area is easier to see than the game ball flowing down the area not illuminated by the light emission of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2,
When the movable body emits light, the game nail protruding in the specific area is illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The game area has a first flow-down area where game balls flow down on the left side of the game area and a second flow-down area where game balls flow down on the right side of the game area,
The plurality of movable bodies arranged on the game board include those that illuminate the specific area in the first flow-down area and those that illuminate the specific area in the second flow-down area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4,
In the first effect, when the movable body emits light while the game ball is playing the first game in which the game ball flows down to the first flow-down region, the specific region in the first flow-down region and the first may illuminate the specific area in the flow area of 2,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4 or aspect E2-5,
In the first effect, when the movable body emits light while the game ball is playing the second game in which the game ball flows down to the second flowing region, the specific region in the first flowing region and the first may illuminate the specific area in the flow area of 2,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-6,
When the movable body moves from the home position to the rendering position, it is possible to execute a second rendering that unites and becomes a combined movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-7,
In the second effect, even if the united movable body emits light, the specific area is not illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The W mode display effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. FIG. This W mode display effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. In addition, in the W mode display effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are actually displayed, but the display is omitted in the drawing. Further, the left sub-display screen 64L has a smaller display screen area than the main display screen 7a.

[W mode display effect A]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the W-mode display effect A. FIG. In this W mode display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative design is varied and displayed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are displayed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. FIG. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. FIG. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effect, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, character type, chance-up appearance frequency, chance-up jackpot expectation, and the like are set respectively. Modes A to C also have different settings. In the first mode image XH1, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed side by side without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68 and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68 . In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changing or the ready-to-win effect. In the example of FIG. 149(A), mode A is selected, the mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the second mode image XH2 is: Mode A image XH21 is placed on top, suggesting mode A. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern low speed variation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are varied at low speed and pass over the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12 and mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the decorative patterns when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the foreground. Also, the player who has seen the button image XH3 has changed the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68 . Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed (indicated by hatching in the drawing), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12 and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, the portions of the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front are hidden by the decorative patterns and cannot be seen. In FIG. 149C, the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2.
After this decorative design stop effect, by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, in the case of a big win, a big win pattern arrangement is displayed, and in the case of a loss, a winning pattern arrangement is displayed.

[W mode display effect B]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining W-mode display effect B. FIG. In this W mode display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative design is varied and displayed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are displayed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. FIG. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. FIG. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effect, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, character type, chance-up appearance frequency, chance-up jackpot expectation, and the like are set respectively. Modes A to C also have different settings. In the first mode image XH1, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed side by side without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68 and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68 . In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changing or the ready-to-win effect. In the example of FIG. 150(A), mode A is selected, the mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the second mode image XH2 is: The Mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that it is the Mode A image. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), character appearance effect 1 is performed. In this character appearance effect 1, a character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a. pass. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden behind the character image XH4 and cannot be seen when the character image XH4 is in front. Also, the player who has seen the button image XH3 has changed the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68 . Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed (indicated by hatching in the drawing), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), character appearance effect 2 is performed. In this character appearance effect 2, the character image XH4 moves to the left sub display screen 64L and moves to the position of the second mode image XH2. In this case, the character image XH4 moves behind the second mode image XH2, and the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13 are always visible. In FIG. 150(C), the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2.
After this character appearance effect 2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R display a big win pattern arrangement in the case of a big win, and a losing pattern arrangement in the case of a loss.

[W mode display effect C]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect C. FIG. In this W mode display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative design is varied and displayed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are displayed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. FIG. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. FIG. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effect, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, character type, chance-up appearance frequency, chance-up jackpot expectation, and the like are set respectively. Modes A to C also have different settings. In the first mode image XH1, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed side by side without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68 and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68 . In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changing or the ready-to-win effect. In the example of FIG. 151(A), mode A is selected, the mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the second mode image XH2 is: The Mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that it is the Mode A image. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the player who has seen the button image XH3 operates the select button 68 to change the mode from mode A to mode B. Therefore, in this mode change effect, the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top of the second mode image XH2. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win production, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in this ready-to-win effect, a character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a. pass. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the character image XH4 and cannot be seen when the character image XH4 is in front. In this ready-to-win effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), a button pressing effect is performed. In this button pressing effect, the button image XH5 is displayed together with the character image XH4. This button image XH5 represents the effect button 63, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. FIG. Note that the mode B is continuously selected in this button pressing effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, the character image XH6 is displayed when the player who sees the button image XH5 presses the effect button 63. FIG. This character image XH6 is a chance-up that is described as "extra hot" and suggests that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively high. In this chance-up effect, mode B is continuously selected.
After this chance-up effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R display a jackpot pattern arrangement in the case of a big win, and display a winning pattern arrangement in the case of a loss.

[Modification]
In the W mode display effect, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are arranged so as to overlap in the second mode image XH2 on the left sub-display screen 64L. In the 1-mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. Also, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 may be arranged in parallel so as not to overlap each other.
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 are composed of a mode A image, a mode B image, and a mode C image, respectively, but are not limited to this. . For example, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 may be composed of different mode images. For example, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed as the first mode image XH1, and a mode D image representing a mode D different from the modes A to C is displayed as the second mode image XH2. A mode E image different from A to D and a mode F image different from modes A to E may be displayed. A mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed as the first mode image XH1, and a mode A image XH21, a mode B image XH22, and modes A to C are displayed as the second mode image XH2. A different Mode D image may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. According to this configuration, since the mode display is performed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize which mode the game is currently in, and can enjoy the mode presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 displayed on the main display screen 7a and the second mode image XH2 displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L suggest the same mode. According to this configuration, since the same mode display is performed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize one mode and enjoy the mode presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the variably displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed while the first mode image XH1 is being displayed. In some cases, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first mode image XH1 overlap each other. , 8R. According to this configuration, on the main display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is prioritized over the mode display, and on the left sub-display screen 64L, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is prioritized over the mode display. Since the display is given priority, the player can easily understand the mode while enjoying the game performance, and can enjoy the mode performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 is displayed while the first mode image XH1 is being displayed. XH1 may overlap, in which case the first mode image XH1 is arranged behind the character image XH4 and is at least partially hidden by the character image XH4. According to this configuration, the variable display of the character image XH4 is prioritized over the mode display on the main display screen 7a, and the mode display is prioritized over the variable display of the character image XH4 on the left sub-display screen 64L. , the player can easily grasp the mode while enjoying the game performance, and can enjoy the mode performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means comprises first display means and second display means different from the first display means,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of performing a first mode suggestive display suggesting a mode on the first display means,
The second display effect is a effect of performing a second mode suggestive display suggesting a mode on the second display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
The mode represented by the first mode suggestive display and the mode represented by the second mode suggestive display are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect of variably displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combined effect, when the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, the first mode suggesting display and the decorative pattern are displayed on the first display means. When overlapping, the first mode suggestive display is positioned behind the decorative design and is hidden by the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined image different from the decorative pattern on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and when the first mode suggestion display and the predetermined image overlap, the fourth display effect is performed. 1 mode suggestive display is positioned behind the predetermined image and is hidden by the predetermined image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
The following aspects may be adopted.
The first mode suggestive display (first mode image XH1) and the second mode suggestive display (second mode image XH2) are displayed simultaneously.
The first mode suggestive display includes a plurality of mode displays, and the plurality of mode displays are displayed so as not to overlap each other.
The second mode suggestive display includes a plurality of mode displays, and the plurality of mode displays are displayed so as to overlap each other.
The first display means (main display screen 7a) has a larger display screen area than the second display means (left sub-display screen 64L).
A predetermined image (character image XH4, decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) may be displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and the predetermined image overlaps the second mode indication display. When in position, the second mode suggestive indicium is in front of and visible from the predetermined image, and in the position where the predetermined image overlaps the first mode suggestive indicium, the first mode suggestive. The display is located behind the predetermined image, and the overlapping portion is not visible.
In the second display means, the second mode suggesting display corresponds to the first operating section image (eg, button image XH3) representing the first operating section (eg, select button 68) for changing the mode. A second operation portion image (for example, button image XH5) representing the second operation portion (for example, effect button 63) is displayed on the first display means, and the second operation portion is displayed as a game. By the user's operation, a predetermined effect (for example, display of character image XH6) different from mode change is performed (see W mode display effect C).

152 to 154, the moving part operation warning effect will be described below. In FIGS. 152 to 154, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see. is therefore omitted.

This movable part operation warning effect can be executed after power is turned on to the game machine 1, and can also be executed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command), and if the command includes an instruction to execute a movable part operation warning effect, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

Here, a method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61 will be explained, and the moving part operation warning effect A and the moving part operation warning effect B will be explained in order.

[Method of Locking Sword Member 65 to Top Plate 61]
First, a method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining a locking method of the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61. FIG.

As described above, the sword member 65 is a sword-shaped operating portion that can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that the player can push downward as a whole. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword. The sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword button is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing down the entire sword member 65 and a second operation of pressing the sword button at the tip.

The sword part and the hilt part of the sword member 65 are decorative members that can emit light, and can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode in accordance with the progress of the performance. In other words, the sword member 65 has a decorative member, and can emit light in various luminous modes by the light emission of the decorative member.

To lock the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61, first, as shown in FIG. 152(A), the sword member 65 is inserted into an insertion opening (not shown) provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 61 and pushed downward. while rotating counterclockwise HTY. Then, as shown in FIG. 152(B), the sword member 65 and the upper plate 61 are completely locked by continuing to rotate until a "click" is felt.

When this lock is completed, if the vertical direction of the sword member 65 is taken as an axis with respect to the player seated on the front surface of the gaming machine 1, the sword member 65 is slightly rotated around this axis. , the player can grasp the handle of the sword member 65 with both hands and easily push the sword member 65 downward.

A lock completion sensor (not shown) for detecting lock completion of the blade member 65 is provided inside the upper plate 61 , and a detection signal from the lock completion sensor is input to the sub-control board 90 . A detection signal from the lock completion sensor becomes a lock completion logic when the sword member 65 is locked to the upper tray 61 (hereinafter referred to as "lock completed"), and the sword member 65 is locked to the upper tray 61. The electric circuit is configured so that when the lock is not in a state (hereinafter referred to as "lock incompletion"), the logic of lock completion is reversed to indicate lock incompletion logic.

In addition, if the wiring through which the detection signal from the lock completion sensor is transmitted is disconnected due to an illegal act, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the detection signal from the lock completion sensor will not be transmitted. The logic is preconfigured with an electric circuit so as to be lock incomplete logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 warns of this trouble. The notification can be made by an image or a warning sound (specific sound).

In addition to the sword member 65 that can be operated by the player, the upper tray 61 is also provided with a performance button 63 and a select button 68 that can be operated by the player. The effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the effect button 63 is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. Also, the select button 68 is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses, or operated (pressed) by the player at the time of changing a predetermined setting of the gaming machine 1. do. Therefore, the select button 68 is a movable portion that can be operated (pressed) by the player. As described above, the upper plate 61 is provided with the sword member 65, the sword button of the sword member 65, the performance button 63, and the select button 68 as a plurality of movable portions that can be operated (pressed) by the player. Furthermore, since all the movable parts are arranged on the upper plate 61 which can be easily visually recognized, all the movable parts are arranged at positions where the player can easily visually recognize them.

In addition, the effect button 63 has a pressing member that is operated (pressed) by the player and is made of a transparent member, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When this decoration member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, and the effect button 63 can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode.

The select button 68 has a pressing member that is operated (pressed) by the player and is formed of a transparent member, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When this decoration member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, and the select button 68 can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. The pressing member of the select button 68 may be made of an opaque member (for example, a black member). In this case, no decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member of the select button 68, and the select button 68 does not emit light.

[Moving part operation warning effect A]
Next, the moving part operation warning effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the moving part operation warning effect A. FIG. The movable part operation warning effect A can be executed after the game machine 1 is powered on, and can also be executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbols. Here, the movable part operation warning effect A executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable performance (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the black spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth No pending icon is displayed in the pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in FIG. 153(A), after that, as shown in FIG. An arrow image YBG that is enlarged and moves in the vertical direction is displayed above the effect button image BG, and a message MG1 prompting the operation (press) of the effect button 63 is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the player rotates the sword member 65 in the direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 153B continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a to urge the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, and the right sub-display screen 64R of the sub-display screens 64 is displayed. Alternatively, a warning image is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, a warning is issued when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates it clockwise). Here, when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), the player does not gain any advantage and does not feel a sense of accomplishment, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is an image that notifies that the locking of the sword member 65 has not been completed, and is an image that notifies how to cancel the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image that notifies that the locking of the sword member 65 is incomplete, and is an image that informs how to complete the locking of the sword member 65 .

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, there is an incompletely locked sword image that simulates the sword member 65 and has the same posture as when the sword member 65 is incompletely locked. KG is displayed. Below the incompletely locked sword image KG, a message MG2 "Warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2 is a message "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock". MG3 is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the direction of rotation is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

Note that while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the voice of the message MG3 "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it 'clicks' to complete the lock.'" is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a warning sound (specific sound) for warning. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sound of the message MG3, which tells how to cancel the warning, is also used as the sound for notifying the warning without providing a special sound for notifying the warning. In other words, the warning sound has both the function of the sound for notifying the warning and the sound of the message MG3 that tells how to cancel the warning.

Subsequently, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 153(D), the player's operation (press) causes the ally character CRA to appear in the center of the display screen 7a. The performance condition is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, when the friendly character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, it suggests the start of an effect with a high expectation of a big win. Seeing that the friendly character CRA is displayed large in the center raises expectations for the progressing performance.

Here, the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment that the player character CRA appears when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 . Even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the teammate character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a big win is achieved. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), be out of line. When a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable.

After FIG. 153(D), if the player rotates the sword member 65 in the counterclockwise direction in order to return to the original state after rotating the sword member 65 in the clockwise direction, On the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64, the warning image disappears and a message MG3 saying "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed. does not flow from the speaker 67.

[Moving part operation warning effect B]
Next, the moving part operation warning effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the moving part operation warning effect B. FIG. The movable part operation warning effect B can be executed after the game machine 1 is powered on, and can also be executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbols. Here, the movable portion operation warning effect B executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbols will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of . When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad. displayed, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 .

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21, the first start icon 9B based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 The special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a while being separated from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It's like

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (big win)).

In FIG. 154(A), when the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 154(B), after that, as shown in FIG. A lock completion sword image PG in the same posture as when the lock is held is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and an arrow image YPG moving vertically is displayed to the right of the lock completion sword image PG. A message MG1 prompting an operation (downward push) of the sword member 65 is displayed near the upper side of 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the player rotates the sword member 65 in the direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. As shown in (C), the display screen 7a continues to display the image shown in FIG. A warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, a warning is issued when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates it clockwise). Here, when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), the player does not gain any benefit and does not feel any sense of accomplishment, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is a warning image that informs that the sword member 65 has not been locked, and furthermore, an image that conveys how to cancel the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image that notifies that the locking of the sword member 65 is incomplete, and is an image that informs how to complete the locking of the sword member 65 .

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, there is an incompletely locked sword image that simulates the sword member 65 and has the same posture as when the sword member 65 is incompletely locked. KG is displayed. Below the incompletely locked sword image KG, a message MG2 "Warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2 is a message "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock". MG3 is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the direction of rotation is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

Note that while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the voice of the message MG3 "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it 'clicks' to complete the lock." is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a warning sound (specific sound) for warning. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sound of the message MG3, which tells how to cancel the warning, is also used as the sound for notifying the warning, without providing a special sound for notifying the warning. In other words, the warning sound has both the function of the sound for notifying the warning and the sound of the message MG3 that tells how to cancel the warning.

Subsequently, when the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65, as shown in FIG. The production condition of appearing is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, when the friendly character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, it suggests the start of an effect with a high expectation of a big win. Seeing that the friendly character CRA is displayed large in the center raises expectations for the progressing performance.

Here, the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment when the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65 to cause the ally character CRA to appear. Even if the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65, the ally character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a big win is achieved. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), be out of line. When a big hit or a loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable.

After FIG. 154(D), if the player rotates the sword member 65 in the counterclockwise direction in order to return to the original state after rotating the sword member 65 in the clockwise direction, On the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64, the warning image disappears and a message MG3 saying "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed. does not flow from the speaker 67.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the moving part operation warning effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. (having a plurality of movable parts). FIG. 154 (D) in the part operation warning effect B), and the second effect in which a warning is issued by the player's operation (FIGS. 153 (C) and (D) in the moving part operation warning effect A, 154(C) and (D)) can be executed in the warning effect B. FIG. According to this configuration, there are cases where the performance condition is achieved by the player's operation and a sense of accomplishment can be obtained, and cases where the player's operation makes it impossible to obtain a sense of accomplishment and a warning is issued. , and it is possible to obtain different effects depending on the movable part operated by the player. Therefore, when there are multiple movable parts that the player can operate, a sense of accomplishment can be obtained. It is possible to emphasize in an easy-to-understand manner which movable part is the movable part. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. It can be executed. According to this configuration, even if the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment by achieving the effect condition through the player's operation, a warning is issued to the player by always maintaining the situation in which the warning can be issued. It can contribute to deterring such operations as

[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a sub-display screen 64 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in, for example, the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. However, in the second effect, a warning image (specific image) is displayed to inform how to cancel the warning. According to this configuration, a warning image (specific image) that tells how to cancel the warning is displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (display means), so that knowing the procedure for canceling the warning makes it possible to respond quickly. Also, the player becomes more likely to notice that there is a problem with his/her operation of the movable part, which can contribute to preventing the player from operating the movable part for which a warning is issued.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. You can do it. According to this configuration, the notification sound (specific sound) first causes the player to recognize that the warning is being issued, and the action performed by the player immediately before the notification sound (specific sound) is issued is not good. You can tell the point that it is an act.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 emit light. It is possible to do so. According to this configuration, the movable parts that can be operated by the player are illuminated so as to be further decorated and emphasized, thereby encouraging the player to operate the movable parts. can contribute to

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. is designed to have According to this configuration, the movable part that can be operated by the player can be decorated with the decorative member to emphasize it, and it is possible to contribute to highlighting the presence of the movable part to the player.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. It seems that it is arranged in a good position. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the arrangement of the movable parts.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the moving part operation warning effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. However, the notification sound (specific sound) may not be output. That is, the warning image may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. Also, as the output of the notification sound (specific sound), the volume of the notification sound (specific sound) may be made smaller than the volume of the effect sound for the effect being displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In this way, the performance sound unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 does not interfere with the performance sound, and the win-lose result that the player is most interested in can be derived by progressing the performance on the display screen 7a for the time being. can be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 (C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 21 is arranged and displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, which makes it intuitive and easy to understand. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other images are arranged and displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In this embodiment, when the movable part operation warning effect is started, the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64, so the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen. When displayed on the display screen 64R, the number of held balls may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, or a warning image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In this case, a number representing the number of held balls may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. In this way, the number displayed as the number of held balls can be displayed on another sub-display screen different from the warning image, and further, the number displayed as the number of held balls can be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, which makes it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 4]
The movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. However, the moving part operation warning effect can be executed after power is turned on to the game machine 1. When the power is turned on to the game machine 1, regardless of whether the variable effect is being performed (during the variable display), for example, the customer waiting It can also be executed in a demonstration production for. That is, when the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines that the blade member 65 has not been locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it notifies the user by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). be able to. In this way, regardless of the progress of the performance and further, regardless of the state of the game, when the lock of the sword member 65 is not completed, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 5]
In the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. When the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 makes the determination, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, a special lever that can be operated by the player is arranged near the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152A and 152B) on the front frame 53 and is provided at a position that is easily visible. may When the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, and the special lever is operated (pushed downward), the front frame 53 is released from the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached. It has become. When this special lever is operated (pushed downward), it is detected by a special lever detection sensor, and a detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is input to the sub-control board 90 . The detection signal from the special lever detection sensor becomes the opening operation logic when the special lever is operated (pushed downward), and the opening operation logic when the special lever is not operated (pushed downward). An electric circuit is constructed so that it becomes a closed logic that reverses the logic.

Further, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, this operation is detected by the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is used for payout control. It is input to the board 110 . When the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes open logic, and the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction. An electric circuit is constructed so that the open logic is reversed to the closed logic when the motor is not operated. The payout control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80 when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the main control board 80 receives the command and informs the main control board 80 of the command. to the sub-control board 90 . As a result, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can grasp that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction.

The sub CPU 92 does not recognize that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the special lever is operated based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. When it is determined that it is in the (downward) state, a warning image can be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, or a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. can. 153(C), (D) and FIGS. 154(C), (D), an image simulating a special lever is used as the warning image instead of the incompletely locked sword image KG shown in FIGS. In the direction of the arrow, the message MG3 is displayed. Also, instead of the counterclockwise arrow image YG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and FIGS. 154(C), (D), an upward arrow image YG is displayed. .

At least, if the wiring through which the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraud, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the special lever detection sensor An electric circuit is preliminarily assembled so that the logic of the detection signal of (1) is the open operation logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can detect this trouble. A warning image or a warning sound (specific sound) can be used for notification. Also, if the wiring through which the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraud, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the detection from the cylinder lock detection sensor will not occur. An electric circuit may be preconfigured so that the logic of the signal is open logic.

By the way, the open state and the closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are detected by a front frame closing detection sensor. is input to the payout control board 110 . When the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in a closed state, the detection signal from the front frame close detection sensor becomes a closed logic, and the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached becomes a closed logic. An electric circuit is constructed so that when the frame and are in the open state, the closed logic is reversed to open logic.

If the wiring through which the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to an illegal act, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is changed. , an electric circuit is preconfigured so as to have an open logic. As a result, it is possible to inform the payout control board 110 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closing detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 sends this trouble to the main control board 80 as a command. The main control board 80 having received this command transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 90 . Thereby, the sub-control board 90 can notify by the door opening image and the door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in the opened state.

The front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are intended to be opened by staff or workers, but there is a risk that they may be opened due to fraudulent acts, so the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The state of the inner frame (open state, closed state) is monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to provide an image with a high alertness that can be conveyed to the surroundings of the game machine 1 compared to the warning image. Furthermore, it is necessary to make the sound highly informative, which can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 compared to the warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, the sub CPU 92, in a state in which the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is not recognizing that the key is rotated in a predetermined direction, detects the special lever based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. When it is determined that the lever is being operated (pushed downward), a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is played from the speaker 67. On the other hand, the sub CPU 92 recognizes that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is turned in a predetermined direction, and further, based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. , when it is determined that the special lever is being operated (pushed downward), a door open image with a high level of notification that can be conveyed to the surroundings of the game machine 1 compared to the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. Alternatively, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of the left sub-display screen 64L, and furthermore, a door opening sound with high notification that can be transmitted to the surroundings of the game machine 1 compared to the warning sound (specific sound). Stream from the speaker 67 .

[Modification 6]
In the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. When the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 makes the determination, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, in order to fix other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 to the specific decorative portion (which can also perform an effect by electric decoration) attached to the front frame 53, A movable portion having the function of may be provided. The movable part is arranged at a position visible to the player, and can be touched and operated. This movable part is basically operated by an attendant or an operator when the game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade. By continuing to rotate the movable part in the counterclockwise direction, for example, until there is a "click" response, other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 can be fixed. Lock is completed.

Inside the front frame 53 to which the specific decorative portion is attached, a specific decorative portion lock completion sensor for detecting the completion of locking of the movable portion is provided. is entered. A detection signal from the specific decorative portion lock completion sensor indicates a state in which another member arranged on the front frame 53 or another member arranged on the game board 2 is fixed and locked (hereinafter referred to as “specific decorative portion lock completion ), the logic for completing the lock of the specific decorative portion is established, and the movable portion is not rotated counterclockwise until there is a "click" response, or the movable portion is fixed, for example. direction, and other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 are not fixed (hereinafter referred to as "specific decorative part lock not completed"). An electrical circuit is constructed so that the specific decoration lock incompletion logic is the inverse of the decoration lock completion logic. The sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 displays a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L when it determines that the specific decoration is not locked based on the detection signal from the specific decoration lock completion sensor. , or a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67 . Note that the warning image is an image simulating the specific decorative portion instead of the lock incomplete sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and FIGS. A message MG3 is displayed that reads, "Turn the decorative portion in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock."

Note that if the wiring through which the detection signal from the specific decoration lock completion sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come off from the connector on the board, the specific decoration lock is completed. As for the logic of the detection signal from the sensor, an electric circuit is preconfigured so that the lock of the specific decorative portion is not completed. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 A trouble can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 7]
In the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. When the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 makes a determination, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, it is also possible to detect that an illegal instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152A and 152B) and issue a warning image or warning sound (specific sound). In the cylinder lock CYK, when an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the key slot, the internal cylinder (moving part) may rotate slightly (or may rotate halfway). In other words, the internal cylinder (movable part) may be operated by the player.

When an illegal instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (moving part) rotates slightly, the cylinder lock detection sensor detects the state in which the internal cylinder (moving part) is not completely rotated. A detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the payout control board 110 . A detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes an illegal opening logic when an illegal instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated, and an illegal instrument is detected in the cylinder lock CYK. is not inserted and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not rotated, the electric circuit is constructed so that the normal closing logic is obtained by reversing the illegal opening logic. The payout control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80 and receives the command when an illegal instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. The main control board 80 transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 90 . As a result, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can recognize that an illegal instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable portion) has not been completely rotated. 153(C), (D) and FIGS. 154(C), (D), an image simulating a cylinder lock is used as the warning image instead of the lock incomplete sword image KG shown in FIGS. Turn in the direction of the arrow until it "clicks" to lock it." message MG3 is displayed.

When the sub CPU 92 determines that an illegal instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (moving part) is not completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 displays a warning image on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen. 64L, or a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. FIG. Note that the warning image is an image simulating a cylinder lock CYK instead of the lock incomplete sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and FIGS.

If the wire through which the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wire and the connector on the board are about to come off, the cylinder lock detection sensor will not detect the signal. The logic of the signal is preconfigured with an electric circuit so that it becomes an illegal open logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can detect this trouble. A warning image or a warning sound (specific sound) can be used for notification.

By the way, the open state and the closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are detected by a front frame closing detection sensor. is input to the payout control board 110 . When the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in a closed state, the detection signal from the front frame close detection sensor becomes a closed logic, and the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached becomes a closed logic. An electric circuit is constructed so that when the frame and are in the open state, the closed logic is reversed to open logic.

If the wiring through which the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to an illegal act, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is changed. , an electric circuit is preconfigured so as to have an open logic. As a result, it is possible to inform the payout control board 110 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closing detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 sends this trouble to the main control board 80 as a command. The main control board 80 having received this command transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 90 . Thereby, the sub-control board 90 can notify by the door opening image and the door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in the opened state.

The front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are intended to be opened by staff or workers, but there is a risk that they may be opened due to fraudulent acts, so the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The state of the inner frame (open state, closed state) is monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to provide an image with a high alertness that can be conveyed to the surroundings of the game machine 1 compared to the warning image. Furthermore, it is necessary to make the sound highly informative, which can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 compared to the warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, when the sub CPU 92 determines that an illegal instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (moving part) is not completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 displays the warning image on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64R. It is displayed on the sub display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is played from the speaker 67. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 92 determines that an illegal instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 compares the warning image with the A highly informative door opening image that can be conveyed to the surroundings is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and compared with the warning sound (specific sound). A door opening sound with high information that can be transmitted to the surroundings of the game machine 1 is played from the speaker 67. - 特許庁

[Modification 8]
In the moving part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. However, as a warning image, a message MG2 "warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2 is a message MG3 saying "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it 'clicks' to complete the lock." Instead of displaying the arrow image YG, an error code (for example, "warning: error code E4") may be displayed. The sudden display of the error code can give the player a sense of unease and inform him that the player's action just before the error code was displayed was a bad action.

[Modification 9]
The moving part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning effect B in FIG.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of movable parts that can be operated by a player,
In the effect by the movable part, a first effect in which the effect condition can be achieved by the player's operation, and a second effect in which a warning is issued by the player's operation, can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E4-1,
While the first production is proceeding, the second production can be executed at the same time,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E4-1 or aspect E4-2,
having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the second effect, a specific image is displayed that tells how to cancel the warning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-3,
In the second effect, it is possible to output a specific sound that notifies the warning,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-4,
The movable part is capable of emitting light,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-5,
The movable part may have a decorative member,
A game machine characterized by

◇ [Aspect E4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-65,
The movable part is arranged at a position that is easily visible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as operation units to be operated by the player. , triggers, etc. may be used. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment uses display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a). The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
13... Third movable accessory 14... First movable accessory 15... Second movable accessory 17... Grand prize opening opening start opening 20... First start opening (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub display screen 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Effect control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image imitating the operation means;
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation means, the operation promotion image consisting of characters representing an operation method without including the name of the operation means. and
a first effect in which the operation prompting image is displayed in a state where the operation means image is not displayed on the display means, and the size of the displayed operation prompting image is reduced ;
After the first effect , a second effect in which the operation means image is displayed while the operation prompting image displayed in the first effect continues to be displayed from the first effect. and
After the second effect, a third effect in which both the operation prompting image and the operation means image change in size,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images